Digital PDFs

XX-C8E13-E7

June 1972

372 pages

Original

12MB

view download

OCR Version

13MB

view download

Document:	08 commands
Order Number:	XX-C8E13-E7
Revision:	0
Pages:	372
Original Filename:	08_commands.pdf

OCR Text

- 429 -

DEC-10-MRDC-D

gecsyUscemic
OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS

This manual reflects the software associated with the 5,05
monitor.

For individual system program version numbers,

refer to Page iii.

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION « MAYNARD, MASSACHUSETTS

- 430 -

COMMANDS

Ist Printing May 1971

2nd Printing (Rev) December 1971
3rd Printing (Rev) June 1972

The material in this manual is for informational purposes and is subject to change
without notice.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts:
DEC

PDP

FLIP CHIP
DIGITAL

COMPUTER LAB

FOCAL

- 431 -

COMMANDS

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS
The following versions of the software are discussed in this manual.,
ALCFIL

Version 7

INITIA

Version 3

BACKUP

Preliminary Information

KJOB

Version 47

BATCON

Version 6

LINED

Version 13

CDRSTK

Version 11

Version 53

COMPIL

Version 20

Monitor

5.05

COPY

Version 6

OMOUNT

Version 22

CREF

Version 46

OPSER

Version 4

DAEMON

Version 6

PIP

Version 32

DIRECT

Version 2 -

PLEASE

Version 11

DUMP

Version 4

QUEUE

Version 3

FILCOM

Version 16

QUOLST

Version 4

FILEX

Version 15

REATTA

Version 3

FUDGE2

Version 14

RESTORE

Preliminary Information

GLOB

Version 5

SETSRC

Version 11

GRIPE

Version 3

‘SYSTAT

Version 467

HELP

Version 3

TECO

Version 23

UMOUNT

Version 20

COMMANDS

- 432 -

COMMANDS

- 433 CONTENTS

Page

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1

1.2

Jobs

443

Monitor Mode and User Mode

444

1.3

Command Interpreters

1.3.1

Monitor Command Language Interpreter

445

1.3.1.1

Special Characters

446

1.3.2

Batch Command Interpreter

445

447

1.4

Command Formats

447

1;4.1
1.4.2

Command Names
Command Arguménts

447
448

1.4.2.1

Project~Programmer Numbers and Passwords

448

1.4.2.2

Device Names

448

1.4.2.3

File Structure Names

451

1.4.2.4

File Specifications

451

1.5

COMPIL~Class Commands

453

Indirect Commands (@ Construction)

454

1.5.2

The + Construction

455

].5;3

The = Construction-

1.5.4

The <> Construction

1.5.5

Compile Switches

457

1.5.6

Standard Processor

457

1.5.7

Processor Switches

458

1.5.8

LOADER Switches

460

1.5.1

CHAPTER 2

'
|

:
-

456
456

SYSTEM COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

2.1

Commands by Functional Groups

463

2.1.1

Job Initialization Commands

463

2.1.2

Facility Allocation Commands

464

2.1.3

Source File Preparation Commands

2.1.4

)

465

File Manipulation Commands

465

2.1.5

Object Program Preparation Commands

465

2.1.6

Object Program Control Commands

465

2.1.7

Object Program. Examination Commands

466

2.1.8

Multiple Job Control Commands

466

- 434 -

COMMANDS

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

2.1.9

Job Termination Command

466

2.1.10

Sending Messages

466

2.1.11

Job Information Commands

467

2.1.12

System Information Commands

467

ALCFIL proaram

468

ASSIGN command

470

ATTACH command

472

BACKSPACE command

474

BACKUP program

475

CLOSE command

479

COMPILE command

480

CONTINUE command

485

COPY command

486

COPY program

488

CORE command

491

CPUNCH command

493

CREATE command

498

CREF command

499

CSTART command
CCONTINUE command

500

D (deposit) command

502

DAYTIME command

504

DCORE command

505

DDT command

510

DEASSIGN command

512

DEBUG command

513

DELETE command

517

DETACH command

519

DIRECT command

520

DISMOUNT command

525

DSK command

527

DUMP command

529

DUMP program

530

E (examine) command

536

- 435 -

COMMANDS

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

EbIT command

537

EOF command

538

EXECUTE command

539

FILCOM program

543

FILE command

553

FILEX program

557

FINISH command

560

FUDGE command

562

FUDGE2 program

563

GET command

568

GLOB program

569

GRIPE program

573

HALT command

574

HELP command

575

INITIA command

577

JCONTINUE command

578

KJOB command

579

LIST command

584

LOAD command

585

LOCATE command

589

590

MAKE command

592

MOUNT commoand

593

OPSER program

597

PJOB command

601

PLEASE command

602

PLOT command

604

PRESERVE command

609

PRINT command

610

PROTECT command

616

QUEUE command

618

QUOLST program

631

R command

632

REASSIGN command

633

vii

- 436.-

COMMANDS

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

REATTA program

635

REENTER command

637

RENAME command

638

RESOURCES command

640

RESTORE program

641

REWIND command

645

RUN command

646

SAVE command

648

SCHED command

650

SEND command

651

SET BLOCKSIZE command

653

SET CDR command

654

SET CPU command

655

SET DENSITY command

657

SET DSKPRI command

658

SET HPQ command

659

SET SPOOL command

660

SETSRC program

662

SET TIME command

666

SET TTY or TTY command

668

SFT WATCH command

672

SKIP command

675

SSAVE command

677

START command

679

SUBMIT command

680

SYSTAT command

686

TECO command

693

TIME command

694

TPIINCH command

696

TYPE command

702

UNLOAD command

703

VERSION command

704

WHERE command

706

ZERO command

707

viii

- 437
-

COMMANDS

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

CHAPTER 3 BATCH SYSTEM COMMANDS
- Batch Components

3.1.2

The Queue Manager

710

3.1.3

The Batch Controller

710

3.1.4

The Output Spoolers

712

3.2

Submitting Jobs

712

3.2.1

Submifling a Job with Cards

713

3.2.1.

The $JOB Card

713

The $PASSWORD Card

713

The $FORTRAN Card

713
714

3.2.1.

3.2.1.
3.2.1.

709

The $DATA Card

The Stacker

The End of File Card

3.1.1

—

709

3.1

Output

)

714

3.2.2

Submitting a Job with a File

3.2.2.1

Image of the $JOB Card

714

-3.2.2.2

Image of the $FORTRAN Card

715

3.2.2.3

Image of the $EOD Card

715

3.2.2.4

Image of the $DATA Card

715

3.2.2.5

Running CDRSTK

715

3.2.3

Submitting a Job with a Control File to the Batch

714

Controller

716

3.2.4

Interjob Dependency

716

3.3

CDRSTK Control Cards

717

3.3.1

$ALGOL

718

3,3.2

$COBOL

719

3.3.3

$DATA

721

3.3.4

$DECK

723

3.3.5

$DUMP

723

3.3.6

$EOD

724

3.3.7

$ERROR

$NOERROR

724

3.3.8

$FORTRAN or $F40

725

3.3.9

$JOB

727

- 438 -

COMMAND
S

CONTENTS (Cont)

729

$MODE

730

$PASSWORD

731

.13

$RELOCATABLE

731

.14

$SEQUENCE

732

BATCON Control File Commands

732

734

.CHKPNT

735

.ERROR

735

.GOTO

735

736
737

.NOOPERATOR

737

. OPERATOR

737

.REQUEUE

738

.REVIVE

739

.SILENCE

739

Job Output

739

The Log File

740

1.1

CDRSTK Messages

740

1.2

CDRSTK Error Reporting

741

1.3

Batch Controller Messages

742

1.4

Batch Controller Error Reporting

742

Sample Jobs

743

AW
O
NN
-

—

. NOERROR

WwWwwWw

.BACKTO

wWwwWwWwwwwwwwwow

$MACRO

Page

CHAPTER 4

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

4.1

System Diagnostic Messages

748

4.2

Error Codes

780

APPENDIX A

STANDARD FILENAME EXTENSIONS

783

APPENDIX B

CARD CODES

787

APPENDIX C

TEMPORARY FILES

7921

APPENDIX D

SAVE AND SSAVE COMMANDS

795

COMMANDS

- 439 ILLUSTRATIONS

Page

Title

Figure No.

713

Typical Job on Cards

3-1

3-2

3-4

Sample Job #3

3-5

Sample Job #4

3-6

Sample Job #5

744

Sample Job #2

3-3

743

Sample Job #1.

744

745

]

746

TABLES

1-1
1-2

System Devices
Processor Switches

4-1
A-1
B-1
B-2

Error Codes
Filename Extensions
ASCII Card Codes
DEC-029 Card Codes

c-1

Temporary Files

B-3

Page

Title

Table No.

DEC-026 Card Codes

449
459
:

780
783
787
789

790
791

COMMANDS

- 440 -

FOREWORD

DECsystem=10 Operating System Commands is a complete reference document describing the commands

available in the DECsystem=10 operating system. The information presented in this manual reflects the
5.05 release of the monitor and other related programs.

Commands to both the monitor command lan-

guage interpreter and the programs in the Batch system are grouped in alphabetical order for easy reference to the command repertoire.
DECsystem=10 Operating System Commands does not include reference material on assembly language

programming.

This information can be found in DECsystem-10 Monitor Calls (DEC-10-MRRC-D),

which is intended for the experienced assembly language programmer.

Included in DECsystem=10

Monitor Calls are discussions of the monitor programmed operators and the various I/O devices connected to the system.

The two manuals, DECsystem-10 Operating System Commands and DECsystem=10

Monitor Calls, supersede the Timesharing Monitors Programmer's Reference Manual (DEC-T9-MTZD-D)
and all of its updates.

A third manual, Introduction to DECsystem=-10 Software (DEC-10-MZDA-D), is a general overview
of the DECsystem=10.

It is written for the person, not necessarily a programmer, who knows computers

and computing concepts and who desires to know the relationship between the various components of
the DECsystem=10.

This manual is not intended to be a programmer's reference manual, and therefore,

it is recommended that it be read af least once before reading the above-mentioned reference
documents.

SYNOPSIS OF DECsystem-10 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
Chapter 1 presents all of the commands available to fhe user and introduces the various components of

the operating system that interface with the user.

Chapter 2 is a detailed description of the commands

processed by the monitor command language interpreter.

Presented in' Chapter 3 are the commands to

the Batch system and o discussion of the programs in this system.

The DECsystem-10 system error mes—

sages and error codes arellisfed in Chapter 4 along with descriptive information on how to correct the
errors.

The appendices contain supplementary reference material and tables.

5.05 Monitor

xii

June 1972

- 441 -

COMMANDS
-

CONVENTIONS USED IN DECsystem-10 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
The following conventions have been used throughout this manual:
dev:

Any logical or physical device name.

list

A single file specification or a string of file specifications.
A file specification consists of a filename (with or without

The colon must be
included when a device is used as part of a file specification.

a filename extension), a device name if the file is not on
disk, a project-programmer number, if the file is not in the
user's disk area, and a protection code.

A pair of file specifications or a string of pairs of file speci=-

arg

fications.

jobn

A job number assigned by the monitor.

file.ext

Any legal filename and filename extension.

core

Decimal number of 1K blocks of core.

adr

An octal address.

C(adr)

The contents of an octal address.

[proj, prog
fs

Project-programmer numbers; the square brackets must be
included in the command string.

Any legal file structure name or abbreviation.
The symbol used to indicate an altmode.

A control character obtained by depressing the CTRL key
and then the character key x.
A back arrow used in command strings to separate the input and
output file specifications.

The system program response to a command string.
The monitor response to a command string.

The symbol used to indicafe that the user should depress the

RETURN key. This key must be used to terminate every command to the Monitor Command Language Interpreter.

Underscoring used to indicate computer typeout.

A decimal number.

An equal sign used in command strings to separate the
input and output file specifications.

COMMANDS

- 442 -

- 443 -

COMMANDS

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

The DECsystem=10 Operating System is the interface between the user and the actual machine.

The

operating system, or monitor, has many functions, some of which are:

scheduling multiple and simultaneous use of the system,

protecting users of the system from one another,

allowing access to system resources including peripheral devices,

providing a comprehensive disk file system,

directing data flow between peripheral devices and the user's program,

controlling non-interactive jobs, and

overlapping input-output operations with computations for high system efficiency.

The user communicates with the operating system by means of the monitor command language.

With

the command Ianguggé he may access all available resources of the computing system and obtain all
the services provided by the operating system.

1.1

JOBS

The DECsystem-10 computing system
is a multiprogramming system; that is, control is transferred rapidly among a number of jobs in such a way that all jobs appear to be running simultaneously.

The

fermiglg refers to the entire sequence of steps, From.beginning to end, that the user initiates from his

interactive terminal or card deck or that the operator initiates from his operator's console. When a
user initiates a job from his interactive terminal, the beginning of the job is designated by the LOGIN

command and the end by the KJOB command.

If a user initiates a job with a card deck, the beginning

of the job is the $JOB card and the end is the end-of-file card. Operator jobs usually begin when the
system is initialized and end when the system goes down.

Jobs, which may be timesharing, batch, or real-time in nature, may be initiated at the central computer sife or at remote locations connected by the telephone system.

is possible for him to initiate another job without killing the first one.

Once a user initiates a job, it

For example, a user can initiate

I a timesharing job and by using the SUBMIT monitor command submit a second job for batch processing
1-1

COMMANDS

- 444 -

(refer to Chapter 2). He may then wait for the results from this batch job, or have the results auto~
matically output while he continues his timesharing job.
In configuring and loading the DECsystem-10, the system administrator sets the maximum number of

jobs that his system can simultaneously handle. This number may be up to 127 jobs if the system has
enough memory, disk storage, processor capacity, and terminals to handle this load.
&

1.2

MONITOR MODE AND USER MODE

From the timesharing user's point of view, his terminal is in either monitor mode cr user mode.

monitor mode, each line the user types in is sent to the monitor command language interpreter.

The

execution of certain commands (as noted in the following examples) places the terminal in user mode.

When the terminal is in user mode, it becomes simply an 1/O device for that user.
programs use the terminal for two purposes.

In addition, user

The user program will either accept user command strings

from the terminal (user mode) or use the terminal as a direct 1/0 device (data mode).
Example (terminal dialogue):

monitor mode

<R P 1Ps

monitor command

user mode

ASK:PKOGI MACETTY: W

user command siring

data mode

THIS

FILE

monitor mode

%1C
R MACRO)

user mode

*3TTY$+DSKIPROG 1.0

data mode

user program using terminal
as input device

monitor command
user command string
user program using terminal
as an output device

assembly listing

The special character tC (produced by typing C with the CONTROL key depressed) is used by a timesharing user to stop a user program and return the terminal to monitor mode.

If the user program is

waiting for input from the terminal, the user needs to type only one tC to retum the terminal to

monitor mode; otherwise, he must type two 1C's.

Because of this procedure, the user knows that his

program is not waiting for input if there is no response from the monitor after one tC.

Certain com-

mands cause the user program to start running or to continue (as noted in the following chapter) but
leave the terminal in monitor mode.

- 445 -

COMMANDS

When the system is started, each terminal is in monitor mode ready for users to llog in. However, if
the system becomes fully loaded (i.e., the maximum number of jobs that the system is set to handle
.

has been initiated), then any unused terminals from which access is requested will receive the message
JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED.

The card-oriented Batch user can think of his cards as being in stack mode, monitor mode, or user

mode. V\{hen the card is in stack mode, it contains a control command beginning with a $ (refer to
Chapter 3) and is sent to the Stacker, CDRSTK. CDRSTK interprets these commands and performs var-

ious actions to create a control file for the Batch Controller. When fHe card is in monitor mode, it
contains a monitor command preceded by a period and is copied by CDRSTK into the control file.

When the card is in user mode, it contains a user-level program command preceded by an asterisk or
an equal sign and is also copied by CDRSTK into the conirol file.

As each line in the control file is

executed, the Batch Controller passes the monitor-level line to the monitor command language interpreter and the user-level line to the user program.
Example (sample card deck):

/i
USER MODE

|
]

%/X=SYS:LOADER. %

MONITOR MODE

.R PIP

MONITOR MODE

.QUEUE LPT:=PROG

STACK MODE
DATA MODE

STACK MODE

USER COMMAND STRING

MON(TOR COMMAND
MONITOR COMMAND

$EOD
MACRO

eno oF caro peck

CDRSTK CONTROL COMMAND
-

PROGRAM

$MACRO

CDRSTK CONTROL COMMAND

10-0897

1.3
1.3.1

COMMAND INTERPRETERS
Monitor Command Language Interpreter

When the terminal is in monitor mode, the user communicates with the monitor command language in-

terpreter.

By means of commands to this interpreter, the user may initialize jobs, allocate facilities,

prepare source files, manipulate files, prepare, control, and examine object programs, control job
sequences and multiple jobs, terminate jobs, send messages, and obtain job and system information.
The commands described in Chapter 2 are processed by this interpreter.

1-3

COMMANDS

- 446 -

Most commands are processed without delay. However, a command may be momentarily délayed if a
job is swapped out to the disk and the command requires that the job be resident in core; the command
is executed when the job is swapped into core. The completion of each command is signaled by the

output of a carriage return, line feed sequence.
lows the carriage return, line feed.

If the terminal is left in monitor mode, a period fol-

If the terminal is left in user mode, any response other than a

carriage return, line feed comes from the user's program. " For example, most standard system programs

immed'iate.y send an asterisk(*) to the user's terminal to indicate their readiness to accept user command strings.

The type~ahead technique may be employed by the experienced timesharing user at a terminal.

This

means that the user does not have to wait for the completion of one command before he can begin an-other.

For example, if two operations are desired from the monitor, the request for the second opera-

tion can be typed before receiving the period after completion of the first.
The command interpreter makes several checks before processing commands from users.

On disk systems,

if a user who has not logged in types a command that requires him to be logged in, the system responds

with
?LOGIN PLEASE
and the user's command is not executed.

where explicitly stated otherwise.

The commands discussed in Chapter 2 all require login except

When a command is recognized that requires the job to have core

and the job has no core allocated, the command interpreter responds with
?NO CORE ASSIGNED
and the user's command is not executed.

1.3.1.1

Special Characters - There are several special characters recognized by the monitor com=

mand language intempreter that cause specific functions to be performed. As noted previously, controlC (1C) interrupts the program that is currently running and retums the terminal to monitor mode.

This

character causes the input line back to the last break character (e.g., carriage return, line feed) to
be deleted (equivalent to the action of a tU).

Two control-C's are necessary if the user program is

not requesting input from the terminal (i.e., the program is in the middle of execution).

The RUBOUT key on the terminal generates a character that causes the last character typed to be deleted.

This permits correction of typing errors.

characters typed to be deleted.
slashes (\\ ).

Depressing the RUBOUT key n times causes the last n

The deleted characters are echoed on the terminal enclosed in back-

Characters beyond the last break character or characters already processed by the user

program are not deleted.

=447 -

COMMANDS

Control-U (tU) causes the deletion of the current line, back to the last breck character. The system
responds with a carriage return, line feed so that the line may be typed again.

Once a break charac-

ter has been typed, line-editing features ( tU and RUBOUT) can no longer be used on that line, 'excepi'
when running TECO.

Control-O (tQ) suppresses output to the terminal.

The system responds with a carriage return, line

feed sequence. A subsequent control~O re~enables output to the terminal. At remote stations, the
effect of the tO may be somewhat delayed.

1.3.2

Batch Command Interpreter

The monitor command language interpreter is used for all monitor commands submitted via the Batch

system. In addition, the Batch user issues commands,_thaf are only used by the Batch programs, Stacker
(CDRSTK) and Batch Controller (BATCON).

Control commands, discussed in Chapter 3, are processed

by the Stacker and, by means of these commands, the user can create a control file, a log file, and
data files; can enter jobs into the Batch input queue; and can insert monitor commands into the control
file.

An additional interpretation is done by the Batch Controller.

When the job is executed, the

Batch Controller processes the control file to pass monitor commands to the monitor command language
interpreter and user-level commands to the appropriate programs.

1.4 COMMAND FORMATS
Each command is a line of ASCII characters in upper and/or lower case. Spaces and TABs preceding
the command name are ignored. Comments may be typed on the same line as the command by preceding
the comment with a semicolon.

The monitor and batch command language interpreters do not interpret

or execute a line of comments. Every command to the monitor command interpreter should be termi-

nated by pressing the RETURN key on the console. In examples in this manual, the symbol ) is used
to indicate that the user should depress the RETURN key.

If the command is in error, the command up

to the error is typed out by the monitor preceded and followed by a ?, and the terminal remains in
monitor mode.

1.4.1

Command Names

Commands to the monitor command interpreter are alphabetic strings of one to six characters; charac-

ters after the sixth are ignored. Only enough characters to uniquely identify the command need be
typed.

It is recommended that a Batch job use the full command name since the abbreviations may

change with the addition of new commands.

- 448 -

COMMANDS

Installations choosing to implement additional commands should take care to preserve the uniqueness

of the first three letters of existing commands.
Control commands to the Stacker in the multiprogramming batch system must have a dollar sign (§) in
the first column of the card or the line and an alphabetic character in the second column.

Only the

first part of the command name need be specified; as long as the specified command name is unique, it
is accepted.

The first three characters of the command name are generally sufficient to ensure unique-

ness.

1.4.2

Command Arguments

Arguments follow the command name and are separated from it by a space or TAB.

If the monitor com-~

mand interpreter recognizes a command name, but a necessary argument is missing;, the monitor responds

with
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
Extra arguments are ignored.

1.4.2.1

Project-Progrommer Numbers and Passwords = Access to the DECsystem=10 is limited to

authorized users.

The system administrator provides each authorized user with a project number, a

programmer number, and a password.

The project numbers range from 1 to 377777 octal (numbers 1

to 10 are reserved for DEC) and the programmer numbers range from 1 to 777777 octal (numbers 1 to 7

are reserved for DEC and numbers 400000 to 777777 are reserved for special purpose.s)] . These numbers
identify the user and his file storage area on a file structure.

In a command string, the project and

programmer numbers are separated with a comma and must be enclosed in square brackets, e.g., [10,7].
The password is from one to six SIXBIT characters and is only used when logging on the computing system.

To maintain password security, the monitor does not echo the password.

On terminals with local

copy (refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls), a mask is typed to moke the password unreadable.

1.4.2.2

Device Names - Associated with each system device controlled by the computing system is

a physical device name.

This name consists of three letters, zero to three numerals specifying the

unit number, and a colon. Table 1-1 lists the generic physical device names associated with the
various system devices.

When the programmer number is from 1 to 7, all project numbers are reserved for DEC.

1-6

- 449 -

COMMANDS

Table 1-1
System Devices

Device

Generic Physical Device Name

All Disks

ALL:

Card Punch

CDP:

Card Reader
Console TTY

CDR:
_

DECtape

CTY:

DTx:T

Disk

DSK:

Packs

DPx:T

Fixed-Head
Display

FHx:t
DIS:

Experimental System Library

‘

NEW:

Help Library
Line Printer

HLP:
LPT:

Magnetic Tape

MTA:

Operator Teminal

OPR:

Paper-tape Punch

" Paper-tape Reader

Plotter

‘

PTR:

PLT:

Pseudo-TTY

System Library

PTP:

PTY:

SYS:

Teminal

- TTY:

tX represents A,B, ..., indicating the first controller, second con-

troller, etc.

The user may also assign a logical device name to a physical device.

The logical name is from one to

six alphanumeric characters of the user's choice, followed by a colon, and is used synonymously with

a physical device name in all references to the device.

Logical device names allow the user , when

writing his program, to use arbitrarily selected device names, which he assigns to the most convenient
physical devices at run time.

However, care should be exercised when assigning logical device names

because these names have priority over physical device names. For example, if a DECtape is assigned

the logical name DSK » then all of the user's programs attempting to use the disk via the device name
DSK will use the DECtape instead.

Except for disk devices, only one logical device name can be associated at any one time with a physi-

cal device.

The same logical name can be used for a second physical device by disassociating it from

the first device and associating it with the second device via the ASSIGN command. Logical device

5.05 Monitor

1-7

- 450 -

COMMANDS

names are disassociated from all devices with the DEASSIGN command (refer to Chapter 2). Subsequent ASSIGN commands (refer to Chapter 2) to all devices except disk devices replace the old logical
name with the new one.
I3

The following is an example of the use of physical and logical device names.. Underscoring is used to
indicate computer typeout.

User requests a DECtape drive with the logical name

ABC:")

SASSIGN DTA:

ABC,
DTA6

DEVICE

ASSIGNED

=ASSIGN PTP:

Monitor has given the user drive DTA6.
mounts a DECtape on drive DTA6.

The user

User requests the paper=tape punch with the logical

ABC:)

name ABC. .
%

LOGICAL
PTP

NAME

WAS

USE,

ASS5IGNED

Paper-tape punch is reserved, and ABC now refers to
the PTP.

_.R PIP,)

User requests the system program PIP.(Peripheral Interchange Program).

fABC:*DTA6:FILEA)

User issues a command string to PIP asking that file
FILEA be transferred from device DTA6 to logical
device ABC (physical device PTP: which is assigned
to the user).

*1C

User returns to monitor mode.

sASSIGN DTA:

DEF:)

User requests another DECtape drive with logical name
DEF.

<ASSIGNED

JOB

N1sN2sees

All drives are in use by the specified jobs. No
DECtape drive is assigned, and no logical assignment is made.

+ASSIGN DTA6:

DEF:,)

User requests drive DTA6 (which he already has) with
logical name DEF.

The copy of the directory currently

in core is cleared.
DEVICE

DTA6

ASSIGNED

User mounts a new DECtape on the previously assigned
drive. The new DECtape directory is read into core
when next accessed.
User deassigns PTP, thereby clearing the logical name

DEASSIGN PTP:)

ABC.

R PIPJD

User requests PIP.

)
#ABC 1 «DEF tFILEB

User requests that file FILEB be transferred from device
DEF to device ABC.

DFVICE

ABC

DCES

NOT

EXIST

The logical device name ABC is no longer assigned.

(continued on next page)
1-8

- 451 -

*tC

+ASSIGN DTA6:

XYZ:)

COMMANDS

User returns fo monitor mode.

User requests drive DTA6 again with logical name XYZ.
The logical name DEF is no longer associated with DTAé.

The old directory is cleared from core.
A6
A
DEVICE DTA6
ASSIGNED

User mounts a new DECtape. The new directory is- ready]i

into core when next accessed.

1.4.2.3 File Structure Names - Disk devices are grouped according to file structures, which are
logical arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more disk units of the same type.

Examples of

types of disk units are: an RPO2 disk pack or an RM10B drum. Although a file structure can exist on
exactly one disk unit, it can be distributed over several disk units of the same type and designated

by a single name. However, two file structures cannot exist on the same unit. Each file structure has

a SIXBIT name specified by the operator at structure defini tion time. This name can consist of five or
less alphanumeric characters and must not duplicate a physical device name, a unit name, or an exist-

ing file structure name. The recommended names for public file structures are DSKA, DSKB, ...,
DSKN in order of decreasing speed.

1.4.2.4 File Specifications = All information (programs and data) in the system is stored as named
Each named file has associated with it a file specification which consists of
O
b WN -

files.

the physical device name or file structure name,
the filename, the filename extension,
the ordered list of directory names, and
the access protection code.

The first four items of the file specification are necessary to uniquel/y identify a disk file. File
specifications are ignored when given for devices other than DECtape or disk since these two devices

are the only dirécfory-orienfed devices. In addition, items 4 and 5 do not apply to DECtapes.
The physical device name used for DECtape or the file structure name used for disk may be any legal
I device name discussed in the foregoing sections. A colon should always follow the device name; e.g.,

DTA3:. The filename is from one to six SIXBIT characters; all characters after the sixth are ignored. The
filename extension is a period following by zero to three characters and is used to indicate the type of

information
in the file. (Refer to Appendix A for a list of standard filename extensions.) It is recommended that only the standard extensions be used even though other extensions are valid. Most programs

I only recognize filenames and _exfensions consisting of letters and digits. The ordered list of directory
names identifies the disk area in which the file is stored. This list can be a user file directory (UFD)

5.05 Monitor

1-9

COMMANDS

- 452 -

represented by the project-programmer number of the owner of the files in the directory or can be a
user file directory followed by one or more sub~file directories (SFDs).

Monitor Calls for a description of SFDs.)

(Refer to the DECsystem=10

The directory name must be enclosed in square brackets. .

The access protection of the file is a three~digit code designating which users can read or write the

file and must be enclosed in angle brackets. The protection code is specified only for output files.
For a given file, the users are divided into three groups:

project number as the owner, and the rest of the users.

the owner of the file, the users with the sanie

The sfandard protection code is 057 which

allows users in the owner's project fo read and execute the file and prevents access by all other users.
(For a complete description of access protection, refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls.)

The standard

protection code can be redefined by the various installations.

In command strings, the filename, the device name if the file is not on disk, and the directory name if
the file is not in the user's disk area, are required.

The filename extension, the device name if the

file is on the disk, the directory name if the file is in the user's disk area, and the protection code are
optional.

The following are examples of file specifications:

TEXT.MAC
DTAS3:FILEA
DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]

filename and extension
device and filename
device, filename, extension, and
directory name

DSKA:MAIN,F4[27,235] <057>

’

complete file specification

Many command strings allow the wildcard construction to be used.

This means that the filename, the .

extension, or the directory nome may be replaced totally with an asterisk or partially with a question
mark to designate certain filenames, extensions, or directories.

designate the entire filename, extension, or directory name.

The asterisk is used as a wild field to

For example,

filename . *

All files with this filename and any extension.

* ext

All files with this extension and any filename.

* *

All files,

* * [project,
*]

All files in directories with this project number and
any programmer number,

The question mark is used as a wild character to designate pofi' of the filename, extension, or directory name.

A question mark is used for each character that is to be matched; i.e., PR?? matches on

four characters or less.

For example,

filename .M??

All files with this filename and any extension

beginning with M.
TES ?? .ext

All files with this extension and any filename up

??.?27?°%

All files with filenames of two characters or less.

to 5§ characters beginning with TES.

(continued on next page)

- 453 -

[25,577]

‘

COMMANDS

Al files in directories with the project number 25
and the programmer numbers 500-577.

The asterisk and the question mark can be specified together in the same construction.

??.%

All files with filenames of two characters or less.

In addition, the directory name can be specified with the project number, the programmer number, or

both numbers missing. The following are examples of the various ways of representing a particular
directory.

[15,23]

The UFD [15,23].

The UFD that has the user's project number and the

[,30]

specified programmer number (30).

The UFD that has the specified project number (36)

[36,]

and the user's programmer number.

The user's UFD.

[,]
-]

The user's default directory which may be different

‘

from his UFD (refer to the DECsystem-10 Monitor

Calls and the SETSRC program).

The number sign can be used to represent a filename or extension that contains characters that cannot
be typed because they have special meanings in the system. For example, if o file with the name
* MAC were typed in a command string, the user would be referencing all files with the extension

.MAC since the * designates all files with the specified exi'ension MAC. To allow a filename or ex-

tension to be typed that is composed of special characters, the user employs the number sign followed

by the octal representation of the SIXBIT filename or extension. For example, #120000000000 repre-~

sents the file named *. If letters or digits are pqrf of the filename or the extension containing the
special characters, the octal representation of the letters or digits must also appear following the number sign.', In other words, the number sign must be placed af the beginning of the filename and all

characters following must be represented in octal. Furthermore, this construction can be used to read

the contents-of a UFD. For example, #000010000073.UFD [1,1] représenfs the file named 10,73.UFD
in the direcfory [t,11.

The programs that recognize the number sign are DUMP, DIRECT, PIP, and QUEUE.

1.5 COMPIL-CLASS COMMANDS

Certain monitor commands simplify communication between the user and the system programs of the
DECsystem=10 by allowing the user to type a short, concise monitor command string that causes a series

of operations to be performed. These commands are known as COMPIL-class commands and are de-

scribed in detail in Chapter 2. These commands cause the monitor to run the COMPIL program, which
5.05 Monitor

C1=11

COMMANDS

- 454 -

deciphers the command and constructs new command strings for the system program (e.g., TECO, PIP,
LINED, FORTRAN) that actually processes the command.

Each time CREATE, MAKE, EDIT, or TECC

is executed, the command with its arguments is written as a-temporary file in core or on the disk.
Therefore, the file specification last edited may be recalled for the next edit without specifying the
arguments again.

(This is an exception to the requirement that the filename must always be specified.)

For example, if the command
. CREATE PROGX.MAC

is executed, then the user may later type the command
LEDIT
instead of

EDIT PROGX .MAC

assuming no other EDIT=class command that changed the filename was used in the interim.
The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands with their arguments are also written in a

temporary file so that the file specification given last may be recalled without specifying the arguments
again.

The temporary files containing these file specifications have filenames of the following form:

nnnxx.x.TMP
where nnn is the user's job number in decimal, with leading zeros to make three digits, and xxx speci=
fies the use of the file.

1.5.1

Refer to Appendix C for a list of the temporary files.

Indirect Commands (@ Construction)

When there are many program names and switches, they can be put into a file and do not have to be
typed in for each compilation.

This is accomplished by the use of the @ file construction, which

may be combined with any COMPIL~-class command.
The @ file may appear at any point after the first word in the command.

In this construction, the

word file must be a filename, which may have an extension and a project-programmer number.

If the

extension is omitted, a search is made for the command file with a null extension and then for a com~

mand file with the extension .CMD.

The information in the specified command file is then put into

the command string to replace the characters @ file.

COMMANDS

- 455For example, if the file FLIST contains the string

T,
FILED
FILEB, FILEC/LIS

then the command

.COMPILE FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED',FILEZ
could be replaced by

.COMPILE FILEA ,@FLIST,FILEZ

Command files may contain the @ file construction to a depth of nine levels.

If this process of in-

is rapidly exceeded and an error mesdirection results in files pointing in a loop, the maximum depth
sage is produced.

The following rules apply in handling format characters in a command file.

Spaces are used to delimit words but are otherwise ignored. Similarly, the characters

To allow long command strings, command terminators (CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED,
ALTMODE) are ignored if the first nonblank character after a sequence of command

TAB, VTAB, and FORM are treated like spaces.

terminators is a comma. Otherwise, they are treated either as commas by the COMPILE,
LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands or as command terminators by all other
‘

COMPIL~class commands.

d.
e.

Blank lines are completely ignored because strings of returns and line feeds are considered

together.

‘

Comments may be included in command files by preceding the comment with a semicolon.

All text from the semicolon to the line feed is ignored.

If command files are sequenced, the sequence numbers are ignored.

1.5.2 The + ConsfrUci'ion2
A single relocatable binary file may be produced from a collection of input source files by the "+"

construction. For example: a user may wish fo compile the parameter file, PAR.MAC, the switch fi le,
SWIT.MAC, and the file that is the body of the program, MAIN.MAC. This is specified by the
following command:

.COMPILE PAR+SWIT+MAIN

]However, if BLISS, SNOBOL, and MACX11 (the PDP=11 assembler for the PDP-10) are added as

is obtained. These processors will be
processors, one less level of indirecting for each processop
set. These assembly switch settings are
are
switches
assembly
appropriate
recognized only when the
not supported.

2 )5 in COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, dnd DEBUG commands only.
1-13

COMMANDS

- 456 -

The name of the last input file in the string is given to any output (.REL, .CRF, and/or .LST) files

(e.g., MAIN in the preceding example).

The source files in the "+" construction may each con-

tain device and extension information and project-programmer numbers.

1.5.3 The= Consfruuci'ioh]
Usually the filename of the relocatable binary file is the same as that of the source file, with the extension specifying the difference.

This can be changed by the "=" construction, which allows a file~

name other than the source filename to be given to the associated output files.

For example:

if a

binary file named BINARY .REL is desired from a source program named SOURCE.MAC, the following
command is used.

.COMPILE BINARY=SOURCE

This technique may be used to specify an output name to a file produced by the use of "+" construction.
To give the name WHOLE.REL to the binary file produced by PART1.MAC and PART2.MAC, the fol-

lowing is typed.
.COMPILE WHOLE=PART1+PART?2

Although the most common use of the

construction is to change the filename of the output files,

this technique may be used to change any of the other default conditions.

processor output is DSK:source
.REL [self].

The default condition for

For example: if the output is desired on DTA3 with the

filename FILEX, the following command may be used:
EXECUTE DTA3:FILEX=FILE1.F4

1.5.4 The <> Construcfion]
The <> construction causes the programs within the angle brackets to be assembled with the same
parameter file.

If +is used, it must appear before the <> construction.

For example to assemble the

files LPTSER.MAC, PTPSER.MAC, and PTRSER.MAC, each with the parameter file PAR.MAC, the

user could type
. COMPILE PAR+LPTSER, PAR+PTPSER, PAR+PTRSER

With the angle brackets, however, the command becomes
.COMPILE PAR+<LPTSER, PTPSER, PTRSER >

However, the following command is invalid:
. COMPILE <LPTSER, PTPSER, PTRSER >+PAR

]Used in COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands only.
1-14

- 457 -

1.5.5

- COMMANDS

Compile Switches

The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands can be modified by including switches in the
command string. These switches can be used to indicate the processor to be used, to force a compila-~
ton, to generate listings, to create libraries, to search user libraries, and to obtain loader maps.

Each switch is preceded by a slcsh- and terminated Wifh a non~alphanumeric character, usually a space -

or a comma. The switch used can be abbreviated if the abbreviation uniquely identifies the switch.
The switches used with these four commands are either temporary or permanent. A temporary switch

applies only to the file immediately preceding it. An intervening space or comma cannot separate the
For example,

filename and the switch.

.COMPILE PROG , TEST/MACRO,
SUBLET
The /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.

A permanent switch applies fo all files following it until modified by a subsequent switch. It is separated from the file by spaces, commas, or a combination of both.

For example,

.COMPILE PROG /MACRO TEST,SUBLET
.COMPILE PROG,/MACRO, TEST,SUBLET
.COMPILE PROG ,/MACRO TEST,SUBLET
- COMPILE PROG /MACRO, TEST,SUBLET

In all four examples, the /MACRO switch applies to the files named TEST and SUBLET.
The switches that can be used with the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands are de-

scribed in the individual command explanations in Chapter 2.

1.5.6

Standard Processor

Files with recognizable processor extensions (e.g., .MAC, .CBL, .F4, .ALG) are always translated

by the processor implied by the exfension.] For example, a file named DATPRO .CBL will be proces‘'sed by the COBOL compiler.- Files without a recognizable processor extension are compiled or assem-

bled according to the standard processor, which is normally FORTRAN at the beginning of the command

string. The user can control the setting of the standard processor by including switches in the
COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command string.

Refer to the appropriate command descrip~

tions in\ Chapter 2 for the switches used to change the standard processor.

]By setting the appropriate assembly switches, SNOBOL, BLISS, and MACX11 (the PDP-11 assembler
for the PDP-10) will be recognized as processors. However, these assembly switch settings are not

supported .

COMMANDS

- 458 -

In the following examples, the installation has chosen FORTRAN as the standard processor.

The

command

.COMPILE NOEXT

causes the file nomed NOEXT (with a null extension) to be compiled by FORTRAN.

The command

.COMPILE FILEZ .MIN

also compiles the file with FORTRAN since .MIN is not recognized as a processor extension.

The com-

mand

.COMPILE APART,DATA/COBOL, TEST

causes the files APART and TEST to be compiled by FORTRAN and the file DATA by COBOL.
The switches used to change the standard processor can be temporary or permanent switches (refer

Paragraph 1.5.5).

For example,

.COMPILE APART, /CCBOL DATA,TEST
causes APART to be compiled by FORTRAN, and DATA and TEST to be compiled by COBOL.
Note that if source files are specified with the appropriate extensions, the subject of
processor can be disregarded,

the standard

since files with processor extensions are always translated by the proces-

sor implied.

1.5.7

Processor Switches

Occasionally it is necessary
fo pass switches to the assembler or compiler being used in a COMPILE,
LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command.

For each translation (assembly or compilation), the COMPIL.

program sends a command string to the translator containing three parts:

output file, and a listing file.

the source files , a binary

To incluae switches with these files, the user must:

If the + construction is used, group the switches according to each related source

Group the switches according to the three types of files (source, binary, and listing)

each file.

¢.

For each source file, separate the groups of switches by commas.

Enclose all the switches for each source file within one set of parentheses.

(SSSS)

{SSSS,BBBB)
(SSSS,BBBB,LLLL)
€.

file.

Only source switches are present.

Source and binary switches are present.

Source, binary, and listing switches are present.

Place each parenthesized string immediately after the source file to which it refers.

The processor switches are listed in Table 1-2, along with their meanings and the types of files to

which they apply.

for

- 459 -

COMMANDS

Table 1-2
Processor Switches
{

Processor

Source

ALGOL

Binary

Set dynamic storage region for own arrays

(known as the heap).

The source file has line numbers in columns

E
-

73-80.

List the source program.

Suppress the error print out on the terminal .

COBOL

Meaning

Listing

Allow the listing of code generated.

Produce a cross-referenced listing of all user-

defined items in the source program.

Check the program for errors but do not gene~

Delimit the words in quotes.

Suppress the listing of the source program.

rate code.

Use the preceding file descriptor as a library

file whenever the COPY verb is encountered.

Print a map showing the parameters of the user)

defined item.

Suppress output of source errors on the terminal .
o

Do not generate trace calls and symbols.

Produce a two-segment object program. The

high segment contains the resident sections of
the Procedure division; the low segment con-

" tains everything else. When the object program
is loaded, LIBOL is added to the high segment.

w
z

Rewind the magnetic tape.
Zero the DECtape directory .

moOw
>

The source file has sequence numbers in columns

Advance magnetic tape reel by one file.
Backspace magnetic tape reel by one file.
Generate a CREF-type cross-reference listing.

FORTRAN

1-6 and comments starting in column 73.

List error message codes only.

Print an octal listing of the binary program in
addition to the symbolic listing. Must be ac=

companied by /M.
Translate the letter D in column 1 as a space
and treat the line as a normal FORTRAN state-

ment.

Suppress oufput of error messages on the terminal .

Produce code for execution on the KATO if run-

ning on the KI10, and vice-versa.
N

NS
-

s -

Include MACRO coding in output listing.

Skip to the logical end of magnetic tape.

Rewind the magnetic tape.
Zero the DECtape directory.

(continued on next page)

1-17

COMMANDS

- 460
-

Table 1-2 (Cont)

Binary

Listing

Aw>

Source

Advance magnetic tape reel by one file.

Processor

® >

Processor Switches

List macro expansions.

Meaning

MACRO

Backspace magnetic tape reel by one file.

Produce listing file in a format acceptable as

input to CREF.

Byte sizes match the format of the instruction.
Byte sizes are two 18-bit fields.
Reinstate listing (used after list suppression by §

switch).

Suppress ASCII text in macro and repeat expan-—

PPO0Z

TM0

0 TM0

sion (SALL).

Suppress error printouts on the terminal .
Allow literals to occupy only one line.
Increase the size of the pushdown list.
Suppress questionable (Q) error indications on

NXZE=w

2-'

s—l

the listing.

Suppress listing.

Skip to the logical end of magnetic tape.

Rewind the magnetic tape.
Suppress all macro expansions.

Zero the DECtape directory
.

Examples:
DEBUG

TL.,;..IT (N)

COMPILE

Suppress typeout of errors during assembly .

GUTPUT=MTA® : (W>S5M)/L

Rewind the magtape (W), compile the first file,

produce binary output for the KI10(S), andin-

clude the MACRO codingin the output hshng

(M).

Output files are given the names

OUTPUT.REL and OUTPUT,LST.
COMPILE/MACRO

A=MTAB :(W,,0) /L

Rewind the magtape (W), compile the first file,
and suppress Q (questionable) error indications on

the listing.

Note that when a binary switch is not
present, the delimiting comma must appear.

«COMPILE

/MACRO

A=MTA%:(.,,8)/L

Compile file at current position of the tape and
suppress Q error indications on the listing. Note

that when the source and binary switches are not

present, the delimiting commas must appear,
1.5.8

LOADER Switches

In complex loading processes, it may be necessary to pass switches
to the LOADER to direct its opera~

tion.

This is accomplished by the % character.

The % has the same meaning as that of the / in the

1-18

COMMANDS

- 461 -

like the /, the % takes a
LOADER'S command string (refer to the LOADER documentation). Also,
it. Therefore, fo
leading sign (+or =) and one letter (or a sequence of digits and one letter) following
set a program origin of 6000 for progrom C, the user types
LOAD A,B,%60000C,D

The COMPIL program allows more than one LOADER switch to be specified.
.LOAD PROG %F/MAP

Refer to the LOAD command in Chapter 2 for a description of /MAP

T
Q

The most commonly used LOADER switches are:
%S Load with symbols.

%nO Set program origin to n.

%F Cause early search of the default libraries.
%P Prevent search of the default libraries.

For example:

COMMANDS

- 462
~

- 463 -

COMMANDS

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

Although there is one operating system for all configurations of the DECsystem=10, some commands

may not be included in each DECsystem=10. This is especially true of the DECsystem=1040, the basic
rsysi'em intended for small installations that do not want all of the system’s features because of a con=

straint on core. Commands are deleted from the DECsystem=1040 by Feotfire test switches (recognized -

by the beginning characters FT) defined at MONGEN time. In the standard DECsystem=-1040, many
of these switches are not set ‘and, therefore, the corresponding commands are not available. This saves

core but limits various features of the operating system. In the command déscripfions that follow, the
Characteristics section indicates if the switch is normally off in the DECsystem-1040. If not stated,

the command is available on all DECsystem-10s.

In many cases, there are two commands fo run a program. For exorr;ple, the indirect command MAKE

and the direct command R TECO both run the TECO program; In the DECsystem=1040, the switch

implementing the indirect command may not be set but the switch implementing the direct command is
always set. Therefore, it is always possible to run a program with the .R or .RUN command, even
if the switch implementing the corresponding indirect command is off.

2.1

COMMANDS BY FUNCTIONAL GROUPS

Although the commands are arranged in alphabetical order for ease of reference, they can be divided
into functional groups for ease of learning. These groups with their associated commands are as follows.

2.1.1

Job Initialization Commands

Since the system is limited fo authorized persons, these commands protect the system from unauthorized
use.
INITIA
LOGIN

COMMANDS

2.1.2

- 464 -

Facility Allocation Commands

The monitor allocates peripheral devices, file structure storage, and core memory to users on request
and protects these allocated facilities from interference by other users.

Software provisions are incor-

porated in the monitor to differentiate the central station from the remote stations.

Certain monitor

commands, for example, ASSIGN and PLEASE, include station identification arguments to allow both

user-access and allocation of system resources at any station. This feature gives the user considerable
flexibility in allocating system facilities and directing input and output to the station of his choice.
For example, by specifying a station number, the user can assign devices and input data from a periph-

eral device at a station other than his own. In addition, by using the LOCATE command, he con
logically establish his job at a station other than his physical station.

If the station identification

argument is not included in a command, the system aufomatically directs input and output to the user's
logical station.

The user's legical station is the same as his physical station if he has not issued the

LOCATE command.

When a nonsharable device is assigned to a job, it is removed from the monitor's pool of available
sources.

Any attempt by another user to reference or assign the device fails.

re-

Thus, a user should

never leave the system without first returning his allocated facilities to the monitor pool.

Allocated

facilities are automatically returned to the monitor pool when the user deassigns them or kills his job.

Until a user returns these facilities, no other users may utilize them except through opérai‘or intervention.

Assignable devices (i.e., nondisk and nonspooled devices) in the monitor's pool of available resources
are designated as being either unrestricted or restricted devices.

An unrestricted device can be as-

signed (ASSIGN command or INIT UUO) by any user. A restricted device can be assigned only by a
privileged job (i.e., a job logged in under [1,2] or running with the JACCT bit set).

However, a

nonprivileged user can have ¢ restricted device assigned to him via the MOUNT command.

This com=-

mand allows operator intervention for the selection or denial of a particular device; thus the

operator

can control the use of the assignable devices. This is particularly useful when there are multiprogram-

ming batch and interactive jobs competing for the same devices.

The restricted status of a device is set

or removed by the OPSER commands :RESTRICT and :UNRESTRICT.

The facility allocation commands are as follows:

ASSIGN

DISMOUNT

REASSIGN

FINISH

SET DENSITY

SET BLOCKSIZE

SET DSKPRI

CORE

LOCATE

DEASSIGN

SET CDR

MOUNT

SET HPQ

SET CPU

SET SPOOL
SET TTY or TTY

5.05 Monitor

2-2

COMMANDS

~ 465 -

2.1.3 Source File Preparation ‘Commands

file. The
‘These commands call the system editing programs in order to create or edit a specified text ter-oriented
system editing programs available are LINED -(a line-oriented editor) and TECO (a charac
requires
editor). In general, the editor used to create the file should be used for editing, since LINED
line-blocked files and TECO does not.
CREATE
EDIT

MAKE
TECO

2.1.4

File Manipulation Commands

. He can list
‘The commands in this group allow the user to manipulate his files to any desired extent
ly via the
source files, and DECtape and disk directories on the terminal or the line printer, possib user can
on, the
spooling mechanism. He can delete or rename files from disk and DECtape. In additi
formats,
transfer files between standard 1/O devices, perform conversion between various core image
a new file or reand read and write various directory formats. Disk space can be either allocated for
allocated for an existing file. Finally, the user can place files in the system queues and obtain

of entries in those queues.

ALCFIL

DIRECT

PRESERVE

REWIND

COPY

FILEX

QUEUE

TY PE

BACKSPACE
BACKUP

CPUNCH
DELETE

SKIP
SUBMIT

PRINT
PROTECT

EOF
FILE

TPUNCH

RENAME

LIST

PLOT

UNLOAD

RESTORE

ZERO

2.1.5 Object Program Preparation Commands

The commands in this group are used fo prepare object programs and save the user's
two files.

COMPILE
CREF
DEBUG -

EXECUTE .
FUDGE
FUDGE2

-2.1.6 Object Program Control Commands

listings

core area as one or

LOAD
SAVE
SSAVE

storage deBy using the commands in this group, the user can load core image files from retrievable
from the
vices (i.e., disk, DECtape, magnetic tape). These files can be retrieved and cqntrolled
ic tape
user's terminal. Files stored on disk and DECtape are addressable by name. Files on mognet
2-3

COMMANDS

- 466 -

require the user fo pre=position the tape to

the beginning of the file.

Calls, Chapter 1, for a description of the job data
area
tions in this group.

CONT (CCONT)

REENTER

JCONT

GET

2.1.7

locations referenced by the command descrip-

HALT

DDT

Refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor

RUN

START (CSTART)

Object Program Examination Commands

The commands in this group aid the user in examini

ng ond analyzing his object program.

user's core area can be taken and later process

Dumps of the

ed by the system program DUMP according to

the argu-

ments specified by the user.

D (deposit)
DCORE

DUMP

E (examine)

2,1.8

Multiple Job Control Commands

There is not necessarily a one~-to-one relatio

nship between jobs and terminals.

a job, but the user or operator may issue comman

A terminal must initiate

ds fo permit a job to float in a detached state where

it is not associated with a particular termina

Thus, more than one job may be controlled

from the

same terminal.

ATTACH

CSTART

CCONT

2.1.9

OPSER

DETACH

REATTA

Job Termination Command

When the user leaves the system, all facilities
facility pool so that they are available to

allocated fo his job must be returned to the monitor

other users.

KJOB

2.1.10

Sending Messages

The commands in this group allow the user interco

nsole communication with other users of the system

or with operators at any station.

In addition, the user may record information

by the operations staff at a later time.
GRIPE
PLEASE

SEND

in a disk file to be read

- 467 -

2.1.11

COMMANDS

Job Information Commands

The user can obtain various job-related information with this group of commands. This information
includes the number of his job, the quotas for each file structure associated with his job, and the running time and disk space that his job has used. In addition, the user may type or modify his file struc~
ture search list.

2.1.12

SET TIME
SET WATCH

QUOLST
SETSRC

DSK
PJOB

TIME

System Information Commands

With the commands in this group, the user is able to obtain system status information, including the
time of day, the list of available devices, file structures, and physical units not in file structures, the
scheduled use of the system, and the location of a specific peripheral device.
DAY TIME
RESOURCES

SCHED
SYSTAT

VERSION
WHERE

- 468 -

COMMANDS

ALCFIL program

Function

The ALCFIL program enables the user to allocate space for a new file or reallocate space
for an existing file in one contiguous region on the disk.

The size of the region is restricted

by the size of the cluster count field (usually 512) times the cluster size of the file structure
times the number of pointers in a disk device data block (not less than 10).
Command Format
R ALCFIL

The ALCFIL program responds with

/H FOR HELP
FILE?

The user may respond with
dev:file.ext [proj,prog]

or /H (for help)
or /X (to exit)
where dev: is a file structure or physical unit name. If dev: is omitted, DSK is assumed.
~ If one of the other arguments is omitted, O is assumed. If a filename is specified, the
number of blocks presently allocated, if nonzero, is typed.

ALCFIL responds with

ALLOCATE?
User may type N or N,M (decimal numbers)
N = total number of blocks to be allocated for the file.
M = logical block within the file structure or unit (depending on dev:)

where the allocation is to begin.

If the total number of blocks requested cannot be allocated (because of disk quotas),
a partial allocation is given and the message
'
PARTIAL ALLOCATION ONLY

is typed.

The user can issue the DIRECT command with the ALLOCATE switch to
determine the number of blocks allocated. If the new blocks can be allocated,
the message

ALLOCATED
is typed.

Since an extended ENTER (refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls) is executed to
allocate the new blocks, the file need not exist before the blocks are allocated.

.Version 7 ALCFIL

2-6

- 469 -

COMMANDS

[ALCFJ.L program (Cont)l

Characteristics
The R ALCFIL command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the ALCFIL program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Associated Messages
~ Refer to Chapter 4.
Example
R ALCFIL)
/H

FOR

HELP.

FILE? TEST4.TSJT)
ALLOCATE? 2000,
.ALLOCATED

FILE? TESTS.TST,)
ALLOCATE? 1000)

ALLOCATED

FILE? TESTS5.TST,)
1000

BLOCKS

ALLOCATE?

ALREADY

500,

ALLOCATED

FILE? DSKB:FILEAS

ALLOCATE?
PARTIAL

FILE?

3000,)

ALLOCATION

ONLY
-

EXIT

+DIR/ALLOC))
FILEA

Version 7 ALCFIL

175

<B57>

‘

l4-APRR=72

2-7

DSKB:

COMMANDS

- 470 -

ASSIGN command

Functien

The ASSIGN command allocates an 1/O device to the user's job for the duration of the job or
until a DEASSIGN command is given.

This command, applied to DECtapes, clears the copy

of the directory currently in core, forcing any directory references to read a new copy from
the tape. (Refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls for further details.) Although DECtape is the only device that should be ASSIGNed before use, to ensure that the
monitor has a copy of the proper DECtape directory in its core area, it is wise to ASSIGN all

devices, such as magnetic tape, before use.
Command Formats
].

ASSIGN phys-devn log~dev
phys-devn = any physical device listed in Table

1-1 in Paragraph 1.4.2.2, followed by

a 1-to=3 digit number representing a specific unit, or any file structure name. This argu~
ment is required. With this command format, the monitor attempts to assign the device

specifically requested. If unable to assign the device, the monitor types an appropriate
message (refer to Chapter 4).
log-dev = a logical name assigned by the user. This argument is optional.
disk devices, only one logical name can be ossigned to a physical device.

Except for
Subsequent

ASSIGN commands to all devices except disk devices replace the old logical name with

the new one.

Logical names are disassociated from all devices by the DEASSIGN com-

mand .

ASSIGN phys-devSnn log=dev

phys=devSnn = any physical device followed by the letter S and a 1 or 2 digit number
representing a specific station, or any file structure name.

This argument is required.

With this command format, the monitor attempts to assign a device ot the requested
station. An appropriate message is typed if the device cannot be assigned (refer to
Chapter 4).
log~dev = same as above.

ASSIGN phys~dev log-dev

phys-dev = any physical device followed by a null argument implying any device of the
designated type, or any file structure name.

This argument is required.

With this com-

mand format, the monitor attempts to assign the requested device at the user's logical

station. If this type of device does not exist af the user's logical station, the monitor
attempts to assign the device at the central station. If undble to assign the device, the
monitor types an appropriate message (refer to Chapter 4).
log-dev = same as above.

- 471 -

COMMANDS

ASSIGN command (Cont)|

Characteristics

The ASSIGN command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions

A comma may not be used to separate the logical and physical device names.

If a comma is
used, the monitor terminates its scan af the comma; therefore, the logical name is not assigned.

Non-privileged jobs (i.e., jobs not logged in as [1,2] or running with JACCT set) can only

use this command to allocate unrestricted I/O devices.
non-privileged jobs via the MOUNT command.

Restricted devices can be obtained by

The ASSIGN when issued by a privileged job

allocates both restricted and unrestricted devices.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
+ASSIGN

LPT2
+AS

LPT21:)

ASSIGNED

The user assigns a specific line printer (LPT2).

CDRS2:)

ChR4 ASSIGNFD
«ASSIGN
TTY1

TTY1:LPT:)

ASSIGMNFD

The user assigns TTY 1 and gives it logical name
\

LPT.

oAS LPT2)
LPT4

The user assigns any available card reader at

station 2.

The user assigfis any available line printer. The

ASSIGNED

LPT chosen is at either the user's station or the

central station.

=ASSIGN DTAZ:)

PDEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE
2ASSIGN
DTA4

DTAL)

ASSIGNED

A non-privileged user attempted to allocate o re~

stricted device (DTA2).

‘The user then uses the generic device name (DTA)
‘to obtain the device.

He could have used the

MOUNT command fo assign the restricted device

DTA2.

5.05 Monitor

2-9

COMMANDS

- 472 -

ATTACH command

Function

The ATTACH command detaches the current job, if any, and connects the terminal fo a
detached job.

Command Format

ATTACH job [proj,prog]

job = the job number of the job to which the terminal is to be attached. This argument
is required.

[proj,prog] = the project-programmer number of the originator of the desired job. This
argument may be omitted if it is the same as the job to which the terminal is currently
attached. The operator (device OPR) or a user logged=in under [1,2] may always
attach to a job although another terminal is attached, provided he specifies the proper

[proj ,prog] .

To prevent users from attaching the jobs without knowing the PASSWORD associated with the
job, a new job is temporarily created when the [proj,prog] argument is specified. This tem=
porary job runs LOGIN to check the password. This can result in the current job not being
able to attach to the specified job if the job capacity of the system would be exceeded with
the creation of the temporary job. However, the current job is still detached even if there
are no available jobs. The operater or any job logged=in as [1,2] can always attach to
another job since they do not require the creation of a temporary job.

Characteristics
The ATTACH command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,

Depends on FTATTACH which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Restrictions

Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1. Batch users cannot issue this
command.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

- 473 -

COMMANDS

|[ATTACH command (Cont)|

Examples

LATT 1)
FROM JOB .5

The user attaches to job 1 from job 5. The two jobs
have the same [proj,prog] and therefore, the argument
is not required,

The user logs=in and is given job7. TTY25is now

2L0OG 27,235)

JOB 7 %804 TTY25
BASSWORD}

attached to job 7.

%AT;ACH 36
ROM
JoR
7

The user attaches to an existing job (36) and there~
by detaches his current job (7). Since the [proj,
prog] associated with job 36 is different than the
user's, he must specify the [proj,prog] of the de-

1634

23=FEB=72

WED

150,27))

PASSWORD?

sired job. The system then requests the PASSWORD.
If the given PASSWORD is correct, the terminal is
attached to job 36,
The terminal is attached to job 36.
JATTACH 7))
PCAN'T

ATT

The user attempts to attach to job 7. The command
fails because the [proj,prog] of job 7 is not the

T0O JOB

same as the [proj,prog] of job 36. The terminal is
still attached'to job 36.

JK/FD

JOB 36,USER [5@,27) LOGGED OFF TTIY25 1635 23«FER72
RUNTIME

OMIN,0Q,348SEC

The user killed job 36. The terminal is currently
not attached to any job.
Since the terminal is currently not attached to a
job, the commadnd fails because there is no [proj,
prog] to compare with the [proj,prog] of job 7.

ATTACH 7))
FCAN'T "ATY TO JOB

«ATTACH 7

FASSWORD

[27,2393)

The command is accepted and the PASSWORD is requested. The message FROM JOBn is not output
since the terminal was not attached to a job.

The terminal is attached to job 7.,

.5.05 Monitor

- 474 ~

COMMANDS

BACKSPACE command |

Function

The BACKSPACE command spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified number of files or
physical records. This command, depending on its arguments, is equivalent to the following
PIP command strings:

MTAn: (M #nB) «
MTAn: (M #nP) «
Command Formats

BACKSPACE MTAn: x FILES
skips backward x files.

BACKSPACE MTAn: x RECORDS

skips backward x records.

Characteristics
The BACKSPACE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
sBAC

MTA2:

sBACKSP

7 RECOKRDS
)

MTA3:

FILES)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the PIP
prograr
.

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-12

COMMANDS

- 475 -

BACKUP program

Function

The BACKUP program encbles the user to save disk files on magnetic tape (MTA), DECtape
(DTA), or disk (DSK). The save can be of the entire disk or selected subsets of the disk.
The BACKUP program places data in the following files:
1.

BACKUP SET file

This file contains the data saved on the backup medium (MTA, DSK, DTA) with

one BACKUP command. When data is saved on disk, the BACKUP SET file is one
file with file delimiting control words. When written on magnetic tape, it is
several files written in buffered binary mode.

- The BACKUP SET file is composed of a BACKUP header, a user set, and a
BACKUP trailer. The BACKUP header is one block in length and contains infor-

mation concerning the creation of the BACKUP SET." This information includes the
name and date of creation, the name of the system, and the user identification.

The USER SET contains the directories and the files associated with the directories
for all user areas. Even if a user has files on more than one file structure, his
files will be saved together. For example, all files on all file structures for user
1,2 will be stored before the files for user 1,3. In other words, the user set is
ordered according to project-programmer number, not according to file structures.
However, within individual project-programmer numbers, all files on one file
structure are saved before files on another.

The BACKUP trailer contains information about the user set that was just created.

This information includes the time, the date, and the length of the user set. The
BACKUP trailer immediately follows the user set.

INDEX file

This file contains the directories and the filenames of all the disk areas that have
been saved on the backup medium. In addition, it contains the relative block
number in the BACKUP SET file where each element (file) begins. The index file
is the last file writien on the backup medium and is separated from the BACKUP
SET file. It can be saved on DECtape and can be listed, if desired.

COMMAND RECOVERY file

This file contains information that indicates how much of the user's command has

been processed and how much of the command remains. It is updated ot every
check point in order to make crash recovery possible.
.

Llog File

The user is given a log file to aid him in error analysis. This file contains a
record of either all actions performed by the BACKUP and RESTORE programs or
only errors encountered in processing. The log file is a listing file.

Preliminary Information

2-13

COMMANDS

- 476 -

{BACKUP program (Cont)|

Command Format

R BACKUP

The user may type any of the following commands after the slash output by the BACKUP

program.

These commands are stored in core and are processed only when a START

command is given by the user.

All commands are terminated with a carriage return.

Multiple files may be specified in one command string by separating the filenames

with commas.

The full wildcard construction may be used to replace the filename, the

extension, or the directory (refer to Paragraph 1.4.2.4).

Command

Explanation

BACKSPACE FILE

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a user file header and positions
the tape immediately before the header.

BACKSPACE SET

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a BACKUP header and positions
the tape either immediately before the header or to the beginning of the tape if there is no BACKUP header (i.e., there is
only one BACKUP SET on the tape).

BACKSPACE UFD

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a UFD header and positions the
tape immediately before the header.

BACKUP dev2: file descriptor «

dev1: [proj,prog] /switch

Writes the designated file on dev2 from devl.

The user may

specify files to be taken from and/or written to a user's area
other than his own, provided that he has access privileges to

the user areas.

The device arguments are required.

/switch = /EXCEPT file descriptor
Indicates the files and/or areas that should not be written as
BACKUP files.

DELETE dev: file.ext

Deletes the file named from the specified device.

The specified

device must be the device for which a BACKUP has been taken.

DENSITY MTAn:x

Sets the magnetic tope density as specified by x.
x =2

200 bpi

x=5

556 bpi

x=8

800 bpi

The default is the system standard defined at MONGEN time.
DUMP ON dev: file.ext

Dump the contents of the BACKUP set file beginning at the
present position and ending at the next file control word.

types of errors are ignored.

All

The device on which the dump is

to be written may not be a listing device.
ERROR DUMP dev:

Returns to the last file control word and dumps the file on the
device specified if a transmission error occurs during the backup

of any file.

(continued on next page)

Preliminary Information

COMMANDS

- 477 -

[BACKUP program (Cont)|

Explanation

Command

Writes the index file with the designated filename on the device
named. The index file is also written on the disk and saved as

INDEX dev: file.ext

the last file on the backup medium. The default is
.BKP where nnnn corresponds to the tape sequence
DSK:MTnnnn
number.,

Writes a file on the specified device which contains a record of

LOG dev: file.ext /switch

the operations performed.

The default is DSK:BACKUP.LOG.

/Switch = /ERROR
Logs only the errors.

This switch is optional.

If omitted, all

operations are recorded.

Specifies the parity on magnetic tape as odd or even. The de-

PARITY dev: ODD or EVEN

fault is odd.

REWIND dev:

On moagnetic tape, closes the backup set and rewinds the tape.
On disk, closes the backup set.

START

Begins execution
-of a series of commands sent previously. Com-

mands are not processed until a START command is given. If
there are no commands fo be processed when the START is executed, the command recovery file is searched for executable
.

commands.

UNLOAD dev:

Performs a rewind and unload to magnetic tape.
The user may restart the BACKUP program at any time. By issuing o tC tC START
sequence, the user can cancel present operations and specify new commands. A
tC START sequence deletes the command recovery file if the next command given to
the BACKUP program is not START. If START is the next command to BACKUP, the
command recovery file is scanned, and the BACKUP program continues according to
the information in the file. A tC CONT sequence does not delete the command

recovery file, but completes the current requests. After all requests have been completed, the BACKUP program closes out the log file,.and types BACKUP COMPLETED
and an asterisk on the user's terminal indicating that it is ready for more requests.
MTA rewinds due to the magnetic tape being filled are actually rewind and unload
operations to insure that the magnetic tape is not overwritten. When the BACKUP program reaches completion, the magnetic tape last written on remains in position unless
a REWIND command is given.
Characteristics
The R BACKUP command:

Runs the BACKUP program, thereby desl'roying fhe user's core image.

Preliminary Information

2-15

COMMANDS

- 478 -

rBA,CKUP'prwam (Cont) |

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

~ oR BACKUP)
/BACKUP

MTA1:«DSKE:[10,22%] v

)

ZINDEX DSKCEBAKFIL.LST)

/STARY)

ISBACKYP COMPLETED

/7C

Preliminary Information

16145122

2-16

- 479 -

COMMANDS
CLOSE command

Function

The CLOSE command terminates any input or output currently in progress on the specified de-

vice, and automatically performs the CLOSE UUO (refer to DECsystem~10 Monitor Calls).

Files are CLOSEd, but not RELEASEd, and logical names and device assignments are preserved.

Since most programs CLOSE files when they finish performing a command string, the CLOSE

command.is provided for the occurrence of a program not terminating or a program being debugged. This command causes any disk files being written to be entered into the user's UFD.

If a CLOSE is not done, the next RESET by a command (R, RUN, GET) or program will delete
the partially written file.

Command Format
CLOSE dev

dev = the logical or-physical name of the device on which 1/O is to be terminated.
This argument is optional.

If dev is omitted, /O is terminated on all devices, except for the job's controlling
terminal, and all files are CLOSEd.

Characteristics
The CLOSE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.

Depends on FTFINISH which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Restrictions

The user cannot continue, but can start at the beginning or enter DDT.
Associated Messoges

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
CLOSE

PTR3)

DEVAL)

CLOSE)

2=17

COMMANDS

- 480 -

EOMPH..E command 1
Function

The COMPILE command produces relocatable binary files (LREL files) and/or compilation listings for the specified source program files. The assembler or compiler used is determined by
the source file extension or by switches in the command string. If no switches appear in the
command string, the following translators are used:
Source File Extension

Translator Used

ALG

ALGOL compiler

.CBL
F4

COBOL compiler
FORTRAN compiler (F40)

MAC

MACRO assembler

.SNO

SNOBOL compiler2

.BLI

BLISS compiler?

P11

MACXT1 cssembler2

Other than above, or null

Standard processor, which is usually FORTRAN ot
the beginning of the command string (refer to
Paragraph 1.5.6).
NOTE

If a source file has a recognizable processor extension (see
above), the processor cannot be changed with a switch. The
only time that a processor can be specified with a switch is
when the source file hos a non-recognizable processor exten=
sion or a null extension,

Normally the source file is translated if there is no corresponding binary (.REL) file or if the
source file's date and time is later than or equal fo the binary file's date and time. If the
binary file is newer than the source file, the source file is not translated and the current .REL
file is used.

However, switches can be used to override this action.

Each time the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or.DEBUG command is executed, the command
with ifs arguments is remembered in a temporary file on disk, or in core if the monitor has the
TMPCOR feature. Therefore, the filename used last can be recalled for the next command
without specifying the arguments again (refer to Paragraph 1.5).
The COMPILE command accepts several command constructions: the @ construction (indirect
commands), the + construction, the = construction, and the < > construction. Refer to
Paragraph 1.5 for a complete description of each of these constructions.

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the appropriate processor.

2SNOBOL, BLISS, and MACX11 (the PDP-11 assembler for the PDP-10) will be recognized as pro=
cessors only if the appropriate ussembly switches are set.

are not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-18

However, these assembly switch settings

- 481 -

COMMANDS

[COMPILE command (Cont)|

Command Format

COMPILE list -

list = a single file specification, or a string of file specifications separated by commas.

A file specification consists of a device name, a filename with or without an extension, and a directory name.

The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These switches can
be temporary or permanent switches (refer to Paragraph 1.5.5). Note that all the

switches allowed with the LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands can be used with

the COMPILE command. However, only the switches pertinent to COMPILE are listed
below; the others are ignored.

/ALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the extension of ALG.

/BLISS!
/COBOL

‘

Compile the file with BLISS. Assumed for files with the extension

of .BLI.

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the extension of .CBL.

/COMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even though a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file. This switch is
used fo obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to obtain"a
listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not performed if the binary file is newer than the source file.

/ CREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the disk for each file
compiled for later processing by the CREF program. These files
have the filename of the source file and the extension of .CRF.

The file can then be listed with the CREF command. However,
with COBOL files, the cross-referenced listing is always appended to the listing file. No additional command need be given tfo
obtain the listing.

' /FORTRAN

Compile the file with FORTRAN, Assumed for files with the extension of .F4 and all files with non-recognizable processor extensions (if FORTRAN is the standard processor).

BLISS will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this

assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

COMMANDS

- 482

COMPILE command (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL files produced

by the command string. When the FUDGE command is given, PIP
reads this file in order to generate a library REL file.

Arguments

to this switch are:

/FUDGE:dev:file.ext [proj ,prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the file.

DSK: is assumed.

file.ext = the name of the library file.

The filename is required.
If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be .REL.
[proj,prog] - the directory in which to place the file.

The user's

directory is assumed if none is given.

This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all .REL
files generated by the command string.

JLIST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled, with the filename of the source file and the extension of .LST.

These files can

be listed later with the LIST command. Unless this switch is specified, listing files are not generated except in COBOL; COBOL
listings are always generated.

/MACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO.

Assumed for files with extension

of .MAC,

/MACXTT

Assemble the file with MACX11. Assumed for files wifh- extension
of .P11,

/NOCOMPILE

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing a compilation on
a source file whose date is not as recent as the date on the binary

file. /NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NOLIST

Do not generate listing files.

This is the default action except for

COBOL files; COBOL listings are always generated.

/SNOBOL]

Compile the file with SNOBOL.
sion of .SNO,

Assumed for files with an exten‘

SNOBOL and MACXT1 (the PDP-11 assembler for the PDP=10) will be recognized as processors only

if the appropriate assembly switches are set.

However, these assembly switch settings are not

supported.
Version 20 COMPIL

2-20

- 483-

COMMANDS

[COMPlLE command (Cont)J

Characteristics

The COMPILE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the appropriate processor.
Restrictions

The wildcard construction cannot be used.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
«COMPILE

PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/COBOL
)

Compiles PROG (with null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC with MACRO, and
MANAGE (with null extension) with COBOL only if REL files do not exist with later

dates. A listing file is generated only for MANAGE. The files generated are
PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST.

_.-COMPILE /L1IST SIGN.MAC,TABLES/NDLIST;MULTI.ALG)
Compiles SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with null extension) with FORTRAN,
and MULTI.ALG with ALGOL. Listing files are generated for SIGN.MAC and
MULTI.ALG.

_.__CUMPILE/CREF/COMPILE DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD)

Forces a compilation of the source files although current .REL files exist and generates
cross-referenced listing files. The files created are DIVIDE.CRF, DIVIDE.REL,
SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF, and ADD.REL.
«COMPILE /FUDGE :MONITR.RELOLIBALL )

Compiles the files contained in the command file LIBALL and enters the names of all

the REL files generated in a temporary disk file. When the FUDGE command is given,
PIP generates the library REL file with name MONITR.REL. The library is created with
the REL files in the same order as they were specified in the command file.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-21

COMMANDS

- 484 -

[ COMPILE command (Cont)|

Examples (cont)
«COMPILE

OUTPUT=MTAGS (W,S,M)/L)

Rewinds the magnetic tape (W), compiles the first file with FORTRAN, produces binary
output for the KA10 (S), and includes the MACRO coding in the output listing (M).
These switches are processor switches (refer to Paragraph 1.5.7). A listing file is gene~
rated with the name OUTPUT.LST, along with the file OUTPUT.REL.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-22

- COMMANDS

- 485 -

CONTINUE command
Function

-The CONTINUE command starts the program af the saved program counter address stored in

.JBPC by a HALT command: (tC) or a HALT instruction. Refer to DECsystem=-10 Monitor Calls
"
for a description of the job data area.

Command Format
CONTINUE

Characteristics
The CONTINUE command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Requires core.

Does not require LOGIN,

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

Run a program called LOOP in your disk area.

~RUN LCOP)
*C

sDAYTIME)

23-FEB-72

sCONT)

Stop the program.

Check the time of day.

16:33:19

‘

Continue the program.

2-23

COMMANDS

- 486 -

COPY qommand 1
Function

The COPY command transfers files from one standard1/O device to another. The command

string can contain one device output specification and any number of input specifications.
The equal sign separates the destination (output) side from the source (input) side. This com=mand runs PIP and performs the basic PIP function of transferring files.
Command Format

COPY dev: file.ext [proj,prog]l <nnn>=dev: file.ext [proj,prog]l, file.ext [proj,progl, ...
~dev: = a physical or logizal device name. If the device name is omitted, DSK: is
assumed,

file.ext = the name of the file(s) fo be used on input or for output. If the output filename is omitted, the input filemane is assumed. PIP combines the files if many input
files are being transferred to one output file. If many input files are being transferred
to the same number of output files, PIP uses the /X switch to keep the files separate.
The wildcard construction is allowed.

[proj,prog] = the disk area in which either the files are to be read or written, If this
argument is omitted, the user's default disk area is assumed. The user may transfer files
to or from another area only if he has access to the area.
<nnn> = the protection code to be given to the output file(s).
standard is assigned.

If omitted, the system

Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in the COPY command string.
When COMPIL interprets the command string, it passes the switches on to PIP,
Characteristics

The COPY command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chepter 4.

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Version 20 COMPIL Version 32 PIP

2-24

COMMANDS

- 487 -

| cOPY command (Cont)|

Examples

)
{COPY=DTA3: FILNAM.MACs MANY.CEL»> COMMON.ALG
The three files from DTA3 are transferred to the user's disk area with the same file-

names.

.COPY DTA3:

OUTPUT=*.*)

All files in the user's disk are transferred to one file on DTA3 with the name
OUTPUT.

)
.COPY FILEA.*=DTAl: SOURCE.*
The input files on DTA1 named SOURCE with any extension are transferred to DSK with
the filename FILEA and the same extension. The number of output files equal the
number of input files.

~COPY YOUKS.CBL (20,

171 = MINE.CBL )

The file MINE.CBL from the user's disk area is transferred to [20,17] disk area with

the name YOURS.CBL. The user must have privileges to write in area [20,17].

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-25

COMMANDS

- 488 -

COPY program

Function

PBWON
—

The COPY program is a DECtape copy routine that allows the user to
Copy the entire contents of an input DECtape to an output DECtape.
Zero all blocks on an output DECtape and clear the directory.
Perform a word-by-word comparison of two DECtapes.
Load a bootstrap loader and write it in blocks 0, 1, and 2 of the output DECtape.

Command Format

.R COPY.)
*output DTA:=input DTA: /switches

/switches = one or more of the following switches. Switches are preceded by a slash
or enclosed in parentheses and can appear anywhere in the command string .

Copy all blacks from the input DECtape to the output DECtape.

Do not restart the program ofter a parity error,
sage and continue the program.

Type the available switches and their meonings.‘

Load the bootstrap loader into a core buffer. COPY expects the loader
to be on logical device PTR in the file named BSLDR.REL. Note that

Output an error mes=

COPY must be SAVed if the loader is to be preserved with the COPY
core image.

Suppress the directory listing.

Write the bootstrap loader in blocks 0, 1, and 2 of the output DECtape.
This switch accepts, as input from the terminal, a core bank or offset.
The loader is offset and then written on the tape.

core bank = nnnK (16K to 256K)
offset = 1000 to 777600 octal

/Z
/6

Verify the similarities of the two DECtapes by performing a word-byword comparison and typing on the terminal the number of discrepancies
discovered.

Zero all blocks of the output DECtape and clear the directory .
Leok for the directory in PDP=6 format (i.e., in block one instead of

block 144),

Version 6 COPY

2-26

- 489 -

COMMANDS

| COPY program (Cont)|

Command Format (cont)

If no switches are specified, /C (copy) and /V (verify) are assumed by default.

Note

that upon completion, the directoryin core may not agree with the directory of the
output DECfcpe. The output DECtape should be reassigned to guarantee that the
directoryin core is up=to-date.

Characteristics

The R COPY command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the COPY program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

K COPY)
*DTAT:

Run COPY

= DTA3: )

Copy the contents of DTA3 to DTA7 and determine
~if the two DECtapes are the same (default condition). If the DECfopes disagree, the number of
discrepanciesis typed on the terminal.

iDTAQ 1/2= )

Zero all blocks and clear the directory on DTA2,

*1C

Return to monitor mode.

sASSIGN DSK:PTK:)

The bootstrap loader must be on logical device PTR.

+RENAME BSLDR.KEL=DTBGOT.xEL,)

COPY expects the bootstrap loader to be named

BSLDR.

R COPY )

Run COPY

*/L )

’

Load the bootstrap loader into a core buffer.

*1C

Return fo monitor mode.

<SAVE DSK:iCOPY )

Version 6 COPY

Save COPY so that the bootsirap loader is preserved

with the COPY core image.

2-27

- 490 -

COMMANDS

[COPY progfam (Cont)J
Examples (cont)
sSTART)

Start the COPY program.

#DTAS:/T=)

Write the bootstrap loader in blocks 0, 1, and 2 of
DTAS.

TYPE

CORE

BANK

AND

OFFSET

FOk

DTBOOT

Respond with size of core bank or offset.

E4K )
*1C

Version 6 COPY

Size of core bank (64K core bank = 177000 offset,

top of core =1000)

Return to monitor mode.

2-28

- 491 -

COMMANDS

CORE

command

Function

The CORE command types or modifies the amount of core assigned to the user's job. Because
programs usually allocate core, the user generally does not need this command. It is included
for completeness and is used more frequently in non-swapping systems than in swapping systems.
If the job is locked into core, this command with a nonzero argument cannot be satisfied and:
therefore gives an erroneous return,

Command. Format
CORE n

n = a decimal number. This argument is optional.

If n is omitted, the monitor types out the amount of core used and does not change the
core assignment.

If n =0, the low and high segments disappear from the virtual addressing space of the

job.

If n >0, n represents the total number-of blocks of core to be assigned fo the job from
this point on.

If n is less than high plus minimum low segment size, n plus high segment size is

assumed.,

Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words or 512 words (a page) by

following n with the letter K or P, respectively. For example, 3P represents 3 pages
or 1536 words. If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words) is assumed.

On systems with the KA10 processor (DECsystem~1040, 1050, or 1055), 1024 -words
is the minimum unit of allocation and therefore,, all arguments are rounded up to the
- nearest multiple of 1024 words. For example, 3P on the KA10 is treated the same as
2K,

Characteristics
The CORE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting data.

5.05 Monitor

2-29

COMMANDS

- 492 -

l CORE command (Confcfl

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
sCOKE

+CORE)
5+ /46K

VIR«

CCKE

CCRE

sCOKE

LEFT

274

10P,)

«CORF

10+

/93P

CCRE

VIR.CORE

LEFT

5.05 Monitor

549P

2-30

- 493 -

COMMANDS

CPUNCH command

Function

The CPUNCH command is used to place entries into the card punch output queue. This com=

mand is equivalent to the following form of the QUEUE command:
QUEUE CDP: job name = list of input specifications
Command Format

CPUNCH iobndmé = list of input specifications
jobname = name of the job being entered into the queuve. The default is the name of
the first file in the request, not the name of the first file given. These differ when the
the first file given does not yet exist,

input specifications = a single file specification or a string of file specifications, separated by commas, for the disk files being processed. A file specification is in the
form dev:file.ext [proj,prog]l."

dev: = any file structure to which CDPSPL will have access; the default is DSK:.
file.ext = names of the files. The filename is optional. The default for the first filename is *, the default for subsequent files is the last filename used. The extension
can be omitted; the default is .CDP.
[proj,prog] = a directory to which the user has access; the user's directory is assumed
if none is specified.

Note that if all arguments to the command are omitted (i.e., only the command name is given),
the listing of all entries in the card punch queue for all jobs of all users is output.
. The wildcard construction can be used for the input specifications. Switches that aid in con=structing the queue entry can also appear as part of the input specifications. These switches
are divided into three categories:

Queue~operation = Only one of these switches can be placed in the command
string because they define the type of queue request. The switch used can appear
anywhere in the command string.

General = Each switch in this category can appear only once in the command

string because they affect the entire request. The switch used can appear any=
where in the command string.

File control = Any number of these switches can appear in the command string
because they are specific to individual files within the request. The switch used
must be adjacent to the file to which it applies. If the switch precedes the filename, it becomes the default for subsequent files.

Version 3 QUEQE

2-31

COMMANDS

- 494 -

[CPUNCH command (Cont)|

Command Format (cont)
The following switches can be used with the CPUNCH command.

Switch

/AFTER:tt

Explanation

Category

Process the request after the specified time; tt is either

General

in the form of hhmm (time of day) or thhmm (time later

than the current time). The resulting AFTER time must
be less then the DEADLINE time. If the switch, or the

value of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constraints
are assumed
.,

/BEFORE:t

Quevue only the files with a creation date before time
t where t is in the form dd=mmm=-yy hhmm,

General

If the

switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, no
BEFORE constraints are assumed.

/BEGIN:n

Start the output on the nth card.

The default is to

File Control

begin output on the first card.

/COPIES:n

Repeat the output the specified number of times.
N must be less than 64,

are needed, two separate requests must be made.
this switch is not specified, the default is 1.

/CREATE

File Control

If more than 63 copies
If

Make a new entry into the card punch output queve.

Queuve Operation

This switch is the default for the queue-operation

switches.

/DEADLINE:tt

Process the request before the specified time; tt is

General

either in the form hhmm (time of day) or thhmm

(time later than the current time).

The resulting

DEADLINE time must be greater than the AFTER time.

If the switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, no DEADLINE constraints are assumed.

/DISPOSE:DELETE
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE

Delete the file after spooling.
Save the file after spooling.

File Control

This is the default for

all files except files with extensions .LST, .TMP,
or .CDP (if protection of .CDP is Oxx).

Version 3 QUEUE

2-32

File Control

- 495 -

COMMANDS

[CPUNCH command (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)
Explanation

Switch

/DISPOSE:RENAME

Rename the file from the specified directory immediately, remove it from the logged-out quota, and-

Category

File Control

delete it after spooling. This is the default for files
with extensions of .LST, .TMP, and, if the protection
is Oxx, .CDP.

List the entries in the card punch queue, but do not update the queues. Therefore, the list may not be an upto-date listing but the listing will be faster than with

Queve Operation

/FORMS:a

Place the output on the specified form. The argument
to the switch must be six alphabetic characters. The
default is that normal forms are used.

General

/KILL

Remove the specified entry from the card punch queue.
This switch can be used for deleting a previouslysubmitted request as long as the request has not been
by the Spoolers.
started

Queue Operation

Limit the output to the specified number
of cards.

General

After updating the queues, list the entries in the card
punch queue; if this switch, along with all other
switches, is omitted, all entries for all jobs of all

Queue Operation

Alter the specified parameters in the job. This switch
requires that the user have access rights to the job.
It can be used for altering a previously submitted re~
quest as long as the request has not been started by the
Spooler.
'

Queue Operation

/LIST,

users are listed,

/MODIFY

Version 3

QUEUE

2-33

COMMANDS

- 496 -

[CPUNCH command (ContT]

Command Format (cont)

Switch

/NEW

Explanation

Category

Accept the request even if the file does not yet exist.
An appropriate error message is given if the file does

File Contro!

not exist by the time the request is processed by the

spooler,
/NULL

Accept the request even if there is nothing in the re-

quest (i.e., create a queue entry to be later modified). No error message is given if there are no files

. Generqgl

in the request.

/OKNONE

Do not output message if no files match the wildcard

construction.

/PHY SICAL

This is assumed at KJOB time.

Suppress logical device name assignments for the device

File Control

Assign the specified external priority (n=0 to 62) to the
request. The larger the number, the greater priority

General

Assign the protection nnn (octal) to the job.

ngerol

»specified.

/PRIORITY
:n

File Control

the job has. The default is 10 if no switch is given
and 20 if the switch is specified without a value.

/PROTECT:nnn

If the

switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, the
standard protection is assumed.

/PUNCH:026

Punch the files in 026 Hollerith code.

If a /PUNCH: -

switch is not given the files are punched according to
the data mode specified in the file,

File Control

/PUNCH:ASCII

Punch the files in ASCII card code. If a /PUNCH:
switch is not given, the files are punched according
to the data mode specified in the file.

File Control

/PUNCH:BINARY

Punch the files in binary card code. If a /PUNCH:
switch is not given, the files are punched according
to the data mode specified in the file,
'

File Control

/PUNCH:D029

Punch the files in DEC029 card code. If a /PUNCH:
switch is not given, the files are punched according
to the data mode specified in the file.

File Control

/PUNCH:IMAGE

Punch the files in image card code. If a /PUNCH:
switch is not given, the files are punched according
to the data mode specified in the file.

File Control

Remove the file from the queve.

File Control

/REMOVE

This switch is valid

only with the /MODIFY and can be used to remove a
previously submitted file as long as CDPSPL has not
started processing the request.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-34

- 497 -

COMMANDS

{CPUNCH command (Cont)|
\

Command Format (cont)
Switch 4

/SEQ:n

Explanation

Specify a sequence number to help in identifying a re-

Generadl

Queve only the files with.creation dates after the speci-

General

quest to be modified or deleted.

/SINCE:t

fied time,

/START:n

Category

tis in the form dd=mmm-yy hhmm,

Begin on the nth line of the file. If the switch, or the
value of the switch, is omitted, the spooler starts with

File Control

the first line.

/STRS

Search for the file on all file structures in the search
list and take each occurrence.
just the first occurrence.

/UNPRESE—RVED

Output the files only if they are not preserved (i.e.,

the first digit is 0).
punching.

File Control

The default is to take

This switch avoids redundant

General

Characteristics
The CPUNCH command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040,

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
«CPUNCH

SYSTAT.MAC/PUNCH:ASCIL)

Punch the file SYSTAT.MAC in ASCII format.

«CPUNCH

SYSTAT.REL/PUNCH:BINARY/AFTER:1 7?)7))

Punch the file SYSTAT.REL in binary format,
but do not begin punching it until after 5:00 pm.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-35

COMMANDS

- 498 -

CREATE command 1

Function
The CREATE command runs LINED (Line Editor for disk) and opens a new file on disk for
Refer to the LINED writeup in the DECsystem~10 Software Notebooks.

creation.,

Command Format

CREATE file.ext
file.ext = any legal filename and filename extension.

The filename is required;

the filename extension is optional .

Characteristics
The CREATE command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the LINED program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040,

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

CREATE TEST1.F4J)
*-

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which fnferprel's the commands before running LINED.
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 13 LINED

2-36

COMMANDS

- 499 -

CREF command J
Functien

The CREF command runs CREF and lists on the line printer (LPT) any cross-reference listing
files generated by previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands, using the
/CREF switch, since the job was initiated. The file containing the names of these CREFlisting files is then deleted.so that subsequent CREF- commands will not list them again. The
output goes either to LPT immediately or to the disk to be spooled later to LPT. When the
logical device nams LPT is assigned to a device other than the line printer, the CREF files
are stored on tha* device with the same filename and the extension .LST.

Command Format |
CREF

Characteristics

The CREF command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode..

Runs the CREF program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally-absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

Compile the files contained in the command file
PROMAC and produce CREF input compatible

.COMPILE/CREF@PROMAC)
-

cross-reference listing files on the disk.

‘

.CREF)

« LOAD/C/MAP :NANE@CUNALL

ASSIGN MIAL LPT))
«CiEF)

Version 46 CREF

Process and list the cross-reference listing files

prtoduced by the COMPILE command.

)

Compile and load the files contained in the

command file CONALL. Produce a loader map

with the filename NAME and CREF input
compatible cross~reference listing files on the

Assign the logical name LPT to MTAL.
Store the CREF files on MTAL to be listed at a
later time.

2-37

COMMANDS

- 500 -

CSTART command
CCONTINUE command

Function

The CSTART and CCONTINUE commands are identical to the START and CONTINUE com~

mands, respectively, except that the terminalis leftin fhe monitor mode.

Command Format

CSTART adr
CCONTINUE
adr
= the address at which execution is to begin if other than the location specified
within the file (. JBSA). If adris not specified, the starting address comes from . JBSA.

An explicit starting address of 0 may be specified for adr.
To use:

1.
2.

Begin the programwith the terminal in user mode.
Type control information to the program, then type 1C to halt the job

with the terminalin monitor mode.
3.

Type CCONTINUE to allow job to continue runnlng and leave the terminal
in monitor mode.

Additional monitor commands can now be entered from the terminal .

Characteristics
The CSTART and CCONTINUE commands:
Leave the terminal in monitor mode.
Require core.

Depend on FTATTACH which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Restrictions

These commands should not be used when the user program (which is continuing to run) is also
requesting input from the terminal. These commands are not available to Batch users.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-38

COMMANDS

- 501 -

CSTART command
CCONTINUE command

{Cont)

Excmple
2TYPE

18
20

FORMAT

The user types his source program.

LOOP.F4)

17,1

(1)
J=1,1

CONTINUE

END

-EXECUTE

The user compiles, loads, and executes the program.

LOOP)

FORTRAN:LOOP,F4

LO0P
2K CORE
EXECUTION
1000000

The user indicates that the program should loop

The user stops the program.

1000000 times.

The user continues the program but keeps the term-

.CCONT)

inal in monitor mode.

The user times the program.

LTIME)
2.95

KILO=CORE=SEC®133

The program is still running.

JTIME)
1,45

%L
07

KILO=CORE=SEC®157

3 SYSTAT
PLEASE

YYPE

SYSTAT would cause the program to terminate.

‘
FIRST

« TIME)
7,00

The program appears to have finished because the
runtime has stopped incrementing. The program will

KYILO=CORE=SFC=157
=tC

not output until the CONT command is given.

LCONT)

Continue the program so it can complete its typing.

E%TU7

CPU
NO

EXIT

TIME:5,55
EXECUTION

Return to the monitor.

ELAPSED
ERRORS

TIME:3135.73

DETECTED

‘

2-39

COMMANDS

- 502 -

D (deposit) command

Function

The D command deposits information in the user's core area (high or low segment). When debugging a sharable program with the D command, the SAVE command should be used rather than
the SSAVE command (refer fo Appendix D).
:
Command Format

D Ih rh adr

Ih = the octal value to be deposited in the left half of the location.

This argument is

required.

rh = the octal value to be deposited in the right half of the location.

This argument

is required.

adr = the address of the location into which the information is to be deposited.

This

argument is optional .

If adr is omitted, the data is deposited in the location following the last D adr or in
the location of the last E adr (whichever was last).

Characteristics
The D command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-40

- 503 -

COMMANDS
[Qi:ommand (Cont)]

Example

Deposit in location 141,

D 266000 2616 141

Examine location 140.

140

GOB140/

Q47000

BOAROB

47000

of the last E command.

000140/ 047009 009001

Since adr is omitted, the deposit is in the location

‘

The examine is of the location of
the previous D command.

2-41

- 504 -

COMMANDS

DAYTIME command

Function

The DAY TIME command types the date followed by the time of day.
typed in the following format:

dd=mmm=-yy

hh:mm:ss

where
-

dd = day

mmm = month
Yy Tyear
hh = hours
mm = minutes

ss = seconds fo nearest hundredth.
Command Format

DAY TIME,

Characteristics
The DAY TIME command

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.,

Does not destroy the user's core area.

Example

sDAY)
11-SEP-70

.DA)

{5-DEC-71

22:36:34

:47:02

2-42

The date and time are

- 505 -

COMMANDS

DCORE command

Function

The DCORE command causes the DAEMON program fo write a core=image file of the user's
core area that includes all accumulators and all relevant job tables. The jog can continue to
run; i.e., the DCORE command does not destroy the user's core area. The file produced may
be later processed by the DUMP program, if the user so desires.

The DAEMON-written file consists of four categories: JOB, CONFIGURATION, DDB, and

CORE. Each category has a two=word header, the first word contains the category number and

the second word contains the number of data words in the category. The categories are as
follows:

CONFIGURATION
'

CORE

Job related information.

JOB

DDB

Description,

Category Number

Mnemonic

‘

The Configuration Table (.GTCNF) from

the GETTAB UUO.

The device data blocks (DDB) assigned to

this job.

The user's core area, both low and high

segments, in zero-compressed format
to Appendix D).
(refer

The third word of each category begins the data for that category. DAEMON treats each
category as a file and the addresses within the category start at zero. The user cannot examine
the category header nor can he read past the end of one category into the next category .

Version 6 DAEMON

2-43

COMMANDS

- 506 -

DCORE command (Cont)|

Function (cont)

34 words

-—ey

The DAEMON-=-written file appears as follows:
category number 1

}

25 words

}

3
N
b

.o, words of DDB2

category humber 2

number of octal words that follow

.GTCNF table
category number 3

N=n]+n2+. . .+nm

n, words of DDB]

N werds

job related information

number of octal words that follow

words of DDB

number of octal words that follow

Device Data Blocks

category number 4

number of octal words that follow

N words

user's core in zero-compressed format

Category 1 presently contains the following information, but may expand as more GETTAB
enfries appear.

Word 1

Version of DAEMON that wrote the file.

DATE the file was written in standard system format.
TIME in milliseconds that the file was written.

JOB NUMBER in left half, HIGH SEG number (or 0) in right half.

(continued on next page)

Version 6 DAEMON

2-44

COMMANDS

- 507 -

[DCORE command (Cont]

Function (cont)

Word 5

LH is reserved, TTY LINE NUMBER in right half.
.GTSTS (job status word) for job.

GTSTS for high segment,

.GTPPN (project=programmer number) for job.
.GTPPN for high segment.

.GTPRG (user program name) for job.
_
.GTPRG for high segment.
.GTTIM (total time used) for job.
+GTKCT (kilo-core-ticks) for job.
.GTPRV (privilege bits) for job.
.GTSWP (swapping parameters) for job.
.GTSWP for high segment.

Word 20
'

.GTRCT (disk blocks read) for job.
.GTWCT (disk blocks written) for job.
.GTTDB (time of day of last disk allocation, number of disk blocks
allocated) for job.

.GTDEV (device or file structure name) for high segment.
.GTNMT (first half of user's name) for job.
.GTNM2 (last half of user's name) for job.
.GTCNO (charge number) for job.
.GTTMP (TMPCOR pointers) for job.
.GTWCH (WATCH bits) for job.
.GTSPL (spooling control bits) for job.
.GTRTD (real-time status word) for job.

.GTLIM (time limit in jiffies) for job.

Word 34

Category 2 presently contains the following information, but may expand if more .GTCNF

entries are added.

’

Name of system in ASCIZ.

%CNFGO
%CNFG4

%CNDTO
%CNDT1

%CNTAP
%CNTIM

%CNDAT

%CNSIZ
% CNOPR

Date of system in ASCIZ.
Name of system device in SIXBIT.
Time of day in jiffies.

- Today's date.

Highest location in monitor +1.
Name of OPR TTY console.
(continued on next page)

Version 6 DAEMON

2-45

COMMANDS

- 508 -

| DCORE command (Cont)|

Function (cont)
%CNDEV

LH = beginning of DDB chain.

%CNSGT

LH = -# of high segments, RH = +¥ of jobs.

%CNTWR

Non zero if system has two register hardware and software.
LH = feature switches, RH = current state of switches.

%CNSTS
%CNSER

%CNNSM

%CNPTY
%CNFRE
%CNLOC

%CNSTB

Serial number of processor.

# of nanoseconds per memory cycle.
PTY parameters for Batch.

AOBJN word to use bit map in monitor.
LH = 0, RH = address of free 4-word core block area.

Link to STB chain for remote Batch.

Category 3 contains the device data blocks currently in use for this job.
preceded by a word containing the length of the DDB,

Each DDB is

Category 4 is a compressed core image of both the high and low segments, i.e., it contains

only nonzero words.

Command Format

DCORE dev:name.ext [proj,prog]

dev: = a disk~like device on which the core~image file is to be written. If omitted,
DSK s assumed.

name.ext = the name of the file to be written. The default filename is nnnDAE,

where nnn is the job number in decimal, and the default extension is .TMP.
filename is specified, the default extension is .DAE.
[proj,prog] = the disk area other than that of the user.

(the number under which he is logged in) is assumed.

If omitted, the user's disk area

Characteristics
The DCORE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the DAEMON program.

Can continue after command .
Depends on FTDAEM which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040.

Version 6 DAEMON

2-46

If q

- 509 -

COMMANDS

UDCOR E command (Cont)l

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,

Exafnples
.DCORE,)

The core image file is written on the user's area of

the disk with the name nnnDAE.TMP where nnn is

the user's job number,
«DCORE

DSKB:FILEC)

The core image file is written in the user's area on

DSKB with name FILEC.DAE.

Version 6 DAEMON

2-47

COMMANDS

- 510 -

DDT command

Function

The DDT command copies the saved program counter value from .JBPC into .JBOPC and starts
the program at an alternate entry point specified in .JBDDT (beginning address of DDT as set
by Linking Loader). DDT contains commands to allow the user to start or resume at any desired
address. Refer to DECsystem=10 Mcnitor Calls for a description of the job data area locations.

If the job was executing a UUO when interrupted (i.e., it was in exec mode and not in TTY
input wait or SLEEP mode), the monitor sets a status bit (UTRP) and continues the job at the
location at which it was interrupted. When the UUO processing is completed, the monitor
clears the status bit, sets .JBOPC to the address following the UUO, and then traps fo the
DDT address found in .JBDDT. If the job is in exec mode and in TTY input wait or SLEEP

mode, the trap to the DDT address occurs immediafely and .JBOPC contains the address of the
UUO. If the job is in user mode, the trap also occurs immediately . Therefore, it is always
possible fo continue the interrupted program after trapping to DDT by executing a JRSTF @
.JBOPC.

For additional information on the DDT program, refer to the DDT Programmer's Reference Man-

val in the DECsystem-10 Software Notebooks.
Command Format
DDT

Characteristics

The DDT command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Requires core,

Requires the user to have a job number.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

2-48

- 511 -

COMMANDS
fi)DT command (Cont)l

Examples

«TYPE LOOP_MAC)

Type an undebugged program.
'

JRST LOOP
END LOOP

LOOP:

.DERUG ‘LOOP

Assemble and load the program with DDT.

MACRO:,MAIN

LOOP 3K .CORE
DOT _EXECUTION
LA

LSAVE)

Save the program.

Jog sivep
_START

Start the program.

W.0DT)

LOOP/JRST LOOP CALLI12
JRSTEF

@+ JBOPCEX

Enter DDT,

Fix the program.

EXIT

2-49

COMMANDS

-512 -

I DEASSIGN command
Function

The DEASSIGN command returns one or more devices currently ASSIGNed to the user's job
back to the monitor pool of available devices and clears any logical names. Restricted devices
are returned to the restricted pool, and unrestricted devices to the unrestricted pool. Note

that an INITed device is not retumed to the monitor pool unless a RELEASE UUO is done,
only the logical name is cleared. Therefore, this command is provided for programs that are
not termimating or programs that are being debugged. The command, applied to DECtapes,
clears the copy of the directly currently in core, forcing the next directory reference to
read a new copy from the tape. (Refer to DECsystem~10 Monitor Colls for further details.)

Command Format
DEASSIGN dev

dey = either the logical or physical device name. This argument is optional . If it is
not specified, all devices assigned fo the user's job, except the job's controlling terminal, are deassigned, and the logical name of the controlling terminal is cleared.

Characteristics
The DEASSIGN command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
_DEASSIGN LPT:)

The line printer is returned to themonitor's pool

of available resources.

_.DEASSIGN )

All devices assigned to the job are returned.

2-50

- 513 -

COMMANDS -

DEBUG command 1

Function

The DEBUG command translates the specified source files if necessary (function of the COMPILE
command), loads the REL files generated (function of the LOAD command), and prepares for debugging.

DDT (the Dynamic Debugging Technique program) is loaded first, followed by the
user's program with local symbols. Upon completion of loading, control is transferred to the
DDT program. This program is used to check programs section by section by allowing the user to
examine and. modify the contents of any location either before execution or during breakpoints.
Refer to the DDT documentatioh for a description of the DDT commands.

Each time a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command is executed, the command with
its arguments is remembered in a temporary file on disk, or in core if the monitor has the
TMPCOR feature. Therefore, the last filename used can be recalled for the next command
without specifying the arguments again (refer to Paragraph 1.5).
The DEBUG command accepts several command constructions: the @ construction (indirect
commands), the + construction, the = construction, and the <> construction. Refer to
Paragraph 1.5 for a complete description of each of these constructions.

Command Format
DEBUG list

list = a single file specification, or a string of file specifications separated by commas.
A file specification consists of a device name, a filename with or without an extension, and a directory name.

The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These switches can
be temporary or permanent (refer to Paragraph 1.5.5).

/ALGOL

~Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the extension of JALG.

/BLISS2

Compile the file with BLISS. Assumed for files with the exten-

sion of ,BLI.

/COBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the extension of .CBL,

(continued on next page)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the appropriate processor, the LOADER, and DDT.

2B'LISS will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However,
this assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-51.

- 514

COMMANDS

DEBUG command (Cont)J

Command Format (cont)

/COMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even though a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file. This switch is
used fo obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to obtain a

listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not performed if the binary file is newer than the source file.

/CREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the disk for each file
compiled for later processing by the CREF program. These files
have the filename of the source file and the extension of .CRF.
The file can then be listed with the CREF command.

However,

with COBOL files, the cross-reference listing is always appended
to the listing file. No additional command need be given to
obtain the listing.

/FORTRAN

Compile the file with FORTRAN. Assumed for files with the
extension of .F4 and all files with non-=recognizable processor
extensions (if FORTRAN is the standard processor).

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL files produced by the command string. When the FUDGE command is
given, PIP reads this file in order to generate a library REL file.
Arguments fo this switch are:

/FUDGE:dev:file.ext [proj ,prog]
dev: = the device on which to write the file.

DSK: is assumed.

file.ext = the name of the library file. The filename is re~
quired. If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be .REL.

[proj ,prog] = the directory in which to place the file. The

user's directory is assumed if none is given.

This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all REL
files generated by the command string.

/LIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode. This mode causes a pro-

gram file in a special library file to be loaded only if one or

more of its declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined global
request in the source file. The system libraries are always
searched. Refer to the LOADER documentation.

{continued on next page)

Version 20 COMPIL

2-52

- 515 -

COMMANDS

[DEBUG command (Cont)|

Command Format (cont)

/LIST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled, with the
filename of the source file and the extension.LST. These files
can be listed later with the LIST command. Unless this switch is
specified, listing files are not generated except in COBOL;
COBOL listings are always generated.

/LMAP

/MACRO
/MAP

Produce o loader map during the loading process (same action

as /MAP) containing the local symbols.

Assemble the file with MACRO. Assumed for files with exten=
sions of .MAC.

‘

Produce a loader map during the loading process. When this
switch is encountered, a loader map is requested from the
loader. After the library search of the system libraries, the
map is written in the user's disk area with either the filename
) the default filename
specified by the user (e.g., /MAP:fileor
MAP.MAP, This switch is an exception to the permanent
switch rule in that it causes only one map to be produced
even though it may appear as a permanent switch.

/MACX11"

Assemble the file with MACX11. Assumed for files with the

/NOCOMPILE

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing a compilation
on a source file whose date is not as recent as the date on the
binary file. Note that this switch is not the same as the-/REL
switch, which turns off all compilation, even if the source file
is newer than the REL file, /NOCOMPILE is the default

extension .P11.

action.

- /NOLIST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default action except
for COBOL files; COBOL listings are always generated.

/NOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the routines are referenced
or not. Since this is the default action, this switch is used
only to turn off library search mode (/LIBRARY). This switch is
not equivalent to the /P switch of the LOADER, which does not
search any libraries. The /NOSEARCH default is fo search the
system libraries.

(continued on next page)

MACX11 (the PDP-11 assembler for the PDP-10) will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-53

COMMANDS

- 516 -

[DEBUG command (ContTl

Command Format (cont)

/REL

Use the existing REL files although newer source files may be
present.

/SNOBOL]

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files with exten=~

sions of .SNO,

Characteristics
The DEBUG command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the appropriate processor, the LOADER, and DDT.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
¥

Examples
2DEBUG/L FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/N,FILED
)

Generate listings for FILEA, FILEB, and

FILED

=DEBUG

TEST )

MACRO:

TEST

LOADER

TOADING

“

DDT
o/

CORE

EXECUJTION
BLT

15,8C16)

]SNOBC)L will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However,
this assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-54

COMMANDS

- 517

DELETE command 1

Function
The DELETE command deletes one or more files from disk or DECtape.
Command Format =
DELETE list

list = a single file specification or a string of file specifications separated by commas.
The full wildcard construction (* and ?) can be used.

If a device or file structure name is specified, it remains in effect until changed or

until the end of command string is reached.
Characteristics
The DELETE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,
Examples

sDEL *.MAC
)
FILES

DELETED:

T1.MAC
T2
« MAC

T3 «MAC
14 BLOCKS

FREED

SDEL TEST!.MAC
FILES

DELETED:

TEST1 «MAC

3 BLOCKS

FREED

.
—

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-55

COMMANDS

- 518 -

|DELETE command (Cont)|

Examples {cont)
.DEL

TEST?%,F4)

FILES DELETED;
[EST,Fd

TESTS,Fd4

. F4
TESTOI
TESTZ,F4
¥ BLOCKS

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

FREED

2-56

-519 -

COMMANDS

DETACH command

Function

The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from the user's job without affecting the status
The user terminal is now free to control another job, either by initiating a new

of the job.

job or attaching fo a currefitly running detached job.

Command Format
DETACH

Characteristics
The DETACH command:

Detaches the terminal.

Depends on FTATTACH which is normally absent in the DECsystem~1040.
Restrictions

This command is not available to Batch users.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Example

<DETACH

FROM JOB

2-57

COMMANDS

- 520 -

| DIRECT command
Function

The DIRECT command lists the directory entries specified by the argument list.
output consists of the following columns:

The standard

filename, filename extension, length in blocks

written, protection, creation date, version number, structure name, and directory name.

Command Format
DIRECT output specification = list of input specifications

list = A single file specification, or a string of files specifications separated by commas or
plus signs.

The devices used on irput can be DSK:, DTA:, MTA:, and TMP: (TMPCOR).
the device is o magnetic tape, the tape is rewound before and after the listing operation and

analyzed to determine if it is a FAILSAFE or BACKUP tape.

The default input specification

is DSK:*.*, and the user's directories in all file structures defined by the job's search list are
listed.

Generally, a device name:;, an extension, or a directory name that precedes the file~

name becomes the default for all succeeding fules in the list.

The full wildcard construction

can be used.
output specification = This argument (and the equal sign) is optional.

specification is omitted, the default is TTY:.
vice is DSK:.

If the entire output

If an output filename is given, the default de-

If an output filename is not given, and one is needed, the filename is generated

from the time of day as hhmmss.

The default output extension is .DIR.

The wildecard con-

struction cannot be used in the output specification.
The following switches may be used in the command string.
name become the default for all succeeding files.

Switches that precede the file=

Switches can be abbreviated as long as the

abbreviation is unique.

/ACCESS:n

Update the access date to the current date for any file of n blocks

or less accessed by the DIRECT program. n is the written length
unless the ALLOC switch is used and is a decimal number. If

/ACCESS is omitted, the date is not changed. If /ACCESS is
specified but :n is omitted, n=5 is assumed.

/ALLOC

List the allocated length of the file instead of the written length.
The allocated lengthis used by LOGOUTin checklng quotas.
(Disk and magnetic tape only.)

(continued on next page)

Version 2 DIRECT

2-58

COMMANDS

- 521 -

IDIRECT command (Contll

Command Format (cont)
/CHECKSUM

:n
/DENSITY

Compute and print an 18=bit checksum for each file. This checksum is computed by rotating the result leff one bit before adding
each word. (Disk and magnetic tape only.)
Use the specified density when reading a magnetic tape. N is
200, 556, or 800 bpi. The default is installation dependent

and is modified by the SET DENSITY command.

/DETAIL

Print all nonzero words in the LOOKUP block. The protection and
data mode are also listed, even if they are zero. The author is not
listed if it is the same as the owner of the directory. (Disk and
magnetic tape only.)

/FAST

List short form of directory (i.e., filename, extension, structure

to /F.
name, and directory name). Equivalent

/HELP

Help text which indicates some of the switches available and how
to use them. Equivalent to /H.

/HELP:S

List all switches (S) without their explanations. An asterisk pre=

/LIST

List the output on device LPT:. Equivalent to /L.

/MARKS

Indicate each tape mark and UFD when reading a magnetic tape.

/OKNONE

Suppress the error message if no files match the wildcard construc=

/PARITY :ODD
/PARITY :EVEN

default is ODD.

/PHY SICAL

Ignore logical names used for device names.

/PROTECTION:nnn

Give the output file the protection nnn (octal).

/RUN:file spec

‘Run the specified program when this command is finished.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Run the program specified with /RUN with an offset of n. If the
switch is omitted, the default is O; if the switch is given without a

fixes those switches which have a single=letter abbreviation.
#

tion,

Specify the parity to be used when reading a magnetic tape. The
'

value, the default is 1.

/SLOW

Output a full listing that includes the filename, extension, length

in blocks written, protection, creation time, access date, structure

name, and directory name. Equivalent to /S. (Disk and magnetic
tape only.)

(continued on next page)

Version 2 DIRECT

2-59

COMMANDS

- 522
-

DIRECT command (Ccmt)]

Command Format (cont)

/SORT

List the file structure name and directory name on each line instead
of only on the first line in which they change. Multiple spaces
are oufput instead of TABs.

This switch is used to prepare a file to

be sorted by the SORT program.

/SUMMARY

Output only the summary line which indicates the total number of
blocks and files. Note a /F /SUMMARY lists a /F listing followed
by the summary.

/'TITLES

Cause a heading to be output on each page consisting of a label
for each column, date, time, and page number. Standard output
to the line printer has this heading.

/UNITS

List the name of the actual disk unit instead of the file structure
name.

/WIDTH:n

Output several entries on a single line to make the output n col-

umns wide.

For example, if /F is specified for output to the scope,

four filenames appear per line.

/WORDS

The default for n is 64 columns.

Output the length of the file in words instead of blocks.

Characteristics
The DIRECT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the DIRECT program , thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.

Examples

DIK DTA3:)
_-._D IK

¥ MA(:)

Lists all files on DTA3.
Lists all files with MAC filename extension in all
file structures in the job search list.

DIk

TFST.F4(27,601)

Lists the directory entry for file TEST.F4 in user
area 27, 60.

(continued on next page)

Version 2 DIRECT

2-60

COMMANDS

- 523
-

DIRECT command (Cont)]

Examples (cont)

.DIRECT)

4mMAYeT71

DSKC3

<A55>

05«FEB=72

34(70)

3 FILES

<{155>»
<p53>
<A5%5>»
<p55>

28a«FEBe72
28=FEB=7?2
25«FEBa72

SAMPL
PIP
G16DAE
WEIRD

CTL
DAE
TMP

1
2
22
4

<155>»
<p55»
<A55>
<P55»

WEIRD

SAV

TOTAL

BLOCKS

25«FERw7?
25=FEB=72
25«FEB=72

DSKCP

t27,235)

[27,235)

szRECT/ALLOC
3
2
24
6
23

cTL
DAE
TMP

SAMPL
PIP
G16DAE
WEIRD
WEIRD

SAV

TOTAL

BLOCKS

4eMAYe71

DSKCs

<N55>

25«FEB=7??2

34(72)

FILES

DSKC:

t27,235)

[27,235)

<DIRECT/DETAIL)

DSKC@ISAMPL,CTL[27,235]
S=JANe?72
ACCESS DATE:
CREATION

TIME,

DATE:

MODE:
WORDS

14
WRITTENS

16:54

4wMAY=T7{

155

ACCESS PROTECTION?:
54,

ESTIMATED LENGTH: 5,
BLOCKS ALLOCATED: 3,
DATA BLOCK IN DIRECTORY:

303.

DSKCosPIP,DAE(27,235)
ACCESS DATE: 25«FEB=72

CREATION TIME, DATEs
MODEs

" BLOCKS ALLOCATED:
AUTHOR: 1,2

DATA BLOCK

13847 25-FEB=72

@55

ACCESS PROTECTION:

IN DIRECTORY:

303.

(continued on next page)

Version 2- DIRECT

2-61

- 524

COMMANDS

fi)IRECT command (Comt)]

Examples (cont)
DSKCO:G16PAE,.TMP [27,2385]
ACCESS DATE! 235«FEB=72

CREATION TIME, DATE: 14:10
ACCESS PROTECTION: @55

25«FEB=72

MODE: 17
WORDS WRITTENS 2816,
BLOCKS ALLOCATED: 24.
AUTHOR:1,2

DATA

BLOCK

DIRECTORY:

323,

DSKC@tWEIRD, [27,235)
ACCESS DATE: 25«FEB=72

CREATION TIME, DATE: 14:38
ACCESS PROTECTION: @55
MODE:

WORDS

WRITTEN:

BLOCKS

DATA

471.

ALLOCATED:
6,

BLOCK
IN DIRECTORY:

303.

DSKC@sWEIRD,SAV[27,235)
ACCESS DATE: 25=FEB=72
CREATION TIME, DATE: 14209
ACCESS PROTECTION: @55
MODE:
WORDS

25=FEB=7?

25«FEB=72

WRITTEN:

2566,

VERSION:34(702)
BI.OCKS ALLOCATED: 23.
DATA BLOCK IN DIRECTORY:

TOTAL

DIRECT [47, ] )
=

Version 2 DIRECT

BLOCKS

3P3.

FILES

DSKC:

[27,23%)

Lists the directory entries for user with project
number 40 and the user's programmer number.

2-62

COMMANDS

- 525 -

DISMOUN_T command

Function

The DISMOUNT command allows a user to return devices to the monitor pool of available resources and fo remove a file structure from his search list. Restricted devices are returned to
the restricted poot and unrestricted devices to the unrestricted pool. The command applied to
non-file structures 1s identical to the DEASSIGN command if the user waits for completion of
the operator action.

If the user does not wait for completion (e.g., he types a control-C

after the message OPERATOR NOTIFIED), the device is not deassigned, but the request to the

operator is still queued for the purpose of removing the media. The user must then issue the
DEASSIGN command to release the device. This command applied to file structures enforces

logged=out quotas (if necessary), allows physical removal of disk packs (if there are no other
users of the pack), and removes the file structure name from the job's search list.

The UMOUNT program runs privileged in the user's core area when the DISMOUNT command
is typed. This program scans the user's command string, checks its validity, and performs as
much of the requested action as possible. The UMOUNT program can complete all actions

requested by the DISMOUNT command except for the action of physically removing packs,

tapes, or cards. When operator action is required, the UMOUNT program writes a command

file on 3,3 disk area and notifies the OMOUNT program (running on the operator's terminal)
to perform the action. When the operator action has been completed, OMOUNT deletes the
command file and notifies UMOUNT (if UMOUNT is waiting) to inform the user of completion.

Command Format

DISMOUNT dev: switches

dev: = any previously ASSIGNed or MOUNTed device or file structure name. This
argument is required.

switches = the following switches are optional and only enough characters to make the
switch unique are required.

/CHECK

~ /HELP
/PAUSE

Check and list pending requests.

Type this list.

~ Notify the user before requesting operator action. The user can
" then abort the command if desired.

(continued on next page)

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-63

COMMANDS

- 526

| DISMOUNT command (Cont)|

Command Format (cont)

/REMOVE

Notify operator to physically remove disk packs, tape, or cards.
A file structure is removed from the system only if no other users
are using it. A request to remove the pack is queued to the operator and the message WAITING . . . is typed to the user. If the
user does not want to wait for confirmation of the operator action,

he may type control-C, This switch must be specified to notify the
operator to remove the pack, even if no other jobs are using it.

Characteristics
The DISMOUNT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the UMOUNT program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCALX and FTMOUN which are normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
DSKA:).

.DISMOUNT

The user dismounts the file structure DSKA.

This

DSKA DISMOUMTED

does not require an operator action.

«DISMOUNT DTA4:/R)

The user asks the operator to deassign DTA4 and
remove the tape.

OPERATOR

NOTIFIED

The command is waiting for completion of the
operator action.

The user does not wish to wait for confirmation of

removal.

+DISMOUNT/CHECK
)

NONE

_PENDING

@,COMMANDS

Version 20 UMOUNT

The user checks for completion and determines that
his request is finished.

QUEUE

2-64

COMMANDS

- 527 -

DSK command

Function

job, since the last DSK
for the combined structures of the
The DSK command types disk usage
(logged in). Disk
lized
initia
was
job
the
since
disk usage
command, followed by the totalforma
:
t:
usage is typed in the following
RD, WT=1,J
RD,WT=M,N

and written since the last
l number of 128-word blocks read
where I and J are the incrementa
written since
block
DSK command, and M and N are the total number of 128=word : s read and
the job was initialized.

NOTE

I and J are kept modulo 4096. If automatic READ or
WRITE print outs have been enabled using the SET

WATCH command, I and J are usually zero, since the
SET WATCH output also resets these values. -

Command Format

DSK job

ent is

job = the job number of the job for which the disk usage is desired. This argum

optional.

If job is omitted, the job to which theterminal is attached is assumed.

l quantities

If job is supplied (whether the job of this user or another user) the incrementa

are nof reset to zero.

Characteristics

The DSK command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

265

COMMANDS

_528_

| LDSK command (Cont)]

Example

DSKJ
RD,WT=12,0

RD,WT=475,243

2-66

COMMANDS

- 529 -

DUMPcomnmndl
Function

The DUMP command calls the DAEMON program to write a core image file (function of the

DCORE command) and then invokes the DUMP program to analyze the file written and to pro=vide printable output. The core image file is named nnnDAE.TMP where nnn is the user's job
number.

This file is described in detail in the DCORE command description.

Command Formafs

1.
2.
3.

DUMP /command /command /command ...
DUMP @ dev:file.ext [proj,prog]
DUMP

The commands that appear in the DUMP command string are passed to the DUMP program and
therefore are described in the DUMP program description. A DUMP command using a command

file can also specify these commands. A DUMP command without any arguments prints a short

dump of the user's core area via the command file QUIKDM.
CCL which resides on device SYS:.
Characteristics
The DUMP command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the DAEMON program.

Depends on FTDAEM which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

LDUMP/OUT:TTY?:/MODE:ASCII,SIXBIT/WIDTH7,10/JUST:L,R=)

7RIGHTMA:26/D(3000 & 3004

This command string writes a core image file named nnnDAE.TMP and invokes the
DUMP program to perform the output. The output goes to the terminal and the modes
used on output are ASCII and SIXBIT. The ASCII field is 7 characters long, left justified and the SIXBIT field is 10 characters long, right justified. The right margin of the
output in 26 characters. The dump consists of the contents of word 3000 fo word 3004.
The hyphen is used to .continue the command string onto the next line.

‘Version 6 DAEMON
Version 4 DUMP

2-67

COMMANDS

- 530 -

DUMP program

Function

The DUMP program provides printcble dumps of arbitrary data files in modes and forms specified
by the user. The DUMP program accepts any data file as input and produces an ASCII file

suitable for listing by PIP, the output spoolers, or other listing programs.

For example, the

DUMP program takes core image files prepared by the DAEMON program or SAVEd files pro-

duced by the monitor.

For a description of the DAEMON-=-written file, refer to the DCORE

command.,

Command Formats

RDUMP)

/command
)
2.

RDUMP,
/@ dev:file.ext [proj,prog]
NOTE

DUMP indicates its readiness by typing a slash (/) instead
of an asterisk.

The commands with their arguments are os follows.
followed by a carriage rerurn,

Commafnfil

Lines can be continued by. typing o hyphen

Argument

ADDRESS

ON or OFF

Meaning
Specifies if the address is to be dumped along with
its contents.

ALL

APPEND

The default is ON,

Dumps the entire file. If the file is a DAEMON
core image file, the entire category is dumped.
'

Appends the output to the output file.

output file is not overwritten.

The existing

This command is the

default; its complement is SUPERSEDE.

AUTOFORMAT

ON or OFF

Attempts to format output with line feeds, form
feeds, and titles, if ON.

If OFF, the user is

responsible for all formatting.
CATEGORY

The default is ON.

mnemonic for name of

Selects the category of the DAEMON dump file to

category.

be used.

Can be JOB,

Addressing begins with 0 at the beginning

CONFIGURATION,

of each category.

DDB, or CORE.

If the input file is not a DAEMON file, this switch

The default category is CORE.

has no effect.:

(continued on next page)

Version 4 DUMP

2-68

- 531 -

COMMANDS

DUMP program (Cont)

Command Formats (cont)
Argument

Command-

Closes the output file. After this command is given,
another OUT command should be given before the
next command which does any output.

DUMP

Meaning

dump descriptor, .

Dumps the specified bytes in the current modes.

dump descriptor, ...

EJECT.

Starts a new page in the output file.

EXIT

Closes all files and returns control to the monitor
(1Z has the same effect).

INPUT

Specifies the input file. The defaults are:
DSK:nnnDAE.TMP where nnn is the job number; the
user's directory. If the filename is specified, it
determines the extension from the set .TMP, .DAE,
.SHR, .SAV, .HGH, .LOW, .XPN, and .DMP in
that order. If an extension is specified with no

filename, the extension determines the filename.

IRADIX

decimal number

Specifies radix for numbers for input. This command uses decimal to compute the argument. The
default is 10 for decimal. The argument must be
numeric. If numeral is O or is missing, the input
radix is set back to its default value.

JUSTIFY

LEFT, CENTER, or

RIGHT

Specifies the justification of the output in the output field. If the output overflows the output field,
the entire output appears; it is not truncated. This

switch is used in a one~to-one relationship with the
MODE and WIDTH commands.

If there are more

MODE commonds, an argument of LEFT is used.

there are more JUSTIFY commands, they are
ignored.
"LEFTMARGIN

expression

- Sets the left margin of the output file.

The default

is 0.

LINEPAGE

expression

Specifies the number of lines per output page.

The

default is 50,

(continued on next page)

Version 4 DUMP

. 2-69

COMMANDS

- 532 -

DUMP program (Cont)l

Command Formats (cont)
Command

Argument

MODES

Meaning

ASCII, DECIMAL, NULL,

Selects the type of output.

NUMERIC, OCTAL,

as a single right justified character if bits 0~28 are

ASCII dumps the word

RADIX50, SIXBIT,

zero or as 5 ASCII characters if bits 0-28 are non-

SOCTAL, or SYMBOLIC.

zero.

Non printing characters print as a space.

DECIMAL dumps as a signed decimal number.

declares that nothing is to be dumped.

NULL

NUMERIC

dumps as a signed number in the current output radix.

OCTAL dumps as half=words separated by a comma
(default) and takes 13 positions. RADIX50 dumps
in RADIX50.

SIXBIT dumps as one SIXBIT character

if bits 0-24 are zero, or 6 SIXBIT characters if
bits 0-24 are nonzero.

SOCTAL dumps as signed

octal and suppresses leading zeroes.

SYMBOLIC

dumps as a symbolic instruction.
Any mode specification can appear more than once

in the command string. The output is in the same
order as the MODE list.
:
NUMPAGE

expression

Specifies that pages are to be numbered.
sion is 0, page numbering is furned off.

If expresIf expres-

sion is not 0, page numbering begins at page =
<expression>.

If command is omitted, numbering -

starfs at the first page.

ORADIX

decimal number

Specifies redix for numbers for output.
is 10 for decimal.

The default

If number is 0, the stanclard is

used. The argument to this command is decimal
and must not be an expression.
OUTPUT

Specifies the output file.

The defaults are:

LPT:,

the filename of the input file; the extension .LSD;
the user's directory.
RIGHTMARGIN

expression

Sets the right margin of the output file.

A field

may overflow the right margin if it will not fit between the left and right margins.

1f ADDRESS is ON,

the new line will have an address typed.

If a page

overflow occurs, a title line may also be printed.
SUPERSEDE

Specifies that the output is to supersede an existing

file of the same name, if there is one.

The comple-

ment of this command is APPEND, which is the

default.

(continued on next page)

Version 4 DUMP

2=-70

COMMANDS

- 533 -

|—D—UMP program (Cont)

Command Formats {coni')

Command

SYFILE

TDUMP
TITLE
TYPE]
TYPE
:
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE

TYPE
TYPE
WIDTH

Argument

<file descriptor>
dump descriptor,
<string of characters>
dump descripfor, ...

DAE
DAT

HGH
LOW
SAV

SHR
XPN
expression

Meaning

if XTRACT
from DSK:
symbols are:
to takeDefau
the file fied.
Specifies
, the
lts
and is speci
comm
filename of the input file; one of the saved file
extensions; the user's directory area.

Dumps specified bytes to both output file and TTY.
nt
the subsequetitli
inc|uded inis speci
a title to nobe argu
Specifies ings
ng
fied,
ment
. If
.

page head

is turned off.

After this command, an EJECT command should be
given to skip fo a new page.

Specifies that the input file is separated by
DAEMON.
, no
file is a data file (i.e.
Specifies that the input
is
ssing
proce
al
speci
special format; therefore, no ‘
done).
Specifies that the input file is in .HGH file format.
- Specifies that the input file is in .LOW file format.
Specifies that the input file is in .SAV file format.

Specifies that the input file is in .SHR file format.at.
Specifies that the input file is in .XPN file form
(see the
Selects the width of each output modea MOD
E comMODE and JUSTIFY commands). If
WIDTH,
mand is specified without a correspondinerg of
posithe byte is dumped in exactly the numb WIDT
H
a
If
s.
blank
3
tions required followed by

t.
command is specified, no free blanks are outpu
TH speci-

WID
If o MODE specification overflowsn its
out justifi=
with
give
is
t
fication, the entire outpu
list will be
null
a
ted,
omit
is
ssion
cation. If expre

- XTRACT

generated &

SY FILE comm. and
fied in the lastsymb
Uses the file speci
ol table
the
e and extracts
as a core imag

fo determine theDAEtypeis ofassufilemed.being
t file is usedcomm
nsion of the inpu
specified, theis exte
11f TYPE is not
TYPE
produced. If the extension not one recognized in the TYPE and,
Version 4 DUMP

2-71

COMMANDS

- 534 -

[BUMP progfam (Cont)]

Command Formats (cont)
An expression is an octa

l or decimal number, a

(+t,=,*,/,and 1 grouped
with parentheses)

is a string of SIXBIT char

acters, or program symb

taining symbol.,

A text string is a string of

indicates that the next

ns using expressions

ol, where program defi

sented by-paiterns of grap
special pattern.

symbol, arithmetic operatio

, or contents operators ([,

nes the program con=

characters enclosed in sing

hic characters.

le quotes.

Special characters are repr
e-

To override these special

character is to be acce

The following patterns

\, and @). A symbol

patterns, a double quot

pted as is, without incl

represent non-grap

uding it as part of a

hic characters and are
output strings by the
replaced in
characters represen
ted unless g double
quote appears.

<EL>

- end line, <CR-LF>

<VT>

= vertical tak

<FF>

~ form feed
- altmode

t<letter>

\ <letter>

- horizontal tab
= control character

= lower case character

A byte descriptor is the desc

ription of the Eyfe in the

input file to be dumped.

The format is:

WORDS <POS, SIZE>

where
WORDS = the address of

the word desired .

POS = the position of the
byte within the word,
most bit in the byte,

SIZE = the number of bits

boundaries,

A dump descriptor has the
<FROM

It may be any size and can

form

byte-descriptor> & <TO

signifying everything from

Version 4 DUMP

in the byte.

It specifies the bit numb

byte descriptor>

the first byte descriptor

2-72

to the second.

er of the left-

cross word or block

- 535 -

COMMANDS

IPUMP program (Cont)l

Characteristics
The R DUMP command:

Places the terminal in user mode.

Is used with disk monitors only.

Runs the DUMP program.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 4 DUMP

2-73

COMMANDS

- 536 -

I E (examine) command
Function

The E command examines a core location in the user's area (high or low segment).

Command Format
E adr

adr is required the first time the E or D command is used. If adr is specified, the. con~tents of the location are typed out in half-word octal mode.
If adr is not specified, the contents of the location following the previously specified
E adr or the location of the previous D adr (whichever was last) are typed out.

Characteristics
The E command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Example
<E

140)

000140/
00R141/

264000
QVRODD

002616
0ORYOR

PP142/

000R00

C0R000

2-74

- 537 -

COMMANDS

EDIT .command 1! |
Function
The EDIT command runs LINED (Line Editor for disk) and opens an already existing line

sequence-numbered file on disk for editing.

Software Notebooks.,

Refer to the LINED writeup in the DECsystem=10

Command Format
EDIT file.ext

file.ext = a filename and filename extension of an existing file.

This argument is op~

tional if a CREATE or EDIT command has been given since the initialization of the job,
. because the arguments of the EDIT-class commands are remembered in temporary files

on the disk or in core if the monitor has the TMPCOR feature.

Characteristics
The EDIT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
.
Runs the LINED program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040,

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Example
+EDIT TEST.F4,)
*

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running LINED.,
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 13 LINED

.
2-75

COMMANDS

- 538 -

EOF command 1

Function

The EOF command writes an end of file mark on the specified magnetic tape.

This command is

equivalent fo the following PIP command string:

MTAn: (MF) «
Command Format

EOF MTAn:
Characteristics
The EOF command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

<EOF MTA3:)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2-76

- 539 -

COMMANDS

EXECUTE command 1

Function

The EXECUTE command translates the specific source files if necessary (function of COMPILE
command), loads the REL files generated into a core image (function of LOAD command), and
begins execution of the program. The assembler or compiler used is determined from the

source file extensions or from switches in the command string (refer to the COMPILE command).
If a REL file already exists with & newer date than that of the source file, compilation is not
performed (unless requested explicitly via a switch).

This command is équivalénf to a LOAD and START sequence of commands.
Each time a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command is executed, the command with
its arguments is remembered in a temporary file on disk, or in core if the monitor has the
TMPCOR feature.

Therefore,
the last filename used can be recalled for the next command

without specifying the arguments again (refer to Paragraph 1.5).

’

The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions: the @ construction (indirect
commands), the + construction, the = construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Paragraph 1.5 for a complete description of each of these constructions.
Command Format
EXECUTE list

list = a single file specification, or a string of file specifications separated by commas.
A file specification consists of a device name, a filendme with or without an extension,
and a directory name.

‘

The following switches can be used to modify the command string.
be temporary or permanent switches (refer to Paragraph 1.5.5)..

/ALGOL

)

These switches can

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the extension of LALG.

/BLISS2
/COBOL

Compile the file with BLISS. Assumed for files with the extension

of .BLI.

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the extension of .CBL.

(continued on next page)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the appropriate
processor and the LOADER.

2BLISS will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this
assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-77

COMMANDS

- 540
-

[EXECUTE command (Cont) J

Command Format (cont)

/COMPLLE

Force a compilation on this file even though a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file. This switch is
used to obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to obtain a

listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not performed if the binary file is newer than the source file.

/CREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the disk for each file
compiled for later processing by the CREF program. These files

have the filename of the source file and the extension of . CRF.
The files can then be listed with the CREF command. However,

with COBOL files, the cross~referenced listing is appended to
the listing file. No additional command need be given to obtain
the listing.

/FORTRAN

Compile the file with FORTRAN.

Assumed for files with the ex~

tension of .F4 and all files with nonrecognizable processor exten-

sions (if FORTRAN is the standard processor).

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL files produced
by the command string. When the FUDGE command is given, PIP
reads this file in order to generate a library REL file. Arguments to
this switch are:

/FUDGE:devfile.ext[proj, prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the file.

DSK: is assumed.

.file.exf - the name of the library file.

The filename is required.
If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be .REL.

[proj, progl - the directory in which to place the file.

directory is assumed if none is given.

The user's

This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all REL files
generated by the command string.

/LIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode. This mode causes a program
file in a special library file to be loaded only if one or more of its

declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined global request in the

source file.

The system libraries are always searched.
the LOADER documentation.

/LIST

Refer to

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled, with the
filename of the source file and the extension of .LST. These

files can be listed later with the LIST command. Unless this
switch is specified, listing files are not generated except in
COBOL; COBOL listings are always generated.

(continued on next page)

Version 20 COMPIL

2-78

- 541 -

COMMANDS

[ EXECUTE command (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)

/LMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process (same action as
/MAP) containing the local symbols.,

/MACRO .

Assemble the file with MACRO.,
of .MAC.

/MACXTT!

Assumed for files with extensions

Assemble the file with MACX11. Assumed for files with extensions
of .P11.

Produce loader maps during the loading process. When this switch
is encountered, a loader map is requested from the loader. After

/MAP

the library search of the system libraries, the map is written in the
user's disk area with either the filename specified by the user
(e.g., /MAPile) or the default filename MAP.MAP. This switch
is an exception to the permanent switch rule in that it causes only
one map to be produced even though it appears as a permanent
'

switch.

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing a compilation on

/NOCOMPILE

a source file whose date is not as recent as the date on the binary

file.

Note that this switch is not the same as the /REL switch,

which turns off all compilation, even if the source file is newer

thon the REL file. /NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NOLIST

Do not generate listing files.

This is the default action except for

COBOL files; COBOL listings are always generated.

/NOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the routines are referenced or
not. Since this
is the default action, this switch is used only fo

turn off library search mode (/LIBRARY). This is not equivalent to
the /P LOADER switch, which does not search any libraries; the
/NOSEARCH switch scans the system libraries.

Use the existing REL files although newer source files may be

/REL

present.

/SNOBOL2

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files with an extension of .SNO,

1MACX] 1, the PDP-11 assembler
for the PDP=10, will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set.

However, this assembly switch setting is not supported.

2SNOBOL will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However,
this assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-79

- 542 -

COMMANDS
-

EXECUTE command (Cont) I

Characteristics

The EXECUTE command:

Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the appropriate processor and-the LOADER.
Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.

Associated Messoges
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

<EXECUTE TEST)
MACRO:

TEST

LOADER

CORE

EXECUTION

Version 20 COMPIL

2-80

- 543 -

COMMANDS

FILCOM program I

Function

The FILCOM program is used to compare two' versions of a file and to output any differences.
Generally, this comparison is line by line for ASCII files or word by word for binary files.
FILCOM determines the type of comparison to use by examining either the switches specified
in the command string or the extensions of the files. Switches always take precedence over
file extensions.

Command Format

SR FILCOM)
Xoutput dev:file.ext [proj,prog] = input dev] :file.ext [proj,prog],
input devzzfile.exi‘ [proj ,prog]

output dev:

= the device on which the differences are to be output.

input dev:

= the device on which an input file resides.

Defaults
1.

If the entire output specification is omitted (including the equal sign), the output device

is assumed to be TTY,

If an output filename is specified, the default output device is DSK.

If the output filename is omitted, the second input filename is used, unless it is null.
this case, the filename FILCOM is used.

If the output extension is omitted, .SCM is used on a source compare and .BCM is used
on a binary compare.

If the [proj,prog] is omitted (input or output side), the user's default directory is assumed.

If an input device is omitted, it is assumed to be DSK.

If the filename and/or extension of the second input file is omitted, it is taken from the
first input file.

A dot following the filename of the second input is necessary to explicitly indicate a null
extension, if the extension ofthe first input file is not null.

Version 16 FILCOM

2-81

COMMANDS

FILCOM program (Cont) |

Command Format (cont)

The second input file specification cannot be null unless a binary compare is being per~

formed.

In a binary compare, if the first input file is not followed by a comma and a
second input file descriptor, the input file is compared to a zero file and is output in its
entirety.

This gives the user a method of listing a binary file.

Refer to Example 4.

Switches
The following switches con appear in the command string, depending on whether a source com-

pare or a binary source compare is being performed.
Binary Compare

Type list of switches available (help text).

/nL

Specify the lower limit for a partial binary compare (n is an octal number).
This switch, when used with the /nU switch, allows a binary file to be

compared only within the specified limits.

/nU

Specify the upper limit for a partial binary compare (n is an octal number).
This switch, when used with the /nL switch, allows a binary file to be compared only within the specified limits.
:
Compare files in binary mode without expanding the files first (refer to

Appendix D).
extensions.

This switch is used to compare two binary files with ASCII

Expand SAV files before comparing them in binary mode. This action removes differences resulting from zero compression (refer to Appendix D).

Source Compare

Compare files in ASCII mode. This switch is used to force a source compare on two ASCII files with binary extensions.

Compare blank lines.

Ignore comments (all text on a line following a semicolon) and spacing

(spaces and tabs).

Without this switch, blank lines are ignored.

This switch does not cause a line consisting entirely of

~a comment fo become a blank line, which is normally ignored.

(continued on next page)

Version 16 FILCOM

2-82

- 545 -

COMMANDS

|FILCOM program (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)

Source Compare (cqni')
/H

Type list of switches available (help text).

Specify the number of lines that determine a match (n'is an octal number).

/nL

A match means that n successive lines in each input file have been found
identical. When a match is found, all differences occurring before the
match and after the previous match are output. In addition, the first line
of the current match is output after the differences to aid in locating the

place within each file o which the differences occurred. The default
value for n is 3.

Ignore spaces and tabs.

Compare in update mode. This means that the output file consists of the
second input file with vertical bars next to the lines that differ from the
first input file. This feature is useful when updating a document because
the changes made to the latest edition are flagged with change bars in the
left margin. The latest edition of the document is the second input file.

If switches are not specified in the command string, the files are compared in the mode implied
by the extension. The following extensions are recognized as binary and cause a binary compare if one or both of the input files have one of the extensions.
.BAC
.BIN
.BUG

.CAL

.CHN
.DAE
.DCR
.DMP

.HGH
LOW
.MSB

.RMT
<RTB
.SAV

.QUE
.QUF
.REL
.RIM

.SHR
.SVE
.SYS
.UFD

.OVR

.SFD

XPN

Binary files are compared word by word starting of word 0 except for the following two cases:

Files with extensions .SHR and .HGH are assumed to be high segment files. Since
the word count starts at 400000, upper and lower limits, if used, must be greater
than (or equal to in the case of the lower limit) 400000.

Files with extensions .SAV, .LOW, and .SVE are assumed to be compressed core
image files and are expanded before comparing.

Version 16 FILCOM

2-83

COMMANDS

- 546 -

FILCOM program (Con?)]

Command Format (cont)

Conflicts are resolved by switches cr defaults. If a conflict arises in the absence of switches,
the files are assumed to be ordinary binary files.
Output

In most cases, headers consisting of the device, filename, extension, and creation date of
each input file are listed before the differences are output. However, headers do not appear

on output from the /U switch (update mode on source compare).

Source compare output ~ After the headers are listed, the following notation appears in the

left column of the output

n)m
where
n is the number of the input file, and
m is the page number of the input file (see examples).

The right column lists the differences occurring between matches in the input files. Following
the list of differences, a line identical to each file is output for reference purposes.
The output from the /U switch differs from the above-described output in that the output file

created is the second input file with vertical bars in the left column next to the lines that are

different from the first input file.

Binary compare output =~ When a difference is encountered between the two input files, a line

in the following format appears on the output device:

octal loc.

first file=word

second file=word

‘

XOR of both words

If the exclusive OR (XOR) of the two words differs only in the right half, the third word output
is the absolute value of the difference of the two right halves. This usually indicates an ad-

dress that changed .

If one input file is shorter than the other, after the end of file is encountered on the shorter

file, the remainder of the longer file is output.

Version 16 FILCOM

2-84

- 547-

COMMANDS

[FiLcOM program (Cont) |

Characteristics
The R FILCOM command:

Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the FILCOM program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4,

Examples

1. The user has the following two ASCII files on disk:
First File

Second File

FILE A

FILE B

page 1

G
H

1
J

-y

First File

Second File

0
P

page 2

Y
(continued on next page)

Version 16 FILCOM

2-85

COMMANDS

- 548 -

|FILCOM program (Cont)t

Exameles (cont)
To compare the two files and output the differences on the terminal, the following sequence
is used:

FILCOM))

Ruri the FILCOM program.

*F ILEASFILEB))

Compare the two files on disk and output the difBy default, three consecutive identical lines determine a match.
'

ferences on the terminal.

head

eaders

line

.identical
.

FILE

DSK:FILEA

151

FILE

ok o ok

231

FILE B

files

ook o ok ok 3 ok ok ok e ok ok ok %

in both

files

1)1

K
L

231

2 }/

2)2

kb o ok 3

line

132

identical

in both
files

212
0y

Second difference

l::i*

)

1 ok
Aok

identical

17-JAN=-1972

1456 17-JAN-1972

ook ok ok o ok 3k ok ok ok ok oK oK oK

identical
fdentica

line

1456

.
First t difference

in both

ine

CREATED:

files

CREATED:

FILE 2) DSK:FILEKE

N
1

> Third difference

ok ok ok ok oK oK ok

g }‘4
W

Fourth difference

ok ok ko 3 oK ok ok ok ok o ok ok

T_L This column indicates the page number of the file.
——— This column indicates either the first file or the second file.

(continued on next page)

Version 16 FILCOM

2-86

- 549 -

COMMANDS

FI LCOM program‘(Cont)J

ExcmEIes (cont)

To compare the two files and output the differences on the line printer, the following commands
are used. Note that in this example the number of successive lines that determines a match has

been set to 4 with the /4L switch.
«R FILCOM)

*LPT:/4L=FILEA,FILEB)
FILE 1) DSK:FILEA
FILE 2) DSK:FILER
FILE

1)1
| )
1
1)

‘

CREATED:
CREATED:

1456 17-JAN-1972
1456 17-JAN-1972

B
-

C
D

::
1)
ook 5k

i_:
G

FILE B

2)
2)

These lines are listed as being different because
the /AL switch specifies that 4 consecutive lines

must be found identical in the two files before they
’

are considered as a match.

ok ok e o ok ok ok ok ok ok ok K

1)2

sk ok
ok

231

3
N

2)2
ok s o

ook ok ok ok ok ok K

ok
ok ok

232

stk o ok ok s

ok ok ok o K ok

(continued on next page)

Version 16 FILCOM

2-87

COMMANDS

- 550 -

LFILCOM program (Cont)|

Examples (cont)

To compare the two files so that the
second input file is output with vertic
al bars in the left
column next to the lines that differ
from the first input file, use the follo
wing command sequence.
R

FILCOM)

XPT:/U=FILEA,FILER)

N-<><£U1.E<C-I(D7GO"UOZQM"'LHICDOWJ>

FILE

The lines with vertical bars indic
ate the differences
between the two files.

The lines with vertical bars indicate the differe
nces
between the two files.

To compare two binary files on the disk and

the following command sequence.
*R

output the differences on the terminal, use

FILCOM)

*TTY:+DSK:DIAL.REL,DIAL2))

Version 16 FILCOM

FILE

DSK:DIAL.REL

DSK:DIAL2.REL

CREATED:

0000

CREATED:

23-DEC-1971

#0900

12-AUG-1971

2NAAAY

QPRRR4A

BONA2

BOVBRI

NORARB

0O00B4

VOVO6P

PABON3

NS54T16

000311

vARRD6

372712

MREEDI

PVB311

nAvR4

2000080

17573

PPANRD

510354

17573

P17575

513216

510355

17573

513216

2-88

00057
326004

- 55] -

COMMANDS

FlLCOM program (Cont)]

Examples (cont)
3.

To compare two high segment files, the command sequence below is used.
locations begin at 400000.
sR

Note that the

FILCOM)

ATTY:+SYS:TABLE
«SHKk» TABLE .SHRK)

‘

FILE

SYS:TABLE.SHR

CREATED:

2020

24-JAN-1972

FILE

DSK:TABLE.SHR

CREATED:

1829

30-NOV-1971

400000

0O1611

400010

PB1630

4071517

POBV21

420003

0PB6675

P000R0

D15024

407670

P13651

4b7670

MO0
4

005600

G00BTO

PA4700

0BO113

PO110Y

BVOL63

BOT147

400005

545741

444562

554143 625700

N11602

261262

40010

634000

OB0000

260740

403516

454740

403516

400011

474000

000000

200000

414036

674000

414036

4BB12

402000

DOB1S56

202000

VOOT20

600VOY

PBV6TE

400013

200040 406354

201000 000472

VO1640

46726

To list a binary file, use the following command sequence.

sR FILCOM)

ATTY:+SYS:DOT.REL))
PPPR00

V0004

@D000]

PO0OB1

Q0CPE0

V000A0

000002

GNOBR0

054716

POVOG3

BO0R06

NODROI

PORODO

000004

002POO

PB2OOS

©VOBVAT

S17716

PPO006

000001

DOAVE2

000007

008200

POV

Note that the following sequence will not work because of the terminating comma.
ATTY:«SYS:DOT «REL,)

2COMMAND ERROR

Version 16 FILCOM

2-89

COMMANDS

- 552
-

[FI LCOM program ( Cont)l

Examples (cont)

To compare two binary files between locations 150=160 (octal).
R

FILCOM)

FTTY:/156L/160U+SYS:SYSTAT «SAV,SYSISYSDPY.SAV))

FILE

SYS:SYSTAT.SAV

CREATED:

9818

36-NOV-1971

FILE

SYS:SYSDPY.SAV

CREATED:

1642

29-NOV-1971

000150

2004%0

0oa137

200740

pA3217

RBD340

VR3320

pAd151

260740

PR4226

404500

PR 4242

664240

PR0VO64

PoA152

260740

PD4253

661500

PR2200

401240

PO 6253

PAA153

200040

na5011

260749

NB21723

60700

BpB7732

nBR154

260740

BB4D 63

200049

DD 4243

V6D T0P

VY220

PBP155 ., 201041

1777717

202040

RV3241

Vo300l

774536

0oB156

D470406

PoBB 42

200040

0R4241

247000

0B 4203

00157

254000

POB174

251040

D4l 42

BRS040

BRAG36

160

476020

Ba6T7174

211040

003144

667040

VY6630

To compare two .SAV files.

Note that the files are expanded before the comparison.

sR FILCOM)
*FTTY:+5YS:TRY1 «SAV,SYS:TRY.SAV )
FILE

SYS:TRY1.SAV

CREATED:

2043

05-JAN=-1972

FILE

SYS:TRY.SAV

CREATED:

P818

30~NOV-1971

Pan114

NR4000

Po01 40

PPO00

PoPo0BY

DR4000

000140

o116

777536

PP5536

slaaYaLols)

dayuldds)

777536

PP5536

poc1117

popeeD

pB5536

230000

vovVBL

00120

206000

PB0B1 49

PpT7222

0da1 40

eoni121

ROP2BY

0R60B0

P00

vpgT222

200130

12609

PBBRAAS

PONR0D

200000

010000

POOOOS

200133

pB3727

PBST17

PP6643

PATTT7

DB5164

V2000

200137

PA3400

20070

P46T700

PRo 140

NNBLA4

045300

PRRR T4

264000

PO1454

B47000

VRYAY

223009

001454

POO141

260040

B1773

200040

0esp715

DeLVLY

PB4T06

900142

201240

01447

402000

006644

603240

POT203

200143

5422490

P21634

251040

vo7221

713200

206415

PR01 44

260040

BR2774

403000

PPRO15

663040

002761

200145

621000

7101
R Y]

476000

PR67T15

257000

06705

PO0O146

200240

PA3504

200740

BR6606

DOB500

P0 5302

200147

251240

Pvon12

951140 BO5076

2006300

05064

200000
po1222

200150

402000

003613

200400

280137

602400

003724

Pe0151

201040

PO3T730

263740

RY4226

061700

BB7516

200152

200260

03632

260740

V04253

06N s520

07461

208153

321240

POA164

200040

205011

121200

085175
-

Version 16 FILCOM

005536
ppl1222

2-90

COMMANDS

- 553

FILE command I
Function

The FILE command provides remote conirol of DECtape-to-disk and disk=to~DECtape fransfers

on operator=handled DECtapes.

Command - Formats
1.

FILEC

of FILE commands to be read to determine if any of the user's re=
Checks the queue
quests are still pending. No argument is required. Pending requests will be listed.

FILED,

id, file.ext, file.ext, «vv

Deletes the specified files from DECtape. Requires Tape ID and list of filenames as

arguments. The tape ID is any alphanumeric name of6 characters or less that is used
to identify the tape. Upon completion, an automatic FILE L is performed.

FILEF, id, file.ext, file.ext, ...

Files information onto a DECtape. Requires Tape ID and list of filenames as arguments.
Upon completion, an automatic FILE L is performed.
i

FILEL, id

Reads the directory of a DECtape and places it in the user's disk area as an ASCII file
with filename id.DIR. id is any alphanumeric name of 6 characters or less that is used
to identify the tape. It is the only argument. The user may then read the directory

‘with a monitor command string. (See Examples).
5.

FILER, id, file.ext, file.ext, ...

Recalls (transfers) information from the user's DECtape fo the disk. Requires Tape id
and list of filenames as arguments, If the specified files already exist, they are
superseded with the ones from the DECtape. If the specified files do not exist, they
will be created on the first file structure in the job's search list for which creation is
allowed. After the files are transferred, an automatic FILE-L is performed.

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-91

COMMANDS

- 554 -

EILE command (Contfl

Command Formats (cont)
6.

FILEW
Waits until all of the user's pending requests are processed before continuing.
are pending requests, the message WAITING . . . is typed fo the user.

when all requests have been processed.
not fo wait.

If there

Control returns

The user may type control-C if he decides

FILEZ, id, file.ext, file.ext, . . .

Zeroes the directory of the DECtape before the files are copied and then performs the
same operations as the F option. Requires Tape id and may have a list of filenames as

arguments.

After the files are copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

The C and W funcitons are the only requests that are performed immediately.

quests are placed in a queue to be performed whenever possible.

The other re-

The user's terminal and job

are free to proceed before the request is completed. The function argument
function argument is not specified, a brief dialogue is performed.

is optional .

If the

In most cases the user does not need fo specify which file structures the files are on
because
UMOUNT determines this (with LOOKUPs) and passes the information to OMOUNT,

However, file structure names may be specified in file descriptors. When no structure name is
explicitly typed, the default is initially the first file structure in the user's search list
(implied
by DSK:) on which he is allowed to create files. Refer to the description of the SETSRC
program. When a file structure name is typed or implied, it becomes the new default.
The asterisk construction may be used, but care should be taken when generic DSK: is

Because DSK: may define many file structures, the single file structure is

typed.

chosen as follows:

When the asterisk construction is used for the filename or extension, the first structure
on which the user may create files in his search list is used.
standard file structure.

This is called the user's

If the asterisk construction is not used and the file exists, the first file structure

list that contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by a default.
If the file does not exist, the standard structure is used.
WARNING
If the user has a search list with multiple file structures,

the asterisk construction when used with the FILE R com=

mand can cause files to be created rather than superseded.

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-92

in the search
(See Examples.)

- 555 -

COMMANDS

FILE command (Cont)J

Characteristics
The FILE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the UMOUNT program, thereby destroys the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.
Restrictions

The project~programmer number may not be specified.in file descriptors.

Associated Messag es
Refer to Chapter 4,

Exémp-les
~ JFILE R,MINE,MAIN,F4,SUBFIL.MAC)
-

REGUEST

for which creation is allowed. There are two com
.

STORED

5,CONMANDS

The files MAIN.F4 and SUBFIL.MAC are taken

from the user's DECtape labeled MINE and placed
on the first file structure in the user's search list

IN QUEUE

]

mands in the queue {counting this one).

2, R JoR24 TTYS 27,235 MINE DSKB3,0SKBIMAIN,F4,SUBFIL,MAC)
3, COMMANDS IN QUEUE

The user checks to see if his request is still waiting

to be processed.

The first line of the output indi-

cates that the user's request
is second in the queue
(2.), that the request made is a RECALL (R), that
- the user's job is 24 (JOB24), that the user is on
terminal 5 (TTY5) under the project-programmer
number of [27,235] (27,235), that the tape is identified by the name MINE (MINE), and that the files
will be written in the directory on DSKB: (DSKB:).
The second line indicates that there are 3 commands
in the queuve.

(continued on next page)

Version 20

UMOUNT-

2293

COMMANDS

- 556 -

|FILE command (Cont)|

Examples (cont)
oFILE

The user wants the directory on the DECtape labeled

4 to be placed in his disk area as an ASCII file.

.TYPE

4,DIR)

The user then reads the directory file with the

TY PE command.

If the user's search list is as follows:

DSKA/N, DSKB, DSKC
with file A on DSKA, file B on DSKB, and file Con DSKC, the following commands are
equivalent:

The user types:

The user could have typed:

The command as passed to OMOUNT:

FILE

.FILE

F,2,4,B,C

F,2,DSK2A,DSK:B,

DSKs:C

F,2,DSKAtA,

DsKC:C

DSKB:B,

The first file structure that contains each file is used.

.FILE R,3,4,D5KB3B,C

LFILE R,3,D8K3A,DSKB1B,
DSKBSC

,FILE R,3,DSKA1A,DSKB:B,
DSKB3C

The user changes the default o DSKB and even though file C exists on DSKC, file

on DSKB; files A and B are superseded.
FTILE

Falskexk

FILE

FrlsDSKikoex

cFILE

C is created

FrloDSKBt*ex

Because the asterisk convention was used, the first file structure on which the
user may create
files (DSKB) is used.
FILE

Rs2s85C
a%y

DSKC :B « %

FILE

Ka2,DSKeA,

DSKB:Co*sDSKC 1R o %

«FILE

KsZ2,DSKA:A,

DSKE :Ce*»DSKC
15 « *

Because of the asterisk convention, DSKB is used for file C (even though file
C exists on
DSKC). The wser explicitly typed a structure name for file B; therefore, DSKC
is used even
though file B is on DSKB. File A is superseded.

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-94

- 557 -

)

COMMANDS
FILEX program:

Function

The FILEX program is a general file transfer program intended to convert between various core
image formats, and to read and write various directory formats. Files are transferred as 36~bit
data. The only processing on the data is that necessary to convert between various core image
representations.

‘

Command Format
R FILEX)

*dev:ofile.ext [proj,prog]l <nnn>/switches = dev:ifile .ext [proj,prog] /switches
If the project-programmer and/or the switches appear after the device name, they
apply to all the following files. If they appear after the filename, the specifiers
apply only to the preceding file. The input filename or extension may be * in which
case the usual processing of the * construction occurs (refer to the TYPE command).
The output filename and extension may be * in which case the filename and extension
of the input file is copied. If the output filename or extension is missing, the same
procedure occurs as with the * construction, except that all core image files are
written with the default extension and format appropriate to the output device (unless
overridden by switches).
If a protection <nnn>is not specified, files are written with the system standard protection unless the files are being written on SYS. On SYS, files are written with protection <155>, except for files with extension .SYS. These files have the default

protection of <157 >,

Meaning of Switches:
Help text

toobtain an explanation of the command string and individual
switches,

DECtape Format Specifiers

Version 15 FILEX

PDP-15 DECtape format

MIT project MAC PDP-6/10 DECtape format

Old DEC PDP-6 DECtape format

normal PDP-10 directory format

PDP-11 DEC’rape format (Note that PDP-11 contiguous files are

“not supported by FILEX.)

2-95

COMMANDS

- 558 -

| FILEX program (Cont) I

Command Format (cont)

File Format Specifiers

ASCII processing; meaningful only for PDP=11 and PDP=15 tapes.

binary pv'ocessing; overrides default extension.

compressed; save file format.

This format is assumed for files with

extensions .SAV, .LOW, .SVE.

The default output extension is

.SAV unless the input extension is .LOW or .SVE, in which case
the extension remains unchanged.

dump format:

expanded core image files (used by FILDDT). This format is assumed
for files with extension .XPN. The default output extension is

This format is assumed for files with extension .DMP,

XPN.

image processing; meaningful only for PDP=11 and PDP-15 tapes.

simple block (SBLK) format, project MAC's equivalent of .SAV format. The default output extension is .BIN,

DECtape Processing Specifiers

(go on), ignores read errors on input device. FILEX checks the
always-bad=checksum bit in the 5-series monitor, so this switch is
not needed for files with .RPABC on (e.g., CRASH.SAV).

(list), causes a directory on an input DECtape file to be typed on
the terminal, or causes a directory listing of the output DECtape at
the end (i.e., after the output).

(preserved), causes quick processing (/Q) and preserves the scratch
file ofter processing for use by another command.

/Q
/R

(quick), causes an input or output DECtape to be processed quickly
via a scratch file.

(reuse), reuses a scratch file preserved by a /P in a previous com=
mand .

{zero), causes the appropriate format of a zeroed directory to be
written on a DECtape output file,

If TAPEID appears in the output

specifier, then TAPEID is written as the tape identifier in the directory .

TAPEID is preceded by a up arrow (1) and may be 6 characters

on a PDP=-10 tape, 3 characters on a project MAC tape, and is not
present on a PDP-=6 tape.

Version 15 FILEX

2-96

559 -

COMMANDS

IFILEX program (Cont)l

Characteristics
The R FILEX command:

Runs the FILEX program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Examples

The dump format file is com=

R FILEX,)

pressed and written as TEST.SAV.

**DSK:«DTA1
:TEST «DMP/C
sk

FILEX

Copy CRASH.SAV to an ex~

*DSK:SER1DS5«XPNI
105 1 1-DSKC :CRA SHeSAVI1,4]

panded format file for FILDDT
to examine.

Version 15 FILEX

2-97

COMMANDS

- 560 -

| FINISH command
Function

The FINISH command terminates any input or output currently in progress on the specified

de-

vice and autoratically performs the RELEASE UUO (which CLOSES the files) and DEASSIGN

command, thus making the device available to another user. This command is preferred
over
the DEASSIGN command because it completely disassociates an INITed device
from the user's
job, thereby preventing the user from continuing his program. If the user wishes to continue
his program, he should use the DEASSIGN command.

Command Format
FINISH dev

dev = the logical or physical name of the device on which 1/O is to be terminated.

This argument is optional .

If dev is omitted, 1/O is terminated on all devices, except the job's controlling

terminal and the logical neme of the controlling terminal is cleared.

Characteristics
The FINISH command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.

Depends on FTFINISH which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Restrictions

The user cannot continue his progrem if the device was INITed, but he can start

ning or enter DDT.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-98

at the begin-

- 561 -

COMMANDS

FINISH command (Cont)]

Examples
sFINISH

CDRL)

SFINISH DTA7:)

SFINISH LPT3)

2-99

COMMANDS

- 562 -

| I FUDGE command !
Function

The FUDGE command causes PIP to read a temporary file generated by a previous COMPILE,
LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command using the /FUDGE switch and to create a library REL
file. The library is created with the REL files in the same order in which they were specified
in the command string containing the /FUDGE switch.
NOTE
Since the COMPIL program sorts out files by compilers, mixed

FORTRAN and MA.CRO programs are sorted so that all
FORTRAN progrars are compiled first and MACRO programs
second.

However, the /FUDGE switch combines them in the

order in which the COMPIL program encountered them.
Command Format
FUDGE

Characteristics
The FUDGE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
2COMPIL/FUDGESLIBARY/MACRO TEST,MATH,DATPRO,CBL,SCIENC,F4)
Create a disk file named LIBARY which contains the names of all the

REL files produced.

-FUDGE,)

Create the library file and call it LIBARY.

This file contains the following:

TEST.REL, MATH.REL, DATPRO.REL, and SCIENC.REL.

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running

program,

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-100

the PIP

- 563 -

COMMANDS

FUDGE2 program

Function

The FUDGE2 program is used to update files containing one or more relocatable binary programs and tomanipulate programs within program files. Three files are used in the updating

process:

:
1.

A master file containing the file to be updated.

A transaction file containing the file of programs to be used when updating.

An outputfile containing the updated file,

All three files can be on the same device if the device is DSK. The two input files can be on
the same DECtape.:

~ The desired function of FUDGE2 is specified by @ command code at the end of the command

string. Only one command code can be specified in each command string.. The command
string is then terminated with an ALTmode, represented in this manual by a dollar sign ($).
Switches can also be used to manipulate file directories and to position a magnetic tape.
Command Format

.RFUDGE2)

Zoutput dev:file. ext=master dev:file.ext<programs>, transaction dev:file.ext<programs>

(command)$
oufput dev:

= the device on which the updated file is written.

If omitted,

DSK is assumed.

master- dev:

= the device containing the file to be updated. If omitted, the
default is DSK.

transaction dev:

)

= the device containing the files of programs to be used in the

updating process. When more than one file is transferred from
magnetic tape or paper tape, a colon must follow the device

name for each file.
MTA: : :

For example,
Transfer 3 files

If the device is omitted, DSK is assumed.

file .ext

= the filename and extension of each file.

Filenames must be
specified for directory devices, but the extension can be omitted.
If the extension is not given, it is assumed to be .REL unless the

/L switch appears in the command string. In this case, the output
extension .LST is assumed.

(continued on next page)

Version 14 FUDGE2

2-101

COMMANDS

- 564 -

| FUDGE2 program (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)
file.ext (cont)

Project-programmer numbers appearing after a filename apply

to that file only.

If the project-programmer number appears
before the filename, it applies to all subsequent files until

another device is specified.

The asterisk convention can be used with the input files (refer

to Paragraph 1.4.2.4).
<programs >

= Names of programs (on DSK or DTA only) to be used
in the up-

dating process.

They are grouped within angle brackets in the
same order as they appear in the file and are separated by

commas.

When manipulating all the programs within a file,

only the filename need be specified.
appear for the output file.

(command)

= Code for the function to be performed.

Program names cannot

This code can be either

preceded by a slash or enclosed in parentheses and must oppear

at the end of the command string.

Each command results in the

updated file being output to the output device.
codes are as follows:

The command

Append the specified programs in the transaction file(s)
to the master file.

Delete local symbols from the master file.

Delete the specified programs from the master file.

Extract the specified files and/or programs from the

input files.

The entire file is extracted if program

names are not specified.

Type the commands and switches available.

Insert programs from the specified transaction files into

the master file.

The programs from the transaction files

are inserted immediately before the specified programs

in the master file.

List the names and lengths of all relocatable programs
within a file. The length is in one of two forms:

low segment break, high segment breck or

program break , absolute break

The length of FORTRAN programs is not output.
(continued on next page)

Version 14 FUDGE2

2-102

- 565 -

COMMANDS
|FUDGE2 program (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)

(command) (cont)

Replace the specified programs in the master file with
the specified programs in the transaction file. The number of replacing programs must be the same as the num=ber of programs to replace.

List all the enfry points within a program. These entry

points are listed across the page.

Write index blocks into a library file.

Index blocks

are used in a direct access library search (refer to the

LOADER documentation).

command.

This command implies a C
o

File directories can be manipulated and magnetic tapes positioned by including switches

command string.

by a slash or enclosed in parentheses.

The following switches are available:

/B |

Backspacé a magnetic tape one file.

Advance a magnetic tape one file.

/T~

Skip to the logical end of-tape on a magnetic tape.

Rewind a magnetic tape.

~ Clear the directory of the output DECl'ape.

Characteristics
The R FUDGE2 command:
Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the FUDGE2 program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 14 FUDGE2

in the

These switches can appear anywhere in the command string and are preceded

2-103

COMMANDS

- 566 -

. I FUDGEZ2 program (Cont)l

Examples

<R FUDGE2J
*PT:=DTA1:LIB4A(L)F

List all relocatable programs (.REL) from the file
LIB40, located on DTAT1, on the line printer.

*iSK:LIB4BB=DTA2 :LIB4AA

<EXP«35sEXP.3C>>»

DTA1 :F4<EXP.3A,EXP.3B>(K)3

Replace programs EXP.3 and EXP.3C located in
file LIB4AA on DTA2, with programs EXP.3A and
EXP.3B in File F4 on DTAT1; write out the new
LIB4AA file on disk and call it LIB4BB.

ADTAL sNFILE=DSK:IMFILE <M1

DTA3 s TFILEA<TAL

’

M2 ,M35M4>

»TAS>

Insert into MFILE the programs TA1 and TA2 from

’

- DTA4:TFILEB<TB1.TB2>/1%

TFILEA, and TB1 and TB2 from TFILEB.

NFILE with the following order:

Create

TA1,M1,TA2,M2,TB1,M3,TB2,
M4

Insertion is on a one~to-one basis. If there are
more programs to be inserted than specified programs before which they are to be inserted, the
extra files are ignored.
ILE <M1 2 M2 » M3, M4>
#TAL :NFILE=DSK:MF

However, in this example (where TFILEA and

DTA3:TFILEA

DTA4:TFILEB/IS

TFILEB contain the programs TAT and TA2 and TBI

and TB2, respectively) create an NFILE with the
following order:
TA1,TA2,M1,TB1
M2,
,TB2,
M3, M4

HTA2:TESTA=MTAL1 : (WK

»MTA2:

:(ZADS

Clear the directory of DTA2; rewind MTA1 and advance the tape one file; append the first two program files from MTA2 to the second file on MTA1
and write out the resultant file on disk, calling it
TESTA.
*OUTPUT=LIBARY»DTA]l :LIBARY<FILEY,FILEZ>/A%

Append the programs FILEY ond FILEZ contained
in the file LIBARY on DTAT1 to the end of the file
LIBARY on disk. Write the new file on disk and
call it OUTPUT.

(continued on next page)

Version 14 FUDGE2

2-104

- 567 -

COMMANDS

fiJDG E2 program (Cont) ]

Examples (cont)

ANEWF IL=0LDF IL<TEST>SUBTRC,>MULT I>>BASF 1 L<PkO0G»

SUBF IL <MATH>(E)$ Extract the specified programs from the files
ROUT IN>ANS>»WER

OLDFIL, BASFIL, and SUBFIL and create a new

output file called NEWFIL. The order of the programs in NEWFIL is as follows: TEST, SUBTRC,
MULTI, PROG, ROUTIN, ANSWER, MATH.

*1C

Version 14 FUDGE2

Return to the monitor.

2-105

COMMANDS

- 568 -

IGETA command
Function
The GET command loads a core image from a retrievable storage device but does not

execution.

begin

This command clears all of user core. However, programs should not count on this action
and
should explicitly clear those areas of core that are expected to contain zeroes (i.e. ; programs
should be self-initializing). This action allows programs to be restarted by a 1C, START

sequence without having to do another GET command.

On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record is output before
the
EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur consecutively. Therefore,
a
saved null segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).
Command Format
GET dev+file.ext [proj, progl core

The arguments and the defaults are the same as in the RUN command.
The extension applies to the low file, not the high file. An extension of .SHR, then
-HGH, is assumed for the high file. If the user types an extension of .SHR or .HGH,
the extension is treated as a null extension since . SHR and .HGH are confusing as low
file extensions.

Characteristics

The GET command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does riot operate when the device is currently transmitting data.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,

Example

+GET SYS:PIPJ
J0B

SETUP

+GET TESTJ
JOB

SETUP

2-106

- 569 -

COMMANDS

GLOB program l
Function

The GLOB program reads multiple binary program files and produces an alphabetical cross- referenced list of all the global symbols (symbols accessible to other programs) encountered.

This program also searches files in library search mode, checking for globals, if the program
file was loaded by the LOADER in library search mode (refer to the LOADER documentation).
The GLOB program has two phases of operation;

the first phase is to scan the input files and

build an internal symbol table, and the second, to produce output based on the symbol table.
Because of these phases, the user can input commands to GLOB

in one of two ways.

The first

way is to specify one command string containing both the output and input specifications.

(This is the command string format most system programs accept.) The second is to separate
the command string into a series of input commands and output commands.

Command Formats
1.

RGLOB
outdev:file.ext [proj,prog] = input dev:file.ext [proj,prog] ,file.ext,... dev:file.ext

[proj ,prog] é

2. RGLOB

followed by one or more input commands in the form
dev:file.ext [proj ,prog] ,file .ext [proj,prog],

... ,dev:file.ext [proj,progl, ... J)

and then one or more output commands in the form

outdev:file.ext [proj,prog] = ()
When the user separates his input to GLOB into input commands and. output commands (Com-

mand Format #2), the input commands contain only input specifications and the output commands, only output specifications.

Each output command causes a listing to be generated;

any number of listings can be printed from the symbol table generated from the current input
files as long as no input commands occur after the first output command. When an .input com“mand is encountered after output has been generated, the current symbol table is destroyed

and a new one begun.
Defaults

If the device is omitted, it is assumed to be DSK.
cation is omitted, the output device is TTY.

However, if the entire output specifi-

(continued on next page)

Version 5 GLOB

2-107

COMMANDS

- 570 -

GLOB program (Cont) I

Command Format (cont)
Defaults (cont)

If the output filename is omitted, it is the name of the last input file.
are required.

If the output extension is omitted, .GLB is used.
is assumed fo be .REL
the filename.

The input filenames

If the input extension is omitted, it
unless the null extension is explicitly specified by a dot following

If the proi,écf-programmer number [proj,prog] is omitted, the user's default directory is

used.

An AlLTmode terminates the command input and signals GLOB to output the cross=referenced

listing. In other words, a listing is not output until GLOB encounters an ALTmode. The
AlLTmode appears at the encl of the command string shown in Command Format #1 or at the

end of each output command shown in Command Format #2.

Switches

Switches control the types of glcbal listings to be output. Each switch can be preceded by a
slash, or several switches can be enclosed in parentheses. Only the most recently specified
switch (except for L, M, P, Q, and X, which are always in effect) is in effect at any given
time.

If no switches are specified, all global symbols are output.

availdble.

The following switches are

Output all global symbols.

List only multiple defined or undefined (erroneous) symbols.

List nonrelocatable (fixed) symbols only.

List the switches available (help text).

This is the default if no switches are specified.

Scan programs only if they contain globals previously defined and not yet

satisfied (library search mode).

Turn off library search mode scanning resulting from a /L switch.

List only symbols which are never referenced.

List all routines that define a symbol to have the same value.

The routine

that defines the symbol first is listed followed by a plus (+) sign.

Subse~
quent routines that define the symbol are listed preceded by a plus sign.

Suppress the listing of subsequent definers that result from the /P switch.
(continued on next page)

Version 5 GLOB

2-108

- 571 -

COMMANDS

IGLOB program (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)

Switches (cont)
/R
/S

List only relocatable symbols.
List symbols with non-conflicting values that are defined in more than one
program,

Do not print listing header when output device is not the terminal, and
include listing header when it is the terminal. Without this switch, the
header is printed on all devices except the terminal. The listing header is
in the following format:
FLAGS

SYMBOL

OCTAL VALUE

DEFINED IN

REFERENCED IN

Symbols listed are in alphabetical order according to their ASCII code
values. The octal value is followed by a prime (') if the symbol is relocatable. The value is then relative to the beginning of the program in
which the symbol is defined.
Flags preceding the symbol are shown
below.
:
M

Multiply defined symbol (all values are shown).

Never referred to (i-\..e. , was not declared external in any of
the binary programs).

Multiply specified symbol (i.e., defined in more than one

program but with non=conflcting values).

The name of the

first program in which the symbol was encounteredis followed

by a plus sign.
U

Undefined symbol.

Characteristics
The R GLOB command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the GLOB program, thereby destroying fhe user's core image.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

" Version 5 GLOB

2-109

COMMANDS

- 572 -

GLOB program (Contfl

Examples

R GLOB,)

Run the GLOB program.

*PT:=MAIN,DTA2 :SUB4@,SUBS0

All global symbols in the programs MAIN (on DSK),
SUB40, and SUB50 (on DTA2) are listed on the line
printer. Along with the symbol is listed its value,
the program in which it is defined, all programs in
which it is referenced, and any error flags.

MTA4:BATCH.REL,DATA,DTA6 :NUMBER -REL:CLASS‘)

)
ADSKIMATH.REL,LIBARY.

The programs to be scanned are BATCH.REL,
DATA .REL on DTA4; NUMBER.REL, CLASS.REL
on DTA6; and MATH.REL, LIBARY .null on DSK.

MPT:=/F ®

List only nonrelocatable symbols on the line printer.

*DSK:SYMBOL=/R

List only relocatable symbols in the file named

ATTY:=/E (&

Print all erroneous symbols on the terminal . EXTSYM
is an undefined symbol appearing in the program

U EXTSYM

SUBRTE

SYMBOL in the user's default directory .

SUBRTE.

x1C

Version 5 GLOB

Return to monitor mode.

2-110

- 573 -

COMMANDS

GRIPE program |
Function

The GRIPE program accepts text from a user and records it in a disk file, thereby enabling users
to record comments and complaints to be read at a later time by the operations staff.
Command Format

R GRIPE

When the GRIPE program responds with a YES?, type the text, using as many lines as
necessary, terminated with an ESCAPE. The text is written as a file with <157>protection and includes a-header with the date, time, and project-programmer number of
the user writing the comment. Therefore, the user does not need to identify himself.
Characteristics
The R GRIPE command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the GRIPE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example
———————

sR GRIPE))
YES?

(TYPE ESCAPE WHEN THROUGH) THIS CONSOLE
OUT

ALMOST
THANK

PAPERS

YOU

Version 3 GRIPE

2-111

COMMANDS

- 574 -

HALT command

Function

The HALT (tC) command transmits ¢ HALT command to the monitor command interpreter.
stops the job and stores the program counter in the job data area (.JBPC). Refer to the
DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls for a description of the job data area.

Command Format

HALT (tC)

Characteristics
The HALT (tC) command:
Places the terminal in monifor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,

Example

2-112

- 575 -

COMMANDS

HELP command

Function

The HELP command is used to obtain useful documentation on various system features.
Command Formats

HELP

outputs the instructions for receiving information.
2,

HELP *

outputs the names of features that have available documentation.
3.

HELP name

outputs the information on the named Feafure.
Only the first six characters of the argument to the command are scanned.
must be A through Z, 0 through 9, or asterisk (*).
Characteristics
The HELP command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 3 HELP

2-113

These characters

COMMANDS

- 576 -

LHELPcomnmnd(Confl]

Examples

W HELP v,)
HELP I8 AVAILABLE FOR THE FOLLOWING?
PTPSPL

SHELP

TYPE

DIRECT
MYCOPY

CDRSTK
MATCH

CDPSPL
LPTSPL

BATCON
HELP

SOUP

FAILSA
PIP

FGEN
PLTSPL

TECO

DIRECT)

OUTWINPUT*INPUT+,..

/ACCESSIN = ACCESS ALL LISTED FILES UNDER N BLOCKS LONG
/ALLOCATED » GIVE ALLOCATED LENGTH

/CHECKSUM » COMPUTE CHECKSUM OF EACH FILE
/DETAIL = EVERYTHING FROM EXTENDED LOOKUP
/F
/H

w
®

FAST
THIS

MODE
TEXT

SL.OW

MODE

/L ® OUT TO LPT
/PHYSICAL = DO PHYSICAL OPENS

/SORT = PREPARE FOR SORTING
/SUMMARY = JUST PRINT SUMMARY LINE
/TITLES = INCLUDE TITLES
SPECIFIC

/UNITS

GIVE

/WORDS

OUTPUT

WILD

NAME,

UNIY

/WIDTHIN = TRY TO FILL PAPER WIDTH OF N COLUMNS

LENGTHS

ETC.

7 IS WILD LETTER OF NAME,
"OUTs"

MAY

OMITTED

WORDS

ETC,

DEFAULT IS TTY?1.DIR=DSKtw,w[MY DIRECTORY]

Version 3 HELP

22114

- 577 -

COMMANDS

INITIA command l
Function

The INITIA command performs standard system initialization for the terminal issuing the com=
This command is issued automatically at system startup and at the 400 series restart at

mand.

certain designated terminals, but may be re-issued at any time by the user. This command is
used to initiate specific system programs, such as the operator service program, OPSER, on a
particular console.
The INITIA

command runs SYS:INITIA.SAV which, depending upon the system configuration

and the number of the TTY from which it is typed, may cause any of a number of events to
occur. For more information, refer to the INITIA specification in Notebook 7 of the
DECsystem=10 Software Notebooks.
Command Format
INITIA

Characteristics
The INITIA command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs a specific system program.
Does not require LOGIN,

:
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

LINITIA)
5S04

SYS

Version 3 INITIA

22:12:17

TTY24

2=115

COMMANDS

- 578 -

JCONTINUE command

Function

The JCONTINUE command forces a continue of the speciFied job if the job was in a
tC state because of a call to the device error message routine (HNGSTP).

Command Format

JCONTINUE n

n = the number of the job fo be continued.

This argument is required.

Characteristics
The JCONTINUE command:
Places the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.

Depends on FTJCON which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040,

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

+JCONT

14)

2-116

- 579 -

COMMANDS

KJOB command I
Function

In multiprogramming systems, the KJOB command:

Stops all assigned 1/O devices and returns them to the monitor pool.

Returns all allocated core to the monitor pool.
Returns the job number to the pool.

Leaves the console in the monitor mode.
Performs an automatic TIME command.

In swapping systems, the KJOB command performs all the above procedures. In addition, the
command responds with
CONFIRM:

The user may‘ type tC to abort logout, or type an optional file structure name (or list of file
structure names) preceded by one of the following:

to logout immediately saving all files (including temporary files) as they are.

to delete all files on the specified file structures. Responds with ARE YOU

_ to delete all unprotected files (i.e., files with Oxx protection code) on the

Identical to R LOGOUT, or RUN UUO to LOGOUT.

SURE? Type Y or D for YES, any other character for NO.

- specified file structures. If project 1 or other jobs are logged-in with the same
project-programmer number, responds with ARE YOU SURE? Type Y or K for
YES, any other character for NO.

to save and protect (i.e., assign a protection code of 1 in the owner's field)
all but temporary files (TMP, CRF, LST) on the specified file structures. If

project 1 or other jobs are logged-in with the same project-programmer num-

ber, responds with ARE YOU SURE? Type Y or P for YES, any other character
for NO.

to save without protecting all but temporary files on the specified file structures. If project 1 or other jobs are logged=in with the same project-programmer

number, responds with ARE YOU SURE? Type Y or S for YES, any other char-

acter for NO.

LJ
1.J

to list the directories of the specified file structures.

to individually determine what to do with all files on the specified file struc:

ture as follows:

(continued on next page)

Version 47 KJOB

2-117

COMMANDS

- 580 -

[KJOB command (Cont)]

Function (cont)
After each filename is listed, type

to protect the file.

to save the file.

to delete the file.

to learn if over logged-out quota on this file structure.

If not

over quota, nothing is typed, and the same filename is repeated.

to skip to next file structure and save this file if below logged=out

quota for this file structure.

If not below logged-out quota, a

message is typed and the same filename is repeated.

to list responses and meanings.

to individually determine what to do with all but protected files.

files are always preserved.
B)

Protected

to delete no files except when user is over the logged~out quota, then delete

enough files to be kelow quota.

The files are deleted in the following order:
1) unprotected files according to the category of the file, 2) spooled files not

previously queued, and 3) protected files according to the category of the file.
The categories of files are as follows: 1) temporary files, 2) relocatable files,

3) backup files, 4) save files, and 5) all other files.
Q)

to leam if over logged-out quota on the specified file structures.

to list the KJOB options and their meanings.

to list the names of the files that are deleted.

toturn off the listing of the names of the files that are deleted. Complement

If no file structure names are specified, the responses are for all file structure names in the job
search list.

If file structure names are specified, the responses apply to those file structures,

and CONFIRM is retyped.

The KJOB command ignores all logical assignments.

The user has the option of going through the CONFIRM dialogue, even if other jobs are logged- in under the same project-programmer number or if he is logged=in under project 1. (However,
if sufficient responses are included on the KJOB command line or in a temporary file entered

through an alternate entry point, CONFIRM is not typed.)

By responding to a CONFIRM mes-

sage, the user has an opportunity to organize his disk area by deleting or preserving specific
files.

The KJOB program calls the QUEUE program to perform the qfieuing of files which have been
deferred to logout time.

This includes all spooled output unless the user has specifically

queued output spooling earlier.

Version 47 KJOB

Queuing may be suppressed with the /Z response (see below).

2-118

- 581 -

COMMANDS

KJOB command (Cont)]

Command Formats

KJOB

CONFIRM:
When the CONFIRM: response is given, the user may type any of the above-described

letters followed by an optional file structure name or list of file structure names separated by commas. The user may type one of the above~described letters, followed by
optional file structure names, on the same line as the KJOB command, and the
CONFIRM: message will not be typed.

KJOB <log file descriptor> =/ <letter> <list of file structure names>/<letter>
<list of file structure names> etc.

<log file descriptor> has the following form: -<dev:file.ext [proj,prog]>.
file is not a disk or spooled device, TTY isused.

If the log

<letter> = any letter from the above~described set. In addition, the following re~
sponses are available to any jobs using this command format:
-

/Z:n specifies the degree of queuing desired:
n = 0 suppresses all normal queuing done at LOGOUT time.

n = 1 queues the log file only.
n = 2 queues the log file and spooled output (,.LPT, etc.)
n =3 queues the log file, spooled output, and ,.LST.
n = 4 queues the log file, spooled output, ..LST, and any requests
deferred to LOGOUT time (deferred requests are not yet implemented).
If Z is given without a value or if there are no spool bits set for job, Z:0 is

assumed. Otherwise, /Z:2 is assumed.

/VL:n specifies that the limit of pages for LPT files is to be n (decimal).
/VC:n specifies that the limit of cards for CDP files is to be n (decimal).
/VT:n specifies that the limit of feet of paper tape for PTP files is to be n
(decimal).

/VP:n specifies that the limit of minutes for PLT files is to be n (decimal).

/VR:n specifies that the priority of the queue request is to be n; n is from 0
through 62. /VR:62 is the standard.

(continued on next page)

Version 47 KJOB

2-119

COMMANDS

- 582
~

IKJOB command (Cont)]

Command Formats (cont)

/VS:n specifies that the sequence number for the queue request is to be n.
/VD:v specifies that the file disposition of the log file is to be v.
v =D

deletes the log file after printing.

v =P

preserves the log file after printing.
renames the log file before printing to the queue area and

v =R

deletes it after printing.

Default is /VD:R.
If a value to the above switches is not specified, the value is equivalent to 0

(e.g., /VD is equivalent to /VD:0).

For the /Vx switches, a value of 0 is

equivalent to the standard (e.g., /VD = /VD:0 = /VD:R).

The letters must appear on the input side of the command string.

If the log file

is specified, all TTY output is appended to the log file. If no log file
is specified or if the log file is not a disk or spooled device, the default
is TTY. In
addition, if responses to CONFIRM are required and are not specified
on the
KJOB command line, these responses will then be read from TTY. Therefore,

users should be careful when employing this command format.

The KJOB program may be entered at the CCL entry point through
the RUN UUO. When
this is done, TMPCOR file K.JO or disk file nnnKJO.TMP, where nnn
is the user's job
number in decimal, is used instead of the TTY input. This temporary
file has the follow=
ing format:

KJOB <log file descriptor> = / <list of file structure names>/ < letter>

<list of file structure names> etc.

Characteristics
The KJOB command:
Detaches the terminal.
Stops all assigned I/O devices since it does not operate when a device is
transmitting data.

Runs the KJOB and LOGOUT programs.

Does not require LOGIN.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,

Version 47 KJOB

2-120

currently

- 583 -

COMMANDS
[ KJOB command (Cont)]l

Examples

An example of the CONFIRM dialogue.

CONF IRM: 1)
:
DSKB

TESTA oTST

<@55>

TESTS .TST

: K

: P)

.BAK

<055> 5. BLKS

.BAK

<055>

Ko)

.BAK

<P55>

BLKS

TEST

.BAK

<055>

BLKS

<REL
+MAC

<B#55>
<@55>

BLKS

JOB

+SHR

USER

S5,

<055>

(10,633

5. BLKS

TEST
TEST

TEST

30+ BLKS

: S,)

LOGGED OFF TTYZ24 AT 2309

DELETED

SAVED 4
RUNTIME

FILES 2565 TOTAL
@ MIN, 00<60 SEC

11-MAY-71

FILES

BLOCKS

USED

An example of the user bypassing the CONFIRM dialogue.
K/F)
JOB 9,
SAVED

USER

ALL 23

RUNTIME

S5@5. BLKS

T11
T2

2000. BLKS.

(10,1101
FILES

MINs

LOGGED

S1.52

OFF TTY3

DISK BLOCKS)

(630.

1349

18&-MAR-7]

SEC

An example of the command when used in the Batch system. The output appears in the
log file.

12:20:51
12:21:02
12:21:02
12:21:02

MONTR K DSKBR:MUM.LOGL18,1101=/W/B/VL:200
LGOUT JOB 12, USER [1@,110] LOGGED OFF TTYS5@ 1221
LGOUT SAVED ALL 38 FILES (1275. DISK BLOCKS)
LGOUT ANOTHER JOB STILL LOGGED IN UNDER [10,110]

"12:21:02

LGOUT RUNTIME @

MIN,

18-MAR-71

00.65 SEC

An example of the User specifying two switches.

<K/W/B).
DELETED
MYFILE

JOB

14,

DELETED

SAVED

RUNTIME

Version 47 KJOB

USER

([28,275)

FILES

FILES
MIN,

LOGGED

(1922.

(1735.
@2.60

TTY35

DISK BLOCKS)
SEC

OFF

DISK BLOCKS)

2-121

1454

13-APR=72

COMMANDS

- 584 -

[ LisT commana ?
Function

The LIST command directs PIP to list the contents of named source file(s) on the line printer

(LPT).

The output goes either to LLPT immediately or to the disk to be spooled to LPT if it is

being spooled for this job.

Refer to the QUEUE and PRINT commands.

If the LPT is being

spooled, the QUEUE program should always be used since
it saves time and disk accesses.
Command Format

LIST list

list = a single file specification or a sting of file specifications separated by commas.

A file specification consists of a device name, a filename and extension, and a direc~-

tory name.

This argument is required.

Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in the LIST command

string.

When COMPIL interprets the command string, it passes the switches on to PIP.

Characteristics
The LIST command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem~1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
SLIST

SLIST
SLIST

TEST %

*.MAC)
DTAA4 :A:B:C)

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-122

COMMANDS

- 585 -

LOAD command 1
Function

The LOAD command translates the specified source files
if necessary (function of COMPILE
command), runs the LOADER, and loads the .REL files generated. The assembler or compiler
used is determined by the source file extension or by switches in the command siring (refer to
the COMPILE command). If a REL file already exists with a more recent date than that of
the source file, compilation is not performed (unless requested via a switch).

This command generates a core image but does not begin execution. At this point, the user can
:

start his program or save the core image for future execution.

Each time the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command is executed, the command
with its arguments is remembered in a temporary file on disk, or in core if the monitor has the
TMPCOR feature. Therefore, the filename. used last can be recalled for the next command
without specifying the arguments again (refer to Paragraph 1.5).

The LOAD command accepts several command constructions: the @ construction (indirect commands), the + construction, the = construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Paragraph
1.5 for a complete description of each of these constructions.

’

Command Format
LOAD list

list =a single file specification, or a string of file specifications separated by commas.
A file specification consists of a device name, a filename with or without an extension, and a directory name.

The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These switches can
be temporary or permanent switches (refer to Paragraph 1.5.5).
/ALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the exten-

/BLISS2

Compile the file with BLISS. Assumed for files with the extension

sion of .ALG.

of .BLI.

/COBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the extension of .CBL.

(continued on next page)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the appropriate
processor and the LOADER.

2BLISS will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this
assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-123

COMMANDS

_586..

ILOAD command (Contfl

Command Format (cont)

/COMPILE

Force a compilation of this file even though a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file.

This switch is

used to obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to obtain a
listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not per-

formed if the binary file
is newer than the source file.

/CREF

Produce a cross~-reference listing file on the disk for each file com-

piled for later processing by the CREF program. These files have the
filenume of the source file and the extension of .CRF.
can then be listed with the CREF command.

The files

However, with COBOL

files, the cross~referenced listing is always appended to the listing
file.

/FORTRAN

No additional command need be given to obtain the listing.

Compile the file with FORTRAN.

Assumed for files with the ex—

tension of .F4 and all files with nonrecognizable processor exten-

sions (if FORTRAN is the standard processor).

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL files produced
by the command string. When the FUDGE command is given, PIP
reads this file in order to generate a library REL file. Arguments
to this switch are:

/FUDGE:dev:file .ext [proj,prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the file.

file.ext -~ the name of the library file.

DSK:is assumed.

The filename is required.

If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be .REL.

[proj,prog]l - the directory in which to place the file.

The user’s

directory is assumed if none is given.

This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all REL files
generated by the command string.

/LIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode.

This mode causes a program

file in a special library file to be loaded only if one or more of its

declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined global request in the
source file.

The default libraries are always searched.

Refer to

the LOADER documentation.

/LIST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled, with the file-

name of the source file and the extension of .LST.
be listed later with the LIST command.

These files can

Unless this switch is speci-

fied, listing files are not generated except in COBOL; COBOL
listings are always generated.

(continued on next page)

Version 20 COMPIL

2-124

COMMANDS

- 587 -

l LOAD command (Cont) I

Command Format (cont)

/LMAP

Produce .a loader map during the loading process (same action as
/MAP) containing the local symbols.

/MACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO .

Assumed for files with extensions

of .MAC.

/MACX11

]

Assemble the file-witfi MACX11. Assumed for files with an exten~

sion of P11,

/MAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process. When this switch
is encountered, a loader map is requested from the loader. After
the library search of the default libraries, the map is written with
the filename specified by the user {e.g., /MAP:file) or with the default filename MAP.MAP in the user's disk area. This switch
is an exception to the permanent compile switch rule in that it
causes only one map to be produced although it may appear as a
permanent switch,
'

/NOCOMPILE

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing a compilation on
a source file whose date is not as recent as the date on the binary
file. Note that this switch is not the same as the /REL switch,
which turns off all compilation, even if the source file is newer
than the REL file. /NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NOLIST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default action except for
COBOL files; COBOL listings are always generated.

- /NOSEARCH

Load-all routines of the file whether the routines are referenced or
not. Since this is the default action, this switch is used only to

turn off library search mode (/LIBRARY). This is not equivalent
to the /P LOADER switch because /P does not search any libraries
where /NOSEARCH will scan the default libraries.
Use the existing .REL files although a newer source file may be

/REL

present.

/SNOBOL

Compile the file with SNOBOL.

Assumed for files with an exten-

sion of .SNO.

Characteristics
The LOAD command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the appropriate processor and the LOA DER.

]MACXH (the PDP-11 assembler for the PDP-10) will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set.

However, this assembly switch setting is not supported.

SNOBOL will be recognized as a processor only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However,

this assembly switch setting is not supported.

Version 20 COMPIL

2-125

COMMANDS

- 588 -

[LOAD command (Cont)]

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

o« LOAD TEST)
MACRO:

TEST

LLOADER

Version 20 COMPIL

CORE

2-126

- 589 -

COMMANDS

LOCATE command

Function
-

The LOCATE command logically establishes the user's job at a specified station. When the job
is initiated, the user's logical station corresponds to his physical station. Therefore, this command is needed only if the user desires to change his logical station.

Command Format

LOCATE nn
nn = the station number.

An argument of 0 denotes the central station. A null argument implies the station of
the user's terminal, i.e., his physical station.
Characteristics
The LOCATE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode. .

Depends on FTREM which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Restrictions

The LOCATE command must specify a station that is currently in contact with the central
stafion.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

JLOCATE 2,)
TLoc o

2-127

COMMANDS

- 590 -

I LOGIN command
Function

The LOGIN command is used to gain access to the system.

Support program which accepts the user's LOGIN data.
programmer numbers followed by his password.

This command loads a Monitor

The user types in his project and

To login successfully, the project and pro-

grammer numbers and the password typed in by the user must match the project and
programmer

numbers and password stored in the system accounting file (SYS:ACC T.SYS).

Command Format
LOGIN proj,prog
proj ,prog = the user's project-programmer number.

The project and programmer numbers

may be separated by either a comma or a slash. If a slash is used, the message of the
day is not output to the user unless the date on the file containing the message

(NOTICE.TXT) is later than the last time the user logged-in.

If this is true, the mes-

sage is typed only once, whereas, when the comma is used, the message is output
every time the user logs in. This argument may be typed on the same line as the

Characteristics
The LOGIN command:
Returns the terminal to monitor mode or starts a program running if specified in
ACCT.SYS entry for proj,prog.

Runs the LOGIN program.
Does not require LOGIN.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 53 LOGIN

2-128

- 591 -

COMMANDS

Example

The following is the procedure used to gain access to the system.

JLOGIN 27,235 4
JOB 21
5S@417A TTY23

LOGIN types the job number assigned to user (job
number 21), followed by monitor name, version
number, and console line number.

If the user does

not type his project-programmer number on the same
:

line as the LOGIN command, LOGIN outputs a

number sign indicating that the user should type in
his project-programmer number.

PASSWORD ¢

System requests user to type his password.

User

types password followed by carriage return (refer to

Paragraph 1.4.2.1). To maintain password security,
the monitor does not echo the password. On terminals
with local-copy (refer to DECsystem-10 Monitor
Calls), a mask is typed to make the password unreadable.
1135

8-JUN-71

THUR

TYPE

SYS:SCHED

FOR

If user entries are correct, the system responds with
NEXT

time, date, day of the week, the message of the

day (if any), and a period, indicating readiness to

WEEKS SCHEDULE
h

Version 53 LOGIN

accept another command.

2-129

COMMANDS

=592 -

l MAKE command 1
Function

The MAKE command runs TECO (Text Editor and Corrector)
and creates a new file on the

disk.

If a file already exists with the same name, a waming message is given and the file

is superseded.

Notebooks.

Refer to the TECO manual in Notebook 6 of the DECsystem-10 Software

Command Format

MAKE dev:file.ext [proj,progl
dev: = the device or file shucture name on which the file is to be created.
DSK: is assumed,

If omitted,

file.ext =any legal filename and filename extension.
filename extension is optional .

The filename is required; the

[proj,prog] = the directory in which the file is to be created. If omitted, the user's

default directory is assumed.

other UFD,

Note that the default directory may be an SFD or some

Characteristics

The MAKE command:
Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the TECO program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

<MAKE TEST3.MAC.J)
*

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the commands before running TECO .
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 23 TECO

2-130

- 593 -

COMMANDS

MOUNT command

Function

The MOUNT command allows the user to request assignment of a device via the operator.
This command is similar to the ASSIGN command, but, whereas the ASSIGN command operates
without operator communication, the MOUNT command requests operafor interaction when
_necessary. For example, if a Batch user requests a DECtape drive and all drives are in use,
then the operator can free one for the user, if he wishes.

the restricted pool of devices.

The user can request devices from

The MOUNT command gives the operator greater control over assignment of devices on the
system. When a user requests a device via this command, the operator has the option of either
‘selecting a specific unit (e.g., DTA5) or cancelling the request completely (all units of this
type are in use and the operator does not want to free one for this user).

The operator may

also mount the media for the requested unit if the media is sufficiently identified (e.g., a

deck of cards in the card reader or an identified DECtape on a specific drive).

When the MOUNT command is used to gain access to a file structure, it allows the user to
specify a particular drive, places the file structure name at the end of the job's search list,
and waits for completion of operator action, if desired. Each file structure can have an administrative file, QUOTA.SYS, which contains a list of quotas for all users allowed access to
the structure. When the file structure is mounted, a UFD is created for the user if he has an
entry in QUOTA.SYS on the file structure.

The MOUNT command runs the UMOUNT program in the user's core area. UMOUNT scans
the command string and completes as much of the command as possible without operator intervention.

When operator intervention is required, UMOUNT queues a request to the OMOUNT
program by writing a command file on the 3,3 disk area. OMOUNT examines these command
files and interacts with the operator. When the command file is deleted, the operator action
has been completed. UMOUNT waits for this completion of operator action unless the user
types a control-C. When a control=C is typed, the user does not receive a message of confirmation, but can later use the /CHECK switch fo see if his request is still pending (see

Examples) .

Command Format

MOUNT dev: log-dev /switches (drives)
dev: = one of the following:

(1) a physical device name (e.g., DTA3, CDR, MTA),
(2) a logical name previously associated with a physical device by either a MOUNT
or ASSIGN command, or (3) a file structure name (one that is already mounted or
one whose name appears in STRLST.SYS). This argument is required.

(continued on next page)

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-131

COMMANDS

- 594 -

[ MOUNT command (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)

log-dev = any SIXBIT name that is not the same as dev:. In other words, it may not
be a physical device name or logical name that is currently being used or has previously

been used as dev:.

This argument is optional.

switches = The following switches are optional and only enough characters to make the

switch unique are required.

The unique names are underlined below.

/CHECK

Check and list pending requests.

/HELP

Type this list.

/MULTI

Multi-access, disk only, complement of /SINGLE,
default condition.

/PAUSE

Notify the user before sending the message to the
operator for a request.

The user can then abort

the command if desired.

/RONLY

Read only, same as /WLOCK .

/SINGLE

Only this job can access files on the structure

(single access), file protection is enforced for

him, disk only.

/VID:name

A visual identification passed to the operator as a
comment to assist him in identifying a particular unit
to mount. The argument can be in one of two forms:

1) any string of up to 25 characters containing only
letters, digits, periods, and hyphens, or 2) any
string of up to 25 characters enclosed in single

quotes.

However, break characters and single

quotes are not allowed in the string.

The naming

and use of this switch is relevant only to the extent
that the installation operator knows what it means.
The PLEASE command should be used for any complex
procedures or long communications with the operator.

/WENABL

Write enable for this job, complement of /WLOCK,
default condition.

. (continued on next page)

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-132

- 595 -

COMMANDS
“MOUNT command (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)

/WLOCK
-~

Write locked for this job. This job cannot write on

this file structure and the monitor will not update
BAT blocks or the access date. If /SINGLE is
given, the operator may set hardware write lock
‘to ensure that nothing is written.

(drives) = the physical drives on which the units are to be mounted.

may be used only when mounting file structures.
order within the file structure.

A drive argument

The drives must be in the logical unit

Drive names are separated by commas. Leading and
embedded drives that are not specified must be represented by null names (, ,DPA3).
Unspecified trailing drives may be omitted. Drive names are as follows:

Blank, null - unspecified.

UMOUNT finds one of proper type.

Two letters - controller class (e.g., DP).

Three letters - specific controller (e.g., DPA).
that controller.
:

UMOUNT finds a drive on

Three letters and one or fwo digits - specific drive (e.g., DPAO, DPA1).
The user, by specifying a drive list, may force the packs to be mounted on specific
drives or controllers. If no drive (or incomplete) specification is given, an available
drive of the proper type is found.
:
Characteristics

The MOUNT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the UMOUNT program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX and FTMOUN which are normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 20 UMOUNT

2-133

- 596 -

COMMANDS

[MOUNT command (Cont)l

Examples

)
<MOUNT PKIV:
PRIV

Asks the operator to mount the file structure PRIV.

MOUNTED

-MOUNT

PAY:(DPA,,»DPB)/S

MCUNT MINE 3,
OPERATOR

NOTIF IED

WATITING
..

Requests that the first unit of file structure PAY be
mounted on Controller A, the second unit on any
controller, the third unit on controller B, and
any remaining units on any drives. The structure
will be single access (i.e., available only to this
job).
Mount the file structure MINE.
The request is queued to the operator.

UMOUNT is waiting for the request to be completed.
The user does not wait for confirmation.

+MOUNT /CHECK )

The user wants to know if his request hqs been
processed,

NONE

The request has been processed.

PEND ING

bETSRC)

DSKA»DSKB,»PRIV,PAY,MINE,FENCE

*1C
sMOUNT

DTA

INPUT

The user wants to know if the file structure is in
his search list.
The file structure has been added to his search list.
The user wants the operator to select a DECtape
drive and assign it with logical name INPUT,

OPERATOR

NOTIFIED

WAITINGesos

INPUT
=MOUNT

(DTAS)

MOUNTED

INPUT/VID:325

The request is queued to the operator.
UMOUNT is waiting for the request to be completed.
The operator has selected DTAS.

The user asks the operator to mount the DECtape
labeled 325. He may use either DTA5 or INPUT
to refer to his device.

For example, the Batch user

would use INPUT since he would not know what
DECtape drive he is assigned.
OPERATOR

NOTIFIED

WAITING
.o

. INPUT (DTAS3)
SMOUNT INPUT

MOUNTED
OUTPUT

The request is queued.
UMOUNT is waiting for confirmation.
The mount is successful .
The user changes the logical name to OUTPUT.,
The logical name INPUTis no longer valid.

OUTPUT

(DTAS)

Version 20 UMOUNT

MOUNTED

The mount is successful.

2-134

- 597 -

COMMANDS

OPSER program

Function

The OPSER program facilitates multiple job control from a single operator terminal by allowing
The OPSER program acts as

the operator to run several jobs called subjobs from his terminal .

the supervisor of the various subjobs by allowing monitor level or user level commands to be

passed fo all of the subjobs or to selected subjobs.
trieved by OPSER.

OQutput from the various subjobs may be re-

The subjobs of OPSER run on psuedo-TTYs (refer to DECsystem=10 Monitor Calls) and all
initializations of the pseudo-TTYs are performed by OPSER. The operator needs only to pro-

vide the subjob name, either an OPSER-provided subjob number or an operator-assigned name.
System programs that require a dedicated terminal can be run as subjobs of OPSER. By running
system jobs on pseudo-TTYs, OPSER is able to maintain an 1/O link between the running jobs
and the operator. In addition, the output from the various subjobs is concentrated on one
terminal instead
-of many, as was the case when each system program required its own terminal .
Refer to the MPB Operator's Manual in the DECsystem~10 Software Notebooks for complete
information on OPSER.

Command Format

R OPSER

OPSER signifies its readiness to process commands by typing an asterisk if no subjobs
are in use or subjobs are in a wait for an operator action. OPSER responds with an
exclamation point when a subjob is running. Commands may be entered whenever
- OPSER is operating. Each command is preceded by a colon and must be typed to
sufficient length to make it unique.
OPSER Commqnds

:AUTO/hh:mm filespec

Process the specified file as an automatic startup
file. The file is terminated by an end-of-file or
the typing of a line on the console by the operator.

This is the normal way that the standard subjobs are
started by the operator. The time argument is optional; when it is given, the AUTO file is run at

the specified time.

:BATMAX n]
:BATMIN n]

Specify the maximum number of batch jobs allowed.
Specify the minimum number of batch jobs guaranteed.

(continued on next page)

] Not yet implemented.
Version 4 OPSER

2-135

COMMANDS

- 598 -

OPSER program (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)
:CLOSE

:CURRENT

Close the disk log file without opening a new one.
Type the number of the current subjob (the last
one typed into).

Output from another subjob does

not affect current subjob .

:DAYTIME

Obtain the current date and time.

:DEFINE xxx=n

Associate the symbol xxx as the

mnemonic for subThe symbol B is reserved for the subjob running BATCON .,

job number n.

:DEVICE nam:log:n

Assign the device with the physical name nam and

logical name log to subjob n. The logical name is
optional but a null field must be typed if the name
is omitted, e.g., :DEVICE CDR::3.

:ERROR n

Report only error messages (that is, ignore nonerror
messages from subjob n).

Message reporting is re-

sumed with the :REVIVE command.
EXIT

Exit to the monitor if no subjobs are in use; other-

wise give a list of those that are running.

This

should be used instead of 1C, since EXIT does not
return the job to monitor mode if there are any

active subjobs.
:FREE

Type the first free subjob number.

:HELP

Type a text which briefly explains the commands .

:JCONTn

Continue the specified stopped job.

:KJOB, n,m,p

Kill the specified subjobs saving all files.

Causes

/Z:0 to be included to KJOB so spooled files are
not queued.

:KILL n,m,p

Kill the specified subjobs.

This is identical to

:KJOB.

:KSYS hhmm

:LOGIN proj,prog

Stop all timesharing at the time specified by hhmm.
Login a new subjob.

If no project-programmer num-

ber is typed, assume OPSER's project-programmer

number.

:MSGLVL 0.

Cause the response to the :WHAT command to include the JOBSTS bits.

(continued on next page)

Version 4 QOPSER

2-136

- 599 -

.COMMANDS

[OPSER program (Cont)

Command Format (cont)
:tMSGLVL 1

Cause the response to :WHAT command to eliminate
the JOBSTS bits.

:QUEUE <line>

Initiate the first free subjob and send the typed-in
line to the system queue manager.

:RESOURCES

Jype the list of the available system resources.

:RESTRICT dev]

Make the specified device a restricted device (i.e.,
one that is assignable only by a privileged job or
the MOUNT program).

:REVIVE n

Resume normal echoing of output from subjob n.

:SEND <line>

Simulate the SEND monitor command.

SET a

Simulate a SET monitor command.

:SET RUN CPUn

Add CPUn to the pool of CPUs to be used for run-

Valid SET monitor commands are SET CORMAX, SET CORMIN,
SET DATE, SET DAYTIME, SET LOGMAX, SET
OPR TTY, SET SCHED, and SET TTY.
ning jobs.

:SET RUN NO CPUn

Remove CPUn from the pool of CPUs to be used for
running jobs.

:SILENCE n,
:SLOGIN proj, prog

Ignore all output from subjob n.
LOGIN one subjob but suppress its response.

If proj,

prog is omitted, OPSER uses its own.
:STOP n

Put the specified subjob in monitor mode. This is
equivalent to inputting two conirol=C's in interactive mode.

SYSTAT xx

Run SYSTAT with optional argument xx over the first
free subjob.

:TLOG filespec

Create a disk log file with the specified name. If
the file already exists, a message is typed to deter=

mine whether the existing file should be superseded.

If not, the file is appended to the existing one.

Default for filespec is OPSER.LOG.

TJTYTST

Test this terminal by typing all the ASCII characters
between octal 40 and 174, inclusive.

(continued on next page)

] Not yet implemented.
Version 4 OPSER

2-137

COMMANDS

- 600 -

IEPSER program (Contfl

Command Format (cont)

tUNRESTRICT dev]‘

Make the specified device a unrestricted device

(i.e., one that is assignable by both privileged and

non-privileged- jobs).

‘WHAT n,m,
p

Type the status of the specified subjobs on the terminal.

The status includes a SYSTAT with the time,
the time of the last input and the last output, and a

linear listing of the JOBSTS bits.
When a subjob number or name is required in a command string, the subjob may be
specified in one of four ways. It can be omitted, in which case the last subjob typed
into is used.

implied.

The mnemonic ALL may be used, in which case all active subjobs are
A decimal number can be used from zero to the limit OPSER is generated for.

Finally, a mnemonic can be assigned to the subjob with the :DEFINE command.

Examples
sR

OPSER,)

*:AUTO

To start an automatic startup file.

CTY.ATO

tMSGLVL 0
sTLOG

An example of an automatic startup file.

$SLOG

DAE=

sDEFINE

DAE~-R

DAENON

2 5LOG

:DEFINE
M=

OMOUNT

M-=START
$SLOG

tDEFINE
L-g

LPTSPL

L=-START
:SLOG

:DEFINE
B-MJOB

B-KR

B=
5

BATCON

B-START

]Nof yet implemented.
Version 4 OPSER

2-138

- 601 -

COMMANDS

PJOB command

Function

The PJOB command causes the monitor to respond with the job to which the user's terminal is
:

attached.

Command Format
PJOB

Characteristics
The PJOB command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

+PJOBJ
]
.

—

2-139

COMMANDS

- 602 -

PLEASE command

Function
The PLEASE command allows the user non-conflicting two=way communicat

ion with the desig-

nated station operator.

Command Format
PLEASE dev: prog! text
dev = any terminal not assigned to a job (i.e., is not a job’s controlling
terminal) with

which the user wishes to communicate, including:
a.

TTYn: directs the text to a specific terminal unit.

The default is TTYO.

OPRnn: directs the text to the operator's terminal station nn.

(null argument) directs the text to TTYO at the central station.

‘

prog! == the name of the system program to be run automatically when the

completed.

message is
This argument may appear before or after the device argument and
must be

concluded with an exclamction point. If PLEASE is entered at the CCL entry
point, it
reads file nnnPLS.TMP. This file is sent to the designated device.
After the operator

terminates the request, the specified program will be run at its CCL
entry point,

Neither the dev: or prog! argument can be used from a Batch control
file.

text = the user's message. The argument is required. Characters are not
transmitted
until the RETURN, vertical tab, or form feed key is depressed, at which
point the
entire line is fransmitted.

When the user depresses the RETURN, vertical tab, or form feed key,
a message informing the operator of the caller's station number, proj-prog number or
user's name if
monitor job tables are available, and text message is printed on dev:.
An ESCAPE or
control-C on either the user's terminal or dev: causes communication
to terminate and

the user's TTY to be left in monitor mode.

Note that when the line terminates with an

ESCAPE, the line is typed but the operator response is not waited
for. Messages may

be typed in both directions without retyping the command.
Characteristics
The PLEASE command:

Places the terminal in user mode until ESCAPE is typed.
Runs a system program except when used with Batch.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem
=-1040.

Version 11 PLEASE

2-140

COMMANDS

- 603 -

[ PLEASE command (Cont)J

Restrictions

For Batch users, the PLEASE command is trapped By the Batch Controller and only PLEASE text

is allowed. It can be used to request operator action while in the Batch mode. The line of

text can o_n|y be one line terminated with an ESCAPE,
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

LPLEASE TELL ME WHEN DTA3 WILL BE FREE,)
'

OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED
iN HALF AN HOUR

THANKS
tC

Version 11 PLEASE

"2-141

COMMANDS

- 604 -

I PLOT command
Function

The PLOT command is used to place entries in the plotter output queuve.
equivalent to the following form of the QUEUE command:

This command is

QUEUE PLT:jobname = list of input specifications
Command Format
PLOT jobname = list of input specifications

jobname = name of the job being entered into the queve. The default is the
name of
the first file in the request, not the name of the first file given. These
differ when the

first file given does not yet exist.

input specifications = a single file specification or a string of file specificatio

separated by commas, for tne disk files being processed.
form devfile.ext[proj, prog].

ns,

A file specification is in the

dev: = any file structure to which PLTSPL will have access; the
default s DSK:.

file.ext = names of the files.

The filename is optional.

The default for the

first filename is *, the default for subsequent files is the last
filename used.

The extension can ke omitted; the default is . PLT,

[proj, prog] = a directory to which the user has access; the user's directory

assumed if none is specified.

If no arguments are given with the command (i.e., only the command
name is given),

the entriés for all jobs of all users are output.

for the input specifications.

The asterisk convention can be used
Switches that aid in constructing the queue entry can

appear as part of the input specifications.

These switches are divided info three cate-

gories:

1..

Queue-operation = Only one of these switches can be placed

mand string because they define the type of queue

used can appear anywhere in the command string.

request.

General = Each switch in this category can appear only

mand string because they affect the entire request.

appear anywhere in the command string.

in the com-

The switch

once in the com-

The switch used can

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-142

- 605 -

COMMANDS

[PLOT command (Cont)J

Command Format (cont)
3.

File control = Any number of these switches can appear in the command

string because they are specific to individual files within the request. The
switch used must be adjacent to the file to which it applies. If the switch
precedes the filename, it becomes the default for subsequent files.

The following switches can be used with the PLOT command:
Category

Explanation

Switch

Process the request after the specified time; it is either

/AFTER:tt

General

in the form of hhmm (time of day) or +thhmm (time later

than the current time).

The resulting AFTER time must

be less than the DEADLINE time. If the switch, or the °

value of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constraints
are assumed.

/BEFORE:t

Queve only the files with creation dates before + where

General

/BEGIN:n

Start the output after n feet.
output at the beginning.

The default is to start
:

File Control

/COPIES:n

Repeat the output the specified numberof times. n
must be less than 64, If more than 63 copies are
needed, two separate requests must be made. If the

File Control

t is in the form dd-mmm=-yy hhmm.

switch is omiited, single copies are output.
/CREATE
/DEADLINE :tt

Make a new entry into the plotter output queue. This
switch is the default for the queue~operation switches.

Queue Operation

Process the request before the specified time; tt is

General

either in the form hhmm (time of day) or +hhmm (time
later than the current time). The resulting DEADLINE
time must be greater than the AFTER time. If the
switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, no
DEADLINE constraints are assumed.

/DISPOSE :DELETE
/DISPOSE :PRESERVE

Delete the file after spooling.

File Control

Save the file after spooling. This is the default for all
files except files with extensions .LST, .TMP, and, if
the protection is Oxx, .PLT.

File Control

(continued on next page)

Version 3

QUEUE

2-143

- 606 -

COMMANDS

[PLOT command (Cont) I

Command Format (cont)
Switch

/DISPOSE :RENAME

Explanation

Category

Rename the file from the specified directory immediately,

File Control

remove it from the logged-out quota and delete it after

sposling.

This is the default for files with extensions

.LST, .TMP, and if the protection is Oxx, .PLT.

List the entires in the plotter queue, but do not update
the queuves.

Queue Operation

Therefore, the list may not be an up-to-date

listing but the listing will be faster than with /LIST.
/FORMS:a

Place the output on the specified form.

The argument

to the switch must be six alphabetic characters.

General

The de-

fault is that normal forms are used.

/KILL

Remove the specified entry from the plotter queve. This
switch can be used for deleting a previously submitted

Queue Operation

- request as long as the request has not been started by

the spoolers.

/LIMIT:n

Limit the output to the specified number of pages.

General

JUIST

List the entries in the plotter queue; if the switch, along
with all other switches, is omitted, all entries for all jobs

General

of all users are listed.

/MODIFY

‘

Alter the specified parameters in the job.

This switch
requires that the user have access rights to the job. It
can be used for altering a previously submitted request

Queue Operation

as long as the request has not been started by the spoolers.

/NEW

Accept the request even if the file does not yet exist.

File Control

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

COMMANDS

- 607
-

[PLOT command (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)
e

Category

Explanation

Switch

/NOTE:a

Plot the specified text (a) in the output.

File Control

/NULL

Accept the request even if there is nothing in the re-

General

quest.

No error message is given.

/OKNONE

Do not output message if no files match the wildcard

/PHYSICAL

Suppress logical device name assignments for the device
specified.
:
:

construction.

File Control

If the /PLOT: switch is

File Control

Plot the file in binary mode.- If the /PLOT: switch is

File Control

Plot the file in ASCII mode.

/PLOT:ASCII

File Control

This
is assumed at KJOB time.

omifted, the file is plotted in the data mode specified in
the file.

/PLOT:BINARY

omitted, the file is plotted in the data mode specified
in the file.

/PLOT:IMAGE

Plot the file in image mode. If /PLOT: switch is omit~
ted, the file is plotted in the data mode specified in the

File Control

file.

Assign the specified external priority (n=0 to 62) to the
request. The larger the number, the greater priority the
job has. The default is 10 if no switch is given and 20
~if the switch is specified without a value.

/PRIORITY :n

/PROTECT:nnn

Assign the protection nnn (octal) fo the job. If the

General

switch or the value of the switch is omitted, the standard
protection is assumed.

Remove the file from the queue. This switch is valid

/REMOVE

File Control

only with /MODIFY and can be used to remove a pre-

viously submitted file as long as the spoolers have not
started processing the request.
/SEQ:n

Specify a sequence number to help in identifying a
request to be modified or deleted.

General

/SINCE:t

Quevue only the files with creation dates after the specified time t where t is in the form dd=mmm=yy hhmm.

General

(continued on next page)

Version 3

QUEUE

2-145

COMMANDS

- 608 -

LPLOT command (Contfl |

Command Format (cont)

‘Switch

Explanation

/START:n

Category

Start on the nth line of the file. If the switch, or the
value of the switch is omitted, the first line is assumed.

File Control

/STRS

Search for the file on all file structures in the search list
and take each occurrence. The default is to take just
the first occurrence.

File Control

/UNPRESERVED

Output the files only if they are not preserved (i.e.,
the first digit of the protection code is 0). This
switch avoids redundant plotting.

General

Characteristics

The PLOT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
:
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
sPLOT

*.PLT/FORMS :PLAIN)

Cause all files with the extension PLT in
the user's

ared to be plotted.

Because these are spooled files

(i.e., have the extension . PLT), the files are

renamed out of the user's area immedi

deleted ofter plotting.

ately, and

The operator is asked to

put PLAIN paper on the plotter.

Version 3 QUEUE

COMMANDS

- 609 -

PRESERVE command !
Function

The PRESERVE command renames the specified files with the standard protection inclusivelyi

ORed with 100 (usually 155 or 157). The files are then preserved and KJOB will not delete

them unless requested to. This command has the same action as the P argument to the KJOB
command when individually determining what to do with each file.
‘

Command Format

PRESERVE filel.ext,file2.ext, file3.ext,. .7 .
The full wildcard construction can be used for either the filename or the extension.
Chqracterisfics

The PRESERVE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DEFsystem-'lO40.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example

PRESERVE TEST.MAC,)
<PRE

PROG»

)
COLE.F4,NAME.*

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2-147

COMMANDS

- 610 -

| PRINT command
Function

The PRINT command is used to place entries into the line printer output queue.
is equivalent to the following form of the QUEUE command:

This command

QUEUE LPT:jobname = list of input specifications
Command Format
PRINT jobname = list of input specifications
jobname = name of the job being entered into the queue. The default is the name of
the first file in the request, not the name of the first file given. These differ when the
first file given does not yet exist.
input specifications = a single file specification or a string of file specifications, sepa~

rated by commas, for the disk files being processed.
devfile.ext[proj, prog].

A file specification is in the form

dev: = any file structure to which LPTSPL will have access; the default is DSK:.

file.ext = names of the files. The filename is optional. The default for the
first filename is *, the default for subsequent files in the last filename used.

The extension can be omitted; the default is . LPT.

[proj, prog] = a directory to which the user has access; the user's directory is

assumed if none is specified.

If no arguments are given with the command (i.e., only the command name is given),

the entries for Gll jobs for all users are output.

The asterisk convention can be used for the input specifications.

Switches that aid in

constructing the queue entry can appear as part of the input specifications.

switches are divided into three categories:

These

Queue-operation = Only one of these switches can be placed in the command string because they define the type of queue request.

The switch

used can appear anywhere in the command string.
2.

General - Each switch in this category can appear only once in the command string because they affect the entire request.

The switch used can

appear anywhere in the command string.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-148

COMMANDS

- 611 -

IPRINT command (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)

switches can appear in the command
3. File control = Any number of these ‘ndivi
dual files within the request. The
to
ic
specif
string because they are
it applies. If the switch
switch used must be adjacent to the file to which
lt for subsequent files.
precedes the filename, it becomes the defau

The following switches can be used with the PRINT command:

Switch

/AFTER:tt

Category

Explanation

General

ied time; it is either
Process the request after theof specif
day) or +hhmm (time later
————————————
o

in the form of hhmm (time

than the current time). The resulting AFTER time must

or the
be less than the DEADLINE time. If the switch, aints
value of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constr
are assumed.

General

a creation date before time t,
Queue only the files with
dd-mmm-yy hhmm. If this switch

/BEFORE:t

where t is in the form

is omitted, no BEFORE constraints are assumed.,

/BEGIN:n
/COPIES:n

Start the output on the nth page. The default is to begin File Control
output on the first page.
Repeat the output the specified number of times. nmust File Control
be less than 64. If more than 63 copies are needed, two

separate requests must be made. If this switch is omitted,
one copy is given.

Queve Operation

queve.
Make a new entry into the line printer output
operation

/CREATE
'

/DEADLINE :tt

This switch is the default for the queue~

switches.

‘

tt is either General
Process the request before the specified time;
(time later than

‘n the form hhmm (time of day) or +hhmm
the current time). The resulting DEADLINE time must
be greater than the AFTER time. If the switch, or the

value of the switch, is omitted, no DEADLINE con- '

/DISPOSE:DELETE
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE

straints are assumed.

Delete the file after spooling..

the default for all
Save the file after spooling. This is .LST,
.TMP, and,

files except files with extensions of
if the protection is Oxx, .LPT.

Version 3 QUEUE

File Control

2-149

File Control

(continued on next page)

COMMANDS

-612
-

[EBINT command (Com
Command Format (cont)
Switch

/DISPOSE:RENAME

Explanation

Category

Rename the file from the spec

ified directory immediately,

remove it from the logg
ed-out quota, and dele
te it after

File Control

spooling.

This is the default for files
with extensions
-LST, .TMP, and, if the
protection is Oxx, .LPT
.

List the entries in the line
printer queue, but do not
update the queves. Therefor
e, the list may not be an
up-

to~date listing but the listi
ng will be faster than

/LIST,
/FILE:ASCII

Queuve Operation

with

Indicate that the input file
format is to be interpreted
as ASCII text. This is assu
med for all files with ex~

File Control

tensions other than .DAT
.

/FILE :COBOL

Indicate that the input file

as COBOL SIXBIT text
.

/FILE:F ORTRAN

Indicate that the input file
FORTRAN ASCII text (obe

characters).
of .DAT.

/FORMS :q

format is to be interpreted

File Control

format is to be interpreted

File Control

FORTRAN carriage control

This is assumed for files with

the extensjon

Place the output on the spec
ified form. The argument
to
the switch must be six alph
abetic characters. The defa
ult
is

General

that normal forms are used

/HEADER:0 or 1

Output block headers at the

(default).

/KILL

beginning of the file, if 1
Do not output headers, if 0.

Remove the specified entr
y from the Batch input quev
e.
This switch can be used for
deleting a previously sub-

mitted request as long as

by the spooler.

/LUMIT:n

/LST

the request has not been

ified number of pages.

General

printer queve; if the switch,

Queue Operation

along with all other switches

fer all jobs of all users are

/LOG

, is omitted, all entries

listed.

Define the file that the spoo

process.

Queve Operation

started

Limit the output to the spec
List the entries in the line

File Control

lers will use to record their

The default is jobname
. LOG.,

File Control

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-150

COMMANDS

- 613
-

[PRINT command (Cont)|

Command Format (cont)
Explanation

Switch

Alter the specified parameters in the job.

/MODIFY

Category

This switch

requires that the user have access rights to the job.

Queue. Operation

can be used for altering a previously submitted request
as long as the request has not been started
by the spooler.

/NEW

Accept the request even if the file does not yet exist.

File Control

/NOTE:a

Print the specified text (a) in the output.

File Control

/NULL

Accept the request even if there is nothing in the

General

request.

/OKBINARY

No error message is given,

Print files whose extensions imply binary information.

File Control

Normally files with extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,

.REL, and .HGH will not appear in the print queue.

/OKNONE

" Do not output message if no files match the wildcard
construction.

/PHYSICAL

File Control

This is assumed at KJOB time.

. Suppress logical device name assignments for the device

File Control

specified.

/PRINT:ARROW

Convert all control characters to up~arrow format except

011-015 and 020-024.

This
is the default.

File Control

/PRINT:ASCII

Send the file to the line printer with no changes.

File Control

/PRINT:OCTAL

Perform an octal dump of the file.

File Control

Suppress all carriage=control characters except for

File Control

/PRINT:SUPPRESS

ASCII code characters LF and CR; this switch implies

the use of the /PRINT:ARROW and is equivalent to
the operator command to the spooler (SUPPRESS).

/PRIORITY :n

Assign the specified exterhal priority (n=0 to 62) to the
request.

General

The larger the number, the greater priority

the job has.

The default is 10 if no switch is given and

20 if the switch is specified without a value.

/PROTECT :nnn

Assign the protection nnn (octal) to the job.

If'the

General

switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, the standard protection is assumed.

(continued on next page)

Version 3

QUEUE

2-151

COMMANDS

- 614
-

PRINT command (Cent)

Command Format (cont)
Switch

Explanation

/REMOVE

Remove the file from the queve.

Category
This switch is valid only

with /MODIFY and can be used to remove a previously

File Control

submitted file as long as the spooler has not started processing the request.

/REPORT :code

Print the specified report within a COBOL report file.
Code can be up to 12 characters in length.

File Control

/SEQ:n

Specify a sequence number to help in identifying a request to be modified or deleted.

General

/SINCE:t

Queue only the files with creation dates after the speci-

General

fied time t where t is in the form dd-mmm-yy hhmm,

/SPACING :DOUBLE
/SPACING :SINGLE

Double~space the output lines.
Single-space the output lines.

/SPACING switch is used.

/SPACING :TRIPLE
/START:n

File Control
This is the default if no

Triple=space the output lines.
Start on the nth line of the file.

File Control

File Control
If the switch, or the

File Control

value of the switch, is omitted, the first line is assumed.

/STRS

Search for the file on all file structures in the search list
and take each occurrence. The default is to take just

File Control

the first occurrence.

/UNPRESERVED

Output the files only if they are not preserved (i.e., the
first digit of the protection code is 0).

General

This switch

avoids redundant printing.

Characteristics

The PRINT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTQCOM wkich is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-152

-615-

COMMANDS

[PRI'NT command (Contfl

Examples
+PRINT

NOTICE" TXT)

«PRINT

SYSTAT.SCM/DISP:REN/COP
:2)

Print the file DSK:NOTICE.
TXT.

Print two copies of the file DSK:SYSTAT.SCM from
the user's default area. Rename the file out of the
user's area immediately and delete it after spooling.

«PRINT *+TXT/HFAD:0/FORMS :2PART,)

Print all files in the user's area which have the
extension .TXT. Do not print file headers between
the files. Print the files on forms known to the
operator as 2PART.
Remove the request with sequence number 356 from
the LPT queve. This is accepted only if the spooler
‘has not started processing the request.

<PRINT

/SEQ:356/KILL)

+PRINT

LOADER«SAV/0KBINARY/PRINT :SUPPRESS)

Print a file known to be a binary file and suppress
all carriage control characters except CR and LF,

~ «PRINT PRGMAC+REL/PRINT:0CTAL
)

Print an octal dump of the file PRGMAC, REL.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-153

COMMANDS

- 616 -

PROTECT command 1

Function

The PROTECT command renames the specified files with the requested

of this command is similar to the R switch in PIP.

The protection of a file is indicated by three octal digits.

class of user.

protection.

The action

Each digit represents a particular

O —=NWHhOOON

The first digit represents the owner of the fi le, the second represents
users with
the same project number of the owner, and the third represents
all of the other users. Each
number in the three digit code can be one of the following
:
No access privileges
Execute the file only
Read and execute the file
Append, read, and execute the file

Upddte, append, read, and execute the file
Write, update, cppend, read, and execute the file

Rename, write, update, append, read, and execute
the file

Change protecticn, rename, write, update, append, read,
and execute the
file.

The standard protection is normally 057 which means the
owner has all privileges (0), users in
the owner's project can read and execute the file (5), and
all other users cannot access the file
(7). However, the system standard may be changed by the individua
l installations.
Command Format
PROTECT filel<nnn>, file2 <nnn>, file3 <nnn>,
...

The protection can be specified before the filename in which
case it is the default for
subsequent files until changed. The full wildcard construc
tion can be used for either
the filename or the extension.
Characteristics

The PROTECT command:
Leaves the terminal in menitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent

core image.

in the DECsystem-1040.

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-154

PIP,

- 617
-

COMMANDS

[PROTECT command (Cont)|

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4,
Examples:
+PROTECT
PRO

FORM.*<157>)

MAIN.MAC<123>,

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

<456>EQUIL-CBL:ADD.ALG)

2-155

COMMANDS

- 618
-

QUEUE command

Funcfiorg

The QUEUE command allows the user to make entries in several system queues - the input

queue for the Batch system, and the output spooling queues for the line printer, the card punch,

the paper~tape punch, and the plotter.

The QUEUE command also provides the means of ob-

taining listings of the entries in the queves.
Command Formats

QUEUE INP: jobname = control file specification, log file specification
&

To make an entry in the Batch input queve, INP:.

QUEUE output queue naime:

jobname = list of input specifications

To make an entry in an output spooling queve.

QUEUE listing file specifications/LIST = list of queue names
To obtain a listing of the entries in a queve.

The following six commands can be substituted for the various formats of the QUEUE

command:
a.

CPUNCH jobname = list of input specifications
equivalent to QUEUE CDP: jobname = list
PLOT jobname = list of input specifications
equivalent to QUEUE PLT: jobname = list
PRINT jobname = list of input specifications
equivalent to QUEUE LPT: jobname = list

PUNCH jobname = list of input specificafions]

equivalent to QUEUE PTP: jobname = list

SUBMIT jobname = control file name, log file name
equivalent to QUEUE INP: jobname = control file, log file
TPUNCH jobname =’ list of input specifications
equivalent to QUEUE PTP: jobname = list

Queue names are taken from the following list:
INP: (I:)
LPT: (L:)
CDP: (C:)

PTP: (PT:)
PLT: (PL:)

Batch input queue
line printer output queuve, default condition
card punch output queue
paper-tape punch output queue
plotter output queue

]The PUNCH command can be redefined by the installation to be equivalent to
QUEUE CDP: jobname = list.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-156

- 619 -

COMMANDS
QUEUE command (Cont)]

Command Formats (cont)

Control file specification is the file specification, plus switches and keyword parameters,
fof the control file being submitted to the Batch input queue. This file can be on any file
structure that the user has access to; the default is DSK:. The filename is required, but the
extension can be omitted; the default is .CTL. The asterisk construction is legal for the
filename or extension.

Log file specification is the file specification for the file that is to be used to record actions
taken during the execution of the control file. This file can be on any file structure in which
the user can write. The default is the same file structure in which the control file resides.
If the filename is missing, the log file is given the same name as the control file. If the
extension is omitted, it is .LOG,

Jobname is the name of the job being entered info the queve. The default jobname is the name
of the first file in the request not the first file given. These names are different when the first
file given does not yet exist.

Input specifications are the file specifications for the disk files to be processed, and the various

switches and keyword parameters that aid in constructing the queue entry.

The files can be on

any file structure that the queue processor has access to; the default is DSK:. The files can be
in any directory, provided that the user has read-access to them; the default is the user's direc~-

tory. The filename is optional; the default is * for the first filename. The default for subsequent filenames is the last filename used. . Note that the asterisk construction is legal only in
the input specifications. The extension can be omitted because each queue has a default extension for the files to be processed.

These default extensions are:

.CTL -

Batch input queue

.LPT .CDP -

line printer queuve
card punch queue

.PTP

paper-tape punch queuve

.PLT

plotter queue

The listing file specification is the description of the listing file. The default for the listing

file destination is TTY unless a name is specified. If no queue names are specified, all queues
for all the jobs of all users are listed.

Switches - Three categories of switches are provided. The first category contains the switches

that define the operation; the second contains the switches that can appear only once because
they affect the entire request; the third contains the switches specific to each file. In general,

switches that precede the filename become the default for all succeeding files. This is true
also for a device name, an extension, or a directory
name that precedes a filename.
Queue-Operation Switches - Only one of this type of switch can be placed in a command
string, because these switches define the type of queue request. This switch may appear anywhere in the command string.

Version 3

QUEUE

2-157

COMMANDS

- 620 -

LQU EUE command (Contfl

Command Formats (cont)

General Queue Switches - Each of these switches can appear only once in
a command string.
They affect the entire request, generall y in terms of scheduling. These switches
can appear

anywhere in the command string.

File-Control Switches - These switches affect the individual files in a request

adjacent to the filename in the command string.

and must be

In order to change the defaults for the rest

of the files, however, these switches must appear before a filename.

In the table of switches below, the following conventions have been used:
ALL

- Switches that can appear for both the Batch input queue and the output
queues.

INPUT

- Switches that can appear only for the Batch input queve.

LIST

- Switches that can appear only for the listing file specification.

OUTPUT - Switches that can appear only for the output queues.
Switch

/AFTER:#

Meaning

Category

Process the request after the specified time.

Queues

General

ALL

General

QUTPUT

File Control

OUTPUT

General

INPUT

t is either in the form

hhmm (time of day) or +hhmm (time
later than the current time). The re-

sulting AFTER time must be less than

the DEADLINE time. If the switch,
or the value of the switch, is omitted,
no AFTER constraints are assumed.

/BEFORE:t

Queue only the files with creation
dates before time t where t = ddmmm-yy hhmm,

/BEGIN

Start the output on the nth page,
card, or foot.

The default is to

begin output on the first unit.

/CARDS:n

Use n (decimal) as the maximum number of cards that can be punched by
the job.

If the switch is omitted, no

cards are punched.

If the switch is
given with no value, 2000 cards is
assumed as the maximum,

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-158 -

COMMANDS

- 621 -

[ QUEUE command (Cont)J

Command Formats (cont)
Meaning

/CHARGE:o]

Charge the run to the specified ac~

Queues

Category

General

ALL

File Control

OUTPUT

General

INPUT

Queue Operation

ALL

count,

Repeat the ou'rth the specified num=

/COPIES:n

~ ber of times (n must be less than 64).
The default is one copy.

If more than

63 copies are desired, two requests

must be made.

- Use n (in decimal K) as the maximum

/CORE:n

amount of core memory that the job

can use.

If the switch is omitted,

the maximum of 25K is assumed; if

the value of the switch is omitted,
a maximum of 40K is assumed.

/CREATE

Make a new entry in the specified

queuve.

This switch is the default

for the queue-operation switches.

/DEADLINE
:#

Process the request before the specified time.

ALL

General

t is either in the form

hhmm (time of .day) or +hhmm (time
later than the current time). The
resulting DEADLINE time must be

greater than the /AFTER time.
If the switch, or the value of the
switch is omitted, no DEADLINE
constraints are assumed.

/DEFER!

Make a new entry in the specified

- Queue Operation

ALL

queue, but the request is deferred

until LOGOUT,

(continued on next page)

]No’r yet implemented.
Version 3

QUEUE

2-159

COMMANDS

- 622 -

[QUEUE command (Cont)]

Command Formats (cont)

Meaning

Switch

/DEPEND:n

Category

Specifies the initial value of the

Queues

‘General

INPUT

File Control

ALL

File Control

ALL

Fite Control

ALL

Queue Operation

LIST

General

INPUT

dependency count in decimal. When

used with /MODIFY, this switch
changes the dependency count of

another job.

If n is a signed num-

ber (+ or =), that number is added
to or subtracted from the dependent

job's count. If nis not a signed
number, the dependent job's count
is changed to n.

If this switch is

omitted, no dependency is

assumed.

/DISPOSE:DELETE

Delete the file after spooling.

/DISPOSE :PRESERVE

Save the file ofter spooling.

This

is the default for files with extensions of .LST, .TMP, and if protection is Oxx, .CDP, .LPT, .PLT,

.PTP.

/DISPOSE :RENAME

Rename the file from the specified
directory immediately, remove it
from the logged--out quota, and

delete it after spooling.

This is
the default for files with exten=

sions of .LST, .TMP, and if pro=tection is Oxx,

.CDP,

.LPT,

.PLT, .PTP.

List the entries in the queue, but
do not update the queues.

There-

fore, the list may not be an up=todate listing of the queues but the

listing will be faster than with
/LIST.

/FEET:n

Use n (in decimal) as the maximum
number of feet of paper tape that

the job can punch.

If the switch is

omitted, no paper tape is punched.

If the value is omitted, the default is
10*B+20 feet, where B is the num-

ber of blocks in the request.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-160

COMMANDS

- 623
-

{QU EUE command (Cont)

Command Formats (cont)
Switch

Category

‘Mearing

Queues

/FILE:ASCII

Specify that the input file format
is to be interpreted as ASCII text.
This is assumed for all files with
extensions other than .DAT.

File Control

OUTPUT

/FILE:COBOL

Specify that the input file format
is to be interpreted as COBOL

File Control

OUTPUT

SIXBIT text.

/FILE:ELEVEN

Specify that the input file format
is to be interpreted as binary format.

File Control

OUTPUT

/FILE:F ORTRAN

Specify that the input file format
is to be interpreted as FORTRAN
ASCII text (obeys FORTRAN

File Control

OUTPUT

General

OUTPUT

File Control

OUTPUT

Queue Operation

ALL

carriage control characters).
is assumed for files with an
extension of .DAT.
/FORMS:a

This

Place the output on the named forms.
The argument to the switch must be
six alphabetic characters. Normal
forms (14 x 11) are used if this
switch is omitted. Narrow forms

are 8-1/2 x 11,
/HEADER:0 or 1

Output block headers at begin-

ning of the file if 1 (default); do
‘not output headers if O.

/HELP

Print a message giving the general
format of the command string and ex-

plains the dialogue that is entered
if the user needs additional help.
/KILL

Remove the specified entry. from the
specified queuve. This switch requires an output specification; it
does not default to LPT:* The
/KILL switch can be used for deleting a previously submitted request
as long as the request has not been
started.
'

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-161

COMMANDS

- 624 -

lQUEUE command (Contfl

Command Formats (cont)

Switch

Meaning

/LIMIT N
)

Category

Limit the output to the specified
number of pages, cards, feet, or

Queves

General

OUTPUT

Queue Operation

LIST

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

minutes.

/LIST

List the specified entries in the
queue; the default entries are those
for queues for all the jobs of all
users.

/LOG

Define the file that the spoolers will
use to record their output.

The de-

fault is jobname.LOG.

/MODIFY

Alter the specified parameters in the
'

~ Queue Operation

ALL

specified jobs; this switch requires

that the user have access rights to the

job.

It also requires a queue name; it

does not default to the LPT.

This
switch can be used to modify a pre'

viously submitted request as long as

the request has riot been started.

/NEW

Accept request even if file does not
yet exist.

File Control

ALL

File Control

OUTPUT

General

OUTPUT

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT) -

File Control

OUTPUT

This is the default for the

log file of Batch input queve.

/NOTE:a

Output the specified text (a) in the
output.

/NULL

Accept request even if there is
nothing in the request.

No error

message is given.

/ OKBINARY

Print files whose extensions include
binary information.

Normally files

with extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
-REL, and .HGH will not be in print

queues.
/OKNONE

Do not produce message if no files
match the wildcard construction.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-162

COMMANDS

- 625 -

L— QUEUE command (CoLt)I

Command Formats (cont)

Switch
/OUTPUT :n

Category

. Meaning

Cause job to terminate with a /Z:n
to KJOB (n is from O to 4).

Quevues

General

INPUT

General

INPUT

Identical to /PUNCH:x, /PRINT:x,
/TAPE:x, or /PLOT:x.

File Control

OUTPUT

Suppress logical device names for

File Control

ALL

File Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

File Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

N=0

Suppress all normal queuing
performed
at LOGOUT time.

N=1

Queue only the log file.

N=2

Queue only the log file and

spooled output (e.g., *.LPT).

N=3

Queue the log file, spooled
output, and *, LST files.

N=4

Queue the log file, spooled
output, *,LST files, and any
requests deferred to LOGOUT
fime.

/PAGE:n

‘Usen (decimal) as the maximum
number of pages of output that the
job can print. If the switch is
omitted, the maximum is 200 pages;
if only the value is omitted, a maximum of 2000 pages can be printed.

/PAPER
:x
/PHYSICAL

the specified device.

/PLOT:ASCII

Plot the file in ASCII mode. If
‘the /PLOT switch is omitted, the
file is plotted in the data mode

specified in the file.
/PLOT:BINARY

‘

Plot the file in binary mode. If
the /PLOT switch is omitted, the
file is plotted in the data mode
specified in the file.

(continued on next page)

. Version 3 QUEUE

2-163

COMMANDS

- 626
-

LQU EUE ¢command (Cont) I

Command Formats (cont)
Switch

/PLOT:IMAGE

Meaning

Category

Plot the file in image mode,

Ifthe

/PLOT switch is omitted, the file is

Queues

File Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

plotted in the data mode specified in

the file.

/PRINT:ARROW

Convert all control characters to uparrow format except 011-015 and

020-024.

/PRINT:ASCII

This is the default.

Send the file to the line printer with
no changes.

/PRINT:OCTAL

Print the file in octal.

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

/PRINT:SUPPRESS

Suppress all character-control char~

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

acters except for ASCII code charac-

ters LF and CR; this switch implies

the use of the /FRINT:ARROW,
Equivalent to operator command to
spooler (SUPPRESS).
/PRIORITY
:n

Give the specified external priority

(n =0 to 62) to the request.

~ General

ALL

General

ALL

File Control

OUTPUT (CDP)

File Control

OUTPUT (CDP)

A larger

number is greater priority. The default is 10 if no switch is given, and
20 if a switch is given without the

value.

/PROTECT :nnn

Specify a protection nnn (in octal)
for this job or queue entry. If the
switch, or the value of the switch,
is omitted, the standard protection
is assumed.

/PUNCH 026

Punch files in 026 Hollerith code.

If the /PUNCH switch is not given,
the files are punched according to
the data mode of the file.

/PUNCH:ASCII

Punch files in ASCII card code.

the /PUNCH switch is not given,

the files are punched according to
the data mode of the file.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-164

COMMANDS

- 627
-

[QUEUE command (Cont)

Command Formats (cont)
Meaning -

Switch

/PUNCH:BINARY

Category

Punch files in binary card format.

Queves

File Control

OUTPUT (CDP)

File Control

OUTPUT (CDP)

File Control

OUTPUT (CDP)

File Control

OUTPUT

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

General

INPUT

General

ALL

General

OUTPUT

the /PUNCH switch is not given,
the files are punched according to

the data mode of the file.

/PUNCH:D029

Punch files in the old DEC 029 card

code. If the /PUNCH switch is not
given, the files are punched according to the data mode of the file.

/PUNCH:IMAGE

Punch files in image mode.

If the

/PUNCH switch is not given, the
files are punched according to the

data mode of the file.

/REMOVE

Remove the file from the queue.

This switch is valid only with the

/MODIFY switch and can be used
to remove a previously submitted

- file as long as the Batch System
has not started processing the-job.

/REPORT :code

Print the specified report within a
COBOL report file.,

Code can be

up to 12 characters in length,

/RESTART:0

or 1

A value of 0 (default) means the
job cannot be requeued or restarted

by the operator after a system crash,
A message is sent to the job's log

file.

A value of 1 means the job

will be requeued or restarted. The
job should not be restartable
if there
are changes to the permanent file
directory.

/SEQ:n

Specify a sequence number to aid

in identifying a request to be modi-

fied or deleted.

/SINCE:t

Queue only the files with creation
dates after the specified time t

where t is in the form dd=mmm-yy
(continued on next page)

hhmm,

Version 3 QUEUE

2-165

COMMANDS

- 628 -

| |QUEUE command (Cont)|

Command Formats (cont)
iv!'ifch

_Afigfmihg

Category

Queves

/SPACING:DOUBLE

Double-space the output lines.

File Control

OUfil—J-T—ZEPT)

/SPACING :SINGLE

Single=space the printed lines

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Triple=space the printed lines.

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Start on n line of the file.

File Control

ALL

File Control

OUTPUT

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

General

INPUT

(default).
/SPACING:TRIPLE

/START
:n

If the

switch, or the value of the switch,
is omitted, the Batch System

starts with the first line.

/STRS

Search for the file on all structures

in the search list and takes each
occurrence.

The default is to take

just the first occurrence of the file.

/TAPE:ASCII

Punch the tape in ASCII code.

the /TAPE switch is not given, the
files are punched according to the
data mode of the file.

/TAPE:BINARY

Punch the tape in binary mode.

the /TAPE switch is not given, the
files are punched according to the
data mode of the file.

/TAPE:IBINARY

Punch the tape in image=binary

mode.

If the /TAPE switch is not

given, the files are punched according to the data mode of the file.

/TAPE:IMAGE

Punch the tape in image mode. If
the /TAPE switch is not specified,
the files are punched according to

the data mode of the file.

/TIME thhmmss

Specify the central processor time

limit for the job.

If no switch is
specified, the limit is 5 minutes; if

the switch is specified without a
value, the limit is 1 hour.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-166

COMMANDS

- 629 -

[QUEUE command (Cont)l

Command Formats (cont)

~ Meaning ‘

_ Switch

Use n (decimal minutes) as the max~

/TPLOT:n

Queves

Category

General

INPUT

imum amount of plotting time allowed

for the job. If the switch is omitied,
no plotter time is allowed; if the
value is omitted but the switch is
given, the maximum plotter time is
10 minutes.

/UNIQUE: 0 or 1

Run any number of Batch jobs under
this project-programmer number at
the same time, if 0. Runs only one
Batch job af any one time, if 1
(default).

General

INPUT

/UNPRESERVED

Output file only if not preserved.

General

OUTPUT

/ZDEFER!

Create a new entry in a queve and
defer it until LOGOUT; however,
the deferred file is zeroed first so

Queue Operation

ALL

that all previous /DEFER requests
from the current job are deleted.
Characteristics

The QUEUE command (and its associated variations):
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user’s core image.
Does not require LOGIN when only queue listings are desired.
Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

T —— g,

lNoi’ yet implemented.
Version 3 QUEUE

2-167

COMMANDS

~ 630 -

[QUEUE command (Cont) ]

Examples

Enter files FILEA. LPT and FILEB,LPT in the line-

<QUEUE FILEA,FILEB
)

printer queue under the jobname of FILEA,
<QUEUE

Enter file TEST.CTL in the Batch input queue under

INP:=TEST)

jobname TEST and log file with name TEST.LOG.

<QUEUE

Enter file MAN.CTL in the Batch input queue

IN:PAYR=MAN J)

under jobname PAYR and log file with name
MAN.LOG.

SQUEUE DSK:A«X=/LIST))

Place a queue listing of all jobs into file A.X in
the user's disk area,

+QUEUE

Place file FILEA.CTL in the Batch input queue with
the jobname FREED. An external priority of 4 and
CPU time limit of one minute and five seconds are
set for the job. The log file is named FILEA,LOG,

INP:FREED=FILEA/CREATE
/PRIORITY:4/TIME:1:5)

2QUEUE

Remove the entry corresponding to TEST.CTL from

INP:TEST=/KILL

the Batch input queve.
«QUEUE

INP:JOBNAM=/MODIFY/TIME:200)

Alter the time parameter of the entry corresponding

to JOBNAM.CTL in the Batch input queue.
s@JEUE

INP3=J0B.CTL/PAGES:500/TPLOT
220 )

Establish a limit of 500 pages and 20 minutes of
plotting on the output generated by this job.
cQWUEJUE

PLI':=JOB.PLYT/LINMIT :2@)

Version 3 QUEUE

Queve a file to PLTSPL with a limit of 20 minutes
of plotting time.

2-~168

COMMANDS

- 631 -

QUOLST program I
Function

The QUOLST program informs the user of both the amount of disk space he has used and the
amount he has left on each file structure in his search list. This program also returns the
amount of free space that the system has left for all users of the structure. Free system space
on structures not in the user's search list is not output. This information can be obtained by
typing SYSTAT /F.

The output given for each file structure consists of 1) the structure name, 2) the number of
blocks used, and 3) the numbers of blocks left in the logged=in quota, in the logged-out

quota, and on the structure.
Command Format

R QUOLST
Characteristics

The R QUOLST command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the QUOLST program, thereby destroying the user’s core image.
ExamE les

=H QUOLST)
JSER?

21,400

DSKA:
DSKB:

9
491

STr

DSKC®

USED

LEFT3CIN)>

10009

1000
9509

COUT)

(S5YS)

50089

396

100
4509

4723
4249

The user is over quota on DSKA:

<R QUOLST )
USER S

STR
DSKA:
DSKB:

DSKC s

Version 4 QUOLST

31,50

USED__
1922
1735
%)

LEFT:CIN)
-22
78265
2000

¢OUT)
-922
8265
1000

2-169

(5YS)
4215
36
6378

and must delete files before he
can logout.

COMMANDS

- 632 -

R command

Function

The R command loads a core image from the system device and starts it at the location specified

within the file (. JBSA).

It is equivalent to RUN SYS: file.ext core and is the usual way to run

a system program that does not have a direct monitor command to run it.

This command clears all of user ccre. However, programs should not count on this action and
should explicitly clear those areas of core that are expected to contain zeroes (i.e., programs
should be self-initializing). This action allows programs to be restarted by a 1C, START
sequence without having to do another R command.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record is output before the EOF
for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur consecutively. Therefore, a saved null

segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).
¢

Command Format
R file.ext core
. Arguments are the same as in the RUN command except that SYS: is used as the default

device. (In nondisk monitors, the default is the generic name that matches the system
device.) Refer to the RUN command for a discussion of the core argument.
The extension applies to the low file, not the high file.
.HGH, is assumed for the high file.

An extension of . SHR, then

If the user types an extension of .SHR or

.HGH,

the extension is treated as a null extension since .SHR and .HGH are confusing as low
file extensions.
:

Characteristics
The R command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs a system program.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

R PIPJ
*

R PIP 5)
b

2-170

- 633 -

COMMANDS

REASSIGN command |

Function

The REASSIGN command allows one job to pass a device to a second job without having the

device go through the monitor device pool (restricted or unrestricted). Both restricted and unrestricted devices can be reassigned. This command, applied to DECtapes, clears the copy of

the directory currently in core, forcing the next directory reference to read a new copy from
the tape, but does not clear the logicalTMme assignment. If a device is INITed, a
RELEASE UUO is performed unless the user issuing the command is reassigning the device to

himself.

Command Format

REASSIGN dev job

dev = the physical or logical name of the device
to be reassigned.

required.

This argument is

job = the number of the job to which the device is to be reassigned. If no job is
specified, the device is reassigned to the job issuing the command. This is useful

when the user wants to force the next directory reference to come from the tape instead
of core.

‘

A logical name which is also a physical name can be reassigned only if the job issuing the command and the job to which the device is to be reassigned have the same project-programmer
number, or the user issuing the command has operator privileges (logged-in under [1,2] or
logged-in at OPR). However, a logical name cannot be duplicated; i.e., two devices cannot have the same logical name.
)
4

Characteristics
The REASSIGN command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.

:
\
Does not operate when the device is currently transmitting data.

Restrictions

The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.

5.05 Monitor

2-171

COMMANDS

_634..

[REASSIGN command (Cont)|

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

REASSIGN LPT117)

R&assign the line printer to job 17.

REASSIGN CDP:4 )

Reassign the card punch to job 4.

- 635 -

COMMANDS

REATTA program |

Function

The REATTA program allows a user to transfer his job from one terminal to another. Unlike the
ATTACH command, REATTA does not require a password or that the terminal be of the same

type that LOGIN recognizes in order to run the job. For example, usually a [1,2] job can
run only on a local terminal. However, the REATTA program can be used to attach a [1,2]
job from a local terminal to a remote terminal.

Before reattaching his job, the user should verify that the terminal to which he is attaching is
turned on and working properly. Otherwise, it might be difficult fo retrieve the job.
Command Format

.RREATTA )
REATTA responds by asking for the new terminal name.
TYPE NEW TTY NAME:

The user answers with either the new terminal name (e.g., CTY, TTY2) or number
(e.g., 2). REATTA then responds with
FROM JOB n

on the old terminal, and
NOW ATTACHED TO JOB n

on the new terminal.
Characteristics
The R REATTA command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
,
Runs the REATTA program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Restrictions

The R REATTA com'mand is not available to Batch users.

Version 3 REATTA

2-173

COMMANDS

- 636 -

|REATTA program (Cont) |

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

«R REATTA,)

TYPE

NEW

TTY

FROM

JOB

NOW

_ATTACHED

NAME:

TTYZ27))
;appears on old terminal

JOB

;appears on TTY 27

*
—

Version 3 REATTA

2-174

- 637 -

COMMANDS

REENTER command I
Function

The REENTER command is similar to the DDT command. It copies the saved program counter

value from .JBPC into . JBOPC and starts the program af an alternate entry point specified in
.JBREN (must be set by the user or his program). If the job was executing a UUO when it was
interrupted (i.e., in exec mode but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the monitor continves the job until the UUO is completed and then traps fo the REENTER address in .JBREN.
_If the job is in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode, the trap to the REENTER address occurs immediately and . JBOPC contains the address of the UUO. If the job is in user mode, the trap also
occurs immediately. Therefore, it is always possible to continue the interrupted program after
trapping by executing a JRSTF@, JBOPC.

Command Format
REENTER

Characteristics

The REENTER command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
" Requires core.

Requires the user to have a job number.

Associated Messages Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

«REE)

3-175

COMMANDS

- 638 -

I RENAME command 1
Funcfi_g_q

The RENAME command changes the name of one or more files on disk or DECtape.

Command Format

RENAME arg
arg = a pair of file specifications separated by an equal sign, or a string of such pairs

- separated by commas:

RENAME new! = old1, new2 = old2, ...

Device or file structure names can be specified only with the new filename and remain
in effect until changed or until the end of command string is reached. “In addition, a
protection may be specified with the new filename and remains in effect only for that
filename. This command accepts the full wildcard construction.

Characteristics
The RENAME command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040,

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-176

- 639 -

- COMMANDS

|RENAME command (Cont)]

Example
<RENAME Tt1.MAC=T1.MAC)
FILES

RENAMED
:

T1.MAC

sRENAME *+.BAK=#*.MAC,)
FILES

RENAMED:

Til.MAC

. MAC
T2
T3
. MAC

sRENAME TEST.MAC<@57>=TEST«MAC)
FILES

¢
RENAMED

TEST
« MAC

Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-177

- 640 -

COMMANDS

RESOURCES command

Function

The RESOURCES command prints the names of all available devices (except TTY's and PTY's),
all file structures, and all physical units not in file structures (unless they are down or nonexistent).
Command Format
RESOURCES

Characteristics

The RESOURCES command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,
Example

,RES)

DSKA'DSKB;DSKCnDPBE,DPBi;CDRG;2|PTRGJLPTmp1'203}DTA3131405l5'70MtAgLLy21

PTPO,CDP2,PLTR,DISA

2-178

COMMANDS

- 641 -

RESTORE program I
Function

The RESTORE program enables the user to place back onto disk that which was saved on the
backup medium (magnetic tape, disk, or DECtape) with the BACKUP program. This includes
restoring the entire disk or a subset of the disk. The data to be returned to the disk is read
from the BACKUP SET file. This file contains the data that was saved with one BACKUP command. On a restore,. either the BACKUP SET file can be scanned for the desired files or the
index file can be searched to determine where the requested data is stored within the
BACKUP SET file. The index file contains the directories of all areas written on the backup
medium along with the relative block number in the BACKUP SET file where each file begins.

When the entire backup medium is being restored, the RESTORE program starts af the beginning
of the index file and continues until it reaches the last file in the index.

concerning the
During a restore, a command recovery file is created that contains information
portion of the user's command that has been executed and the portion that is remaining. This
file resides on the disk and is updated as portions of the user's request are completed. The com" mand recovery file is valuable if the system fails because only part of the restore need be
redone.

As files are restored to disk , UFDs are created for each file structurone which the user has

files.

These newly created UFDs are then entered into the MFD,

Command Format
R RESTORE

be typed by the user dfter the RESTORE program outputs
' The following commands may

a slash. These commands are stored in core and are not processed until the START
command is given. The full wildcard construction may be used to replace the filename or the extension (refer to Paragraph 1.4.2.4).
:

Command

‘BACKSPACE FILE
BACKSPACE SET

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a user file header and positions

the tape before the header.

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a BACKUP header and positions

the tape either before the header or to the beginning of the tape
if there is no BACKUP header (i.e., there is only one BACKUP set
)

on the tape).

BACKSPACE UFD

Exglanation

Backspaces the magnetic tape to a UFD header and positions the

tape immediately before the header.

(continued on next page)

~ Preliminary Information

2-179

COMMANDS

- 642 -

[RESTORE program (Cont) ]

Command Format (cont)

Command

Explanation

DELETE dev:file.ext

Deletes the named file from the designated device. This device
must be one on which a BACKUP has been done.

DENSITY MTAn:x

Sets the magnetic tape density as specified by x.

DUMP ON dev:file.ext

x=2

200 bpi

x=5

556 bpi

x =28

800 bpi

The default is the system standard defined at MONGEN time.

Dumps the contents of the BACKUP set file beginning at the present

position and ending at the next file confrol word.

errors are ignored.

All types of
The device on which a dump is to be written

may not be a listing device.

ERROR DUMP /switch

Returns to the last file control word and dumps the file if a transmission error of the type specified has occurred.

/switch = any or all of the following
/CHECK SUM
/PARITY
/READ
/WRITE

ERROR HALT /switch

Halts program execution if the type of error specified by /switch

occurs during restoring.

An asterisk is typed to the user so that he
may type further instructions. The user may want to backspace

the tape and dump it. The command recovery file is destroyed
unless simply a START command is given. In this case, the current
file is skipped and the next command in the recovery file is

executed.

/switch = any or all of the following:

/CHECK SUM
/EXCEPT
/PARITY
/READ
INDEX dev:file.ext

Reads the index file with the designated filenames from the
specified.

device

(continued on next page)

Preliminary Information

2-180

COMMANDS

- 643 -

IRESTORE program (Cont)l

Command Format (cont)
Explanation

Command

LOG dev:file.ext /switch

Writes a file on the specified device so that operations of the
RESTORE program can be recorded. The default is
DSK:RESTOR.LOG.

/switch = /ERROR
Logs only the errors. If this switch is omitted, all operations are
recorded.

PARITY dev: ODD or EVEN

Specifies the parity on magnetic tape as odd or even. The default
is odd.

RESTORE devl: [p,p] file.ext
«~dev2/switch

Writes the specified files from dev2 to the designated area on devl.
For example, if all of the disk is to be restored from the entire
BACKUP SET file, the command is

RESTORE DSK: « MTAT:

/switch = /EXCEPT file descriptor

Indicates the files that should not be restored.
REWIND dev:

SET ACCEéS dd-mmm-yy
SET CREATION dd-mmm-yy

On disk,

On magnetic tape, closes BACKUP set and rewinds tape.
closes BACKUP set.

Sets the access date to be used when restoring files. The files will

be restored only if accessed after this date.

Sets the creation date to be used when restoring files. The files

will be restored only if created after this date.

SKIP dev: FILE

Advances to next file frailer, EOF1, and positions after it.

SKIP dev: SET

Advances to next BACKUP set trailer and positions after it, or
skips to end of the tape and positions the tape between the fape
marks.

SKIP dev: UFD

Advances to next UFD header, HDR1 ,. and positions before the

START

Begins execution of a series of commands entered previously.
Commands are not processed until a START command. If there are
no commands to be processed when the START is executed, the
command recovery file is searched for an executable command.

UNLOAD dev:

Performs a rewind and unload to the magnetic tape.

Preliminary Information

‘

header.

2-181

COMMANDS

- 644 -

|RESTORE program (Confl

Command Format (cont)

The RESTORE program may be restarted by the user at any time.

The user can cancel

current requests and specify new ones with a 1C tC START sequence.

The command

recovery file is deleted with a 1C START sequence unless the next command given to
RESTORE is a START. If this is the case, the command recovery file is searched and

the RESTORE program proceeds according to the information in the file.

A 1C CONT

sequence does not delete the command recovery file; this sequence of commands com-

pletes the current requests.

Upon completion of all requests, the RESTORE program closes the log file and types an
asterisk on the user's terminal indicating its readiness for more requests. Rewinds to the
magnetic tape due to it being filled are actually rewind and unload operations to en-

sure that the magnetic tape is not overwritten. When the RESTORE program reaches
completion, the magnetic tape last written on remains in position unless a REWIND
command is given.

Characteristics

The R RESTORE command:
Runs the RESTORE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Preliminary Information

2-182

COMMANDS

- 645 -

REWIND command 1 l
Function

The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape. This command is equivalent fo

the PIP command string:

,dev: (MW)+ .
Command Format
REWIND dev:

dev: = a magnetic tape (MTAn) or a DECtape (DTAn).
Characteristics

The REWIND command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
sREW DTA4:)
SREWIND

MTAl:)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2-183

COMMANDS

- 646 -

I RUN command
Function

The RUN command loads a core image from a retrievable storage device and starts at the
location specified within the file (. JBSA).

If the program has two segments, both the low and high segments are set up. If the high file
has extension .SHR (as opposed to .HGH), the high segment will be shared. Therefore, if the
-user has RUN (or GET) the same program, 1/O will not usually be required for the high segment.

A two-segment program may have a low file extension (.LOW).

The RUN command clears all of user core. However, programs should not count on this action
and should explicitly clear those areas of core that are expected to contain zeroes (i.e., the
programs should be seif-initializing). This action allows programs to be restarted by a
1C, START sequence without having to do another RUN command.

On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record is output before the
EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur consecutively. Therefore, a saved

null segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).

Command Format
RUN dev:file.ext [proj,progl core

dev: = the logical or physical name of the device containing the core

image. The default device name is DSK:. (In nondisk monitors, the default is the generic name
that
matches the system device.)
'

file.ext = the name of the file containing the core image; .ext applies
to the low file,
not the high file. An extension of .SHR, then .HGH, is assumed for
the high file. If
the user types an extension of .SHR or .HGH, the extension is treated
as a null exten-

sion since .SHR and .HGH are confusing as low file extensions.

The default filename

is the job's current name as set by the last R, RUN, GET, SAVE, or SSAVE
command,
the last SETNAM UUO, or the last command which ran a program.

[proj,progl = the project-programmer number; required only if core
image file is located in a disk area other than the user's.

core = the amount of core to be assigned to the sum of the low and high
segments if
different from minimum core needed to load the program or from the
core argument of

the SAVE command which saved the file.

If core < the minimum low segment size, then an error message
occurs.
If core >the minimum low segment size and < the sum of the high segment

size.

If core
> the sum of the minimum low segment and the high segment

size, then the core

assignment is the size of both the low and high segments to

- 5.05 Monitor

and the min-

imum low segment size, then the core assignment is the low segment

2-184

be used.

COMMANDS

- 647 -

RUN command (Coni)l

Command Format (cont)

Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words or 512 words (a page) by
following the number with K or P, respectively. For example, 2P represents 2 pages
or 1024 words. If K'or P is not specified, K (1024 words) is assumed.

Note that on KA10 based systems (DECsystem=1040, 1050, 1055), the minimum unit
of allocation is 1024 words. Therefore, all arguments are rounded up to the nearest

multiple of 1024 words (e.g., 3P is treated as 2K on a KA10 based system).,

Since previous core is returned, MTA must have the core argument because there is no
directory telling how much core is for the low segment. Refer to Appendix D.
~

Characteristics
&,

The RUN command:

Places the terminal in user mode.
Restrictions

On systems with a large amount of core memory, the user should not specify a core argument

that forces the high segment to start higher than 400000 (i.e., a core argument of greater than
128K) unless the program's high segment is location independent. If this is done, the
ILLEGAL UUO error message is likely to occur.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

<RUN TEST.)
+RUN HISTST

(10,631

<RUN DTA3:TEST1.

5.05 Monitor

2-185

COMMANDS

- 648 -

SAVE command

Function

The SAVE command writes out a core image of the user's core area on the specified

device.

It saves any user program (two-segment sharable, one-segment nonsharable, or two~segment

nonsharable) as one or two files.

command, it will be nonsharable.

Later, when the program is loaded by a GET, R, or RUN

If DDT was loaded with the program, the entire core area is
written; if not, the area starting from zero up through the program break (as specified
by .JBFF)

is written. Refer to DECsystem~10 Monitor Calls for a descriptio
of
n the job data area locations referenced by this command.

The SAVE command should be used instead of the SSAVE command when debugging a

segment program.

two-

Refer to Appendix D for additional information on the SAVE command.

On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record
is output before the
EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore, a
saved null segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).

Command Format

SAVE dev:file.ext [proj,prog] core
dev = the device on which the core image file is to be written.
name is DSK:.

system device.
fied.

The default device

In nondisk monitors, the default is the generic name that matches the

The colon following the device name is required if a device is speci-

file.ext = the name to be assigned to the core image file. The default filename
is the
job's current name as set by the last R, RUN, GET, SAVE, or SSAVE command, the
last command which ran a program (e.g., DIRECT), or the last SETNAM UUO.
ext applies to the low file, not the high file.

assumed for the high file.

An extension of .SHR, then .HGH, is

If the user types an extension of .SHR or .HGH, the extension is treated as a null extension since .SHR and .HGH are confusing as low file
ex~
tensions.

If ext is omitted and the program has only one segment, the ext is assumed

to be .SAV.

If ext is omitted and the program has two segments, the high segment will
have extension .HGH, und the low segment will have extension . LOW.

[proj, prog] = the name of the disk area on which the core image file is to be written.
core = the amount of core in which the program is to be run. This value is stored
in
JOBDAT as the job's core area (. JBCOR) and is used by subsequent RUN and
GET
commands. This argument is optional.

Core arguments can be specffied in units of 1024 words or 512 words (a page) by

following the number with K or P respectively.
1024 words.

5.05 Monitor

For example, 2P represents 2 pages or

If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words) is assumed.

2-186

- 649 -

COMMANDS

| IEAVE command (CorE)Jfl
Command Format (cont)

minimum unit of
Note that on KA10 based systems (DECsystem-1040, 1050, 1055),upthe
nearest
the
to
rounded
are
ts
allocation is 1024 words. Therefore, all argumen
system).
based
KA10
a
on
2K
as
treated
is
multiple of 1024 words (e.g., 3P

If core is omitted, only the number of blocks required by the core image area (as ex-

plained in the RUN command descripfion) is assumed.
Characteristics

The SAVE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Requires core.

Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting data.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

.SAVE
)
J0B_SAVED

+SAVE DTA3:TEST)
JOB

SAVED

5.05 Monitor

2-187

COMMANDS

- 650 -

[SCHED command
Function

The SCHED command types out the schedule bits as set by

mand.

The schedule bits are as follows:

0
1
2

4
100
200
400

the last privileged SET SCHED com-

regular timesharing.
no further logins allowed except from CTY,

no further logins from remote terminals, and no
answering of data sets,

batch jobs only,

'
device mounts can be done without operator intervention.
unspooling allowed.

no operator coverage.

Command Format
SCHED

Characteristics

The SCHED command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,
Depends on cutput from the SET SCHED command which
is normally absent in the
DECsystem-1040,

Example
St

matp———

.SCHED)

oe04an

Regular timesharing, but no operator
coverage,

2-188

COMMANDS

- 651 -

SEND command

Function

The SEND command provides a mechanism for one-way inferconsole communication. (This
command replaces the TALK command.) A line of information is transmitted from one terminal

to another, with the identification of the terminal sending the information. With remofe communications capabilities, SEND is able to differentiate between stations.

When the SEND command is sent from the central station operator's terminal (OPR) or from a
terminal logged in as [1,2], it allows a broadcast of a line of information to all non-slaved
terminals (including remote ’rermina‘ls) in the system. This allows important information to be
dispersed, such as system shutdown or hardware problems. SEND ALL messages do not go fo

slaved terminals uniess the SET TTY NO GAG bit is set to permit reception when the terminal
o

is busy.

A busy test is made on single~destination messages before the message is sent unless the sender
or the receiver of the message is OPR or a job logged-in as [1,2]. The receiver of the message
is considered busy if his terminal is not at monitor command level. If the receiver is busy, the
sender receives the message BUSY and the information is not sent, unless the receiving terminal
has the TTY NO GAG bit set (refer to the SET TTY command). If the receiving terminal is
turned off, the information appears to have been sent, since the hardware cannot detect this
condition on hard-wired terminals.

Command Format
SEND dev: text
or

SEND JOB n text

dev = any physical terminal name (CTY included) or OPRnn. If OPRnn is specified,

the message is sent to the operator at station nn. If OPR (nn is null) is specified, the
message is sent to the operator at the user's logical station. If the terminal sending
the message is the operator's terminal, the argument may be ALL to provide the broadcast operation.

n = the job number to which the message is to be sent.

The message printed on the receiving terminal appears a3 follows:
5TTY ne = text

where

n is the TTY sending the message, and text is the message. A bell sounds on

the receiving terminal when the message is sent.

5.05 Monitor

‘

- 2-189

COMMANDS

- 652 -

ISEND command (Contfl

Characteristics
The SEND command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.

Depends on FTTALK which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Restrictions
The SEND command is not available to the Batch user.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

=SEND OPR:

PLEASE WRITE-ENABLE DTA3,)

2-190

COMMANDS

- 653 -

SET BLOCKSIZE command |
Function

The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize for the specified magnetic tape.
Command Format

SET BLOCKSIZE dev: nnnn

e
dev: = MTAn: where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive for which the blocksiz
user
The
tape.
c
~is fo be set, ora logical name associated with a physical magneti
.
must have the magnetic tape assigned to him. This argument is required

size for this
nnnn = a decimal number up to a maximum of 4095 designating theof block
d numspecifie
the
legality
the
for
done
magnetic tape. No additional checking is
ber besides the check for the maximum 4095. This argument is required,

Characteristics

The SET BLOCKSIZE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Depends on both FTSET and FTMTSET whiéh are nomally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
Examples

LSET BLOCKSIZE MTA2:3956)
LASSIGN MTAAINAMED)

MTA4 ASSIGNED

«SET BLOCKSIZE NAME:2000)

2-191

COMMANDS

- 654 -

l SET CDR command
Function

The SET CDR command sets the filename for the next card-rea
DECsystem-10 Monitor Calls).

der spooling intercept (refer to

This command is generally not needed, even when the

reader is being simulated on the disk via the spooling

user wishes to reset or change the spooling.

mand to read spooled input card decks.

mechanism.

card
It is included in case the

In addition, the Batch Controller uses this com-

Command Format

SET CDR filename

filename = one- to three-character filename to be used

on next card-reader INIT.

Characteristics
The SET CDR command:
Leaves the terminal in moniter mode.

Depends on FTSET and FTSPL which are normall

y absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Examples
<SET CDR A

-SET CDR MAS)

2-192

COMMANDS

-655 -

SET CPU command

Function

run.
The SET CPU command allows a privileged user to change the CPUs on which his job cancan
be
job
the
under
run
programs
the
whether
specify
to
It is used in a multiprocessing system
the

with
processed on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or either CPU. The job remains
(2)
given,
is
tion
specifica
specified CPU until (1) another SET CPU command with a different
issuing
by
command
CPU
SET
the
overrides
a KJOB command is issued, or (3) the user's program

the SETUUO with a different specification. [f the SETUUO overrides the command, the
SETUUO
specification given in the UUO remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT UUO or another
,
executed
is
UUO
RESET
or
EXIT
with o different specification is executed. When an
the job reverts back to the specification given in the last SET CPU command. When the user
logs in, the CPU specification is usually set to ALL. The schedulers for each CPU compete
for jobs with the ALL specification so that the load is dynamically balanced between CPUs.
Therefore, this command is generally not needed but is provided in case the user wishes to
'

change the CPU specification.

Command Formats
1.

SET CPU CPxn

adds the specified CPU to the job's CPU specification.
2.

SET CPU NO CPxn

removes the specified CPU from the job's CPU specification.

3. SET CPUALL

adds all of the CPUs to the job's CPU spec'ificationi.
|
4, SET CPU ONLY CPxn
changes the CPU specification so that it includes only the specified CPU.

names for
x = either U designating a logical name or A or1 designdfing physical
em -1077),
a KA10 processor (DECsystem-1055) or a K110 processor (DECsyst
respectively.

n = a decimal number from O to the number of processors in the system.

2-193

COMMANDS

- 656 -

[SET CPU command (Cont)

Characteristics
The SET CPU command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
‘Depends on FTSET and FTMS which are normally absent
in the
and 1070,

DECsystem-1040, 1050,

Restrictions

The privileges required for using this command are determin
ed by bit 5 (JP,CCC) of the
privilege word, .GTPRY,
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
»SET

CPU

ONLY

CFPU1)

“SET CPU CPA®
)
hd
-—

2-194

COMMANDS

- 657
-

SET DENSITY command

Function

The SET DENSITY command sets a default density for the specified magnetic tape.
Command Format
SET DENSITY dev: nnn

dev:= MTAn: where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive for which the density
is to be set, or a logical name associated with a physical magnetic tape. The user must
have the device assigned to him. This argument is required.
nnn = 200 bpi
556 bpi

800 bpi
" This argument is required,

Characteristics

The -SET DENSITY command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Depends on both FTSET and FTMTSET which are normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.
*

Examples

§e l;fi

FT DENSITY MTAS5:

556)

2-195

COMMANDS

- 658 -

| SET DSKPRI command
Function

The SET DSKPRI command allows a privileged user to set the priority for his job's disk operations

(data transfers and head positionings).

values is =3 to +3.

The standard priority is 0, and the range of permissible

This means that a priority lower than the standard can be specified, as well
as one higher than the standard. The priority specified applies to all disk I/O channels currently open or subsequently opened whose priority has not been explicitly set with a DISK. UUO

(refer to DECsystem--10 Monitor Calls).

The priority specified in the SET DSKPRI command re-

mains in effect until (1) another SET DSKPRI command is given with a different priority, (2) a

KJOB command is issued, or (3) the user's program overrides the SET DSKPRI command by

issuing a DISK.

UUO with a different priority.

Command Format

SET DSKPRI n
n = a decimal number from -3 to +3 indicating the priority to be associated with

job's disk operations.

the

When n =0, the priority is the normal timesharing priority.

Chqrccterisfics

The SET DSKPRI command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTDPRI which are normally absent in the DECsystem~1

040.

Restrictions

The privileges required for using this command are determined by bits 1 and 2 of

word, .GTPRV.
a 0 priority.

These two bits specify an octal number from 0-3.

Examples

«SET

5.05 Monitor

DSKPRI

2-196

the privilege

The user is always allowed

COMMANDS

- 659 -

SET HPQ command |
Function

The SET HPQ command allows a privileged user to place his job in a high-priority scheduler
run queue.

With this command, the user obtains a faster response and CPU time than in the

normal timesharing queves.

The job remains in the specified high~priority queue until (1)

another SET HPQ command to a different high=priority queue is given, (2) a KJOB command is

issued, or (3) the user's program overrides the SET HPQ command by issuing an HPQ UUO with
a different value.

If an HPQ UUQ overrides the command, the level specified in the UUO re-

mains in effect until a RESET or EXIT UUO or another HPQ UUO with a different value is executed.

When an EXIT or RESET UUO is executed, the job is returned to the high-priority queue

specified in the SET HPQ command.

Command Format

SET HPQ n
n = a decimal number from 0 to 15 indicating the high-priority queue to be entered.
When n = 0, the queue is the normal timesharing run queve.
to 15 are high-priority queues.

Queue numbers from 1

The number of high-priority queues is an installation

parameter and may be less than 15,

Characteristics

The SET HPQ command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTHPQ which are normally absent in the DECsystem~1040.

Restrictions

The privileges required for using this command are determined by bits 6 through 9 of the privi=
lege word, .GTPRV.

These four bits specify an octal number from 0-17, which is the highest

priority queue attainable by the user.

Examples

+SET HPQ 4),

2-197

COMMANDS

- 660 -

SET SPOOL command

Function

The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the current list of devices

being spooled for this job.
vices is simulated on disk.

Spooling is the mechanism by which 1/O to or from slow-speed deDevices capable of being spooled are: the line printer, the card

punch, the card reader, the paper tape punch, and the plotter.

Command Formats
1.

SET SPOOL devl, dev2, ...devn

adds the specified devices to the job's spool list.
2.

SET SPOOL ALL
places all spooling devices into the spool list.

SET SPOOL NONE

clears the entire spool list.
4.

SET SPOOL NO devl, dev2, ...devn
removes the specified devices from the job’s spool list.

devl, dev?, ... devn = names of one or more devices to be added to or deleted from
the current spool list.
Characteristics
The SET SPOOL command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTSPL which are normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Restrictions

To unspool devices, the job must have (1) the privilege bit set in . GTPRV, (2) bit 28 (200

octal) set in the STATES word by the operator SET SCHED command, or (3) the user must be
logged-in under [1,2].

2-198

=661 -

COMMANDS
. lSiET SPOOL command (Cclt)]

| Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

Is| -'o}

SET SPnOL CDPt)

SET SPOOL NO LPT3)

~SET SPNNI. NONE)

2-199

COMMANDS

- 662 -

I SETSRC program
Function

The SETSRC program is used to manipulate the job's search
list or the system's search list. A
search list is defined to be the order of file structures that
are to be searched whenever generic
device DSK: is explicitly or implicitly specified by the
user. This search list is originally defined by the system manager to include the file structure
s which the user can access. With the
SETSRC program, the user can alter the search list
defined for him by adding or deleting file

structures.

The search list is in the form

fs1/s/s, fs2/s/s, ..., FENCE, ...., fs9/s/s
where fs is the name of the file structure and /s is a

file structures on the left of the FENCE comprise the

generic device DSK for this job.

switch modifying the file structure.

active search list and represent the

The files to the right of the FENCE comprise the

The

passive

search list and represent file structures that were once
in the active search list. File structures
are kept in the passive search list in order that quotas
can be checked on a DISMOUNT or
KJOB command. The FENCE represents the boundar
y between the active and passive search
list.
Note that the MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands can

adding or deleting a file structure.

also change the job's search list by

Since the SETSRC program does not create a UFD
if one
does not exist, the MOUNT command should be used
to create a UFD, The name of the new

file structure is placed at the end of the search list.

Refer to the SETSRC specification in the DECsystem~10
Software Notebooks for a complete
description of the SETSRC program,
Command Format

R SETSRC

The user can then respond with any of the following command

Command
A

Explanation
Add one or more file structures to the existing search

list.

The file struc-

tures (with any switches) are appended to the beginnin

g or the end of the

active search list according to the followin
g specifications:

If no asterisk appears in the specification (e.g., fs1,
fs2) or if an

asterisk appears before the file structure names (e.g.,

the file structures are added to the end of the search

*, fs1, £s2),

list.

(continued on next page)

Version 11 SETSRC

2-200

COMMANDS

- 663 -

[Sf'ETSRC program (Coitll

Command Format (cont)

Command

Explanation

(e.ge., fsi, fs2, *), the
ws the file structureningnames
2. If the asterisk follo
of the search list.
are added to the begin

A (cont)

file structures

e of the file structures (e.g.,
3. If the asterisk appears in the middl
asterisk are added to the
fs1, *, fs2), the file structures before thestruct
ures after the asterisk
file
the
and
beginning of the search list
are.added to the.end.

in the search list, it is removed
If the specified file structure is currentlyTheref
ore, this command can be
and then added in the desired position.
used to reorder the search list.

file structures in the current
Create a new search list for this job. listAny
moved to the passive search
are
new
- search list which are not in the

list.

Create a new default directory path.

device SYS:). The user must be logge
Obtain information about the available commands.
altering the switch
Modify the cutrent search list and DSK specification by
does not add or

structure search list for
Create a new system search list (i.e., dthein file
under [1,2] to use this command.

settings for individual file structures. This command
remove file structures from the search list.

search list. They are placed on the right
Remove file structures from the
search list)-so that on subsequent LOGOUTs or

R
T
TP
TS

side of the FENCE (passive

DISMOUNTs quota limits can be checked.

Type the search list of the job.
Type the default directory path.
Type the system search list.

file
string. Switches that modify hes
used in the SETSRC commandthat
The following switches can beiatel
switc
Other
y.
modif
they
ure
struct
the file
structures must appear immed commyandafterstring
d as long as the
. The switches can be abbreviate
can appear anywhere in the
.
below
lined
under
um number of characters is
abbreviation is unique. The minim
Switches that modify file structures

/CREATE

Allow new files to be created on the file structure.

Version 11 SETSRC

2-201

(continued on next page)

COMMANDS

- 664 -

[SETSRC program (Com
Command Format (cont)

/NOCREATE

Do not allow new files to be created
on the file structure when

specified, but allow files to be
superseded.

file structure if the user specifies the

/NOWRITE

file structure name explicitly.

Do not allow writing on the file struct

ure for this job (i.e., the file

structure is read only),

/WRITE

DSK is

Files can be created on the

Allow writing on the file structure.

If no switches are specified, /CREATE
previous versions of SETSRC, /N

and /WRITE are assumed.

For compatibility with

is equivalent to /NOCREATE and

Switches that modify the directory

/R equivalent to /NOWRITE.

path (used only with the CP command)

These switches can be typed in direct
ly as commands by omitting the CP
command and the slash
(i.e., /SCAN is equivalent to
CP/SCAN),

/NOSCAN

Cancel the scan switch for the direct

/SCAN

Set the scan switch for the directory

ory path.

Switches that modify the DSK or SYS

path.

specification (used only with the C

These switches can be typed in direct

ly as commands by omitting the C

slash (i.e., NOSYS is equivalent to
M/NOSYS)

/UB: [ proj,progl

Set the job's library directory to the UFD

user's DSK specification.

and M commands)

or M command and the

[ proj,progl and add it to the

This means that if o file is not

found in the
user's directories in his search list,
the library directory will then be
searched for the file.

/NOLB

Remove the library directory from

/NOSYS

Remove the SYS specification from

/NONEW

Remove the [ 1, 5] directory from

/SYS

Add the SYS specification to the

the user's DSK specification,
the user's DSK specification.

the user's SYS specification.

user's DSK specification. This means
that
user's directories in his search list
or in his
library directory (if /LIB: [ Proj,
progl has been specified), the syste
m
directory [ 1,4] will then be
searched for the file.
if a file cannot be found in the

/NEW

Add the directory [ 1,5] to the
user's SYS specification. This
means that
when the system directory is searc
hed, the directory [ 1,5] will be
searched
sefore
the directory [ 1,4].

Characteristics
The R SETSRC commend

Places the terminal in user mode

Runs the SETSRC program, there
by destroying the user's

Version 11 SETSRC

2-202

core image.

COMMANDS

- 665 -

SETSRC program (Cont){,

Restrictions

path
The user must be logged in under [1,2] to create a new system search list. The directory
FTSFD
if
only
and
monitors.
later
and
5.04
the
with
commands (CP and TP) are meaningful only
is on,

Examples

)
+R SETSRC

x1 )

The user's search list is defined as DSKB.

DSKB:s» FENCE
*A

DSKA?S

Add DSKA to the end of the search list.

pskat)

The user's search list is defined as DSKB, DSKA,

DOKB T DSKAS L FENCE
*A

)
DSKCss*

Add DSKC to the beginning of the search list.

1)
AS
,FENCE
DSKC$sDSKB$sDSK
*n

DSKA:)

Remove DSKA from the search list,

DSKC:,DSKB:,FENCESDSKAS

The user's search list is defined as DSKC, DSKB,

*V D.sKB:/Nowr{ITh:)

Do not allow writing on DSKB,

Set the user’s library directory to [27,500] and add

] P
/LIBILRT,500

it to the user's DSK specification.

Add SYS: to the user's DSK specification.

)
*5Y5

7LIB:[27s50013/5Y5

¢
DSKC:sDSKB? /NOWR ITEsFENCES»DSKA

The user's DSK and SYS specifications are first
followed by the user's search list.

:'1‘.5)

KB 3 »FENCE
s DSKC
DSKA:>DS

Version 11 SETSR_C

The system search list is defined as DSKA, DSKB,
DSKC.

2-203

COMMANDS

- 666 -

SET TIME command

Function

The SET TIME command sets a central processor time limit for a
job. When the time limit is
reached, the job is stopped and a message is typed. A timeshari
ng job may be continued by

typing CONT, but no time limit is in effect unless it is reset.

tinuved.

A Batch job cannot be con-

Command Format
SET TIME n
n = number of seconds of central processor time to which
the job is limited.
ment of 0 cancels the time remaining.

An argu-

Characteristics

The SET TIME command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends cn both FTSET and FTTLIM which are normally absent

in the DECsystem=1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,

Examples
«MAKE

*I10

LOOP,Fa)

Create a program with an indefinite

loop.

CONTINUE
GNT2

END

$¢
*EXSS

«TYPE

LNOP.Fe)

CONTINUE

Type the program.

GOT0 17
END

(continued on next page)

2-204

COMMANDS

- 667 -

EET TIME command (Contfl

Examples (cont)

Compile and load the program,

LLOAD LOOPR)
FORTRANS

LCOP.F4

LOOP 2K CNRE

CEXIT

JSET TIME 5)
LTIME)
3,50

Set the time limit to 5 seconds.
Clear the incremental run time, so that the
SET TIME command can be checked.

5,57

KILO=CORE=SECE32

Start the loop. -

LSTART)

%TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED

As expected, the time limit was exceeded.

g.00 %
. TIME

10,57

KTL0-CORE-SEC267
®
ey

2-205

COMMANDS

- 668 -

SET TTY or TTY command

Function

The SET TTY command (or TTY command) declares properties
command is typed to the scanner service.

of the terminal line on which the

With hardwired TTYs, the system manager can set the

default conditions, so that this command is usually not needed.
However, the user is likely to
use this command on data sets, where the terminal cannot
be predicted.

Command Formats
1.

SET TTY NO word
equivalent to TTY NO word

SET TTY word
equivalent to TTY word

NO = the argument that determines whether a bit is to be set

ment is optional .

or cleared.

word = the various words representing bits that may be modified

words are as follows:

SET TTY ALTMODE

SET TTY NO ALTMODE

This argu-~

by this command.

The

Converts the ALTmode codes of 175 and 176 to the
ASCII standard escape character 033.
Restores the individual identity of the codes 175

and 176.

SET TTY BLANKS

Restores multiple carriage return=line feeds and

form feeds.

SET TTY NO BLANKS

Suppresses blank lines (consecutive carriage return-

line feeds after the first) and outputs form feeds

and vertical tabs as 2 carriage return-line feeds.

This is used for the display terminal in order to

prevent the output from moving up off the screen.
SET TTY CRLF

Restores the carriage return.

SETTTY NO CRLF

The carriage return normally output at the end of

line exceeding the carriage width is suppressed.

SET TTY ECHO

Restores the normal echoing of each character
typed in.

(continued on next page)

5.05 Monitor

2-206

COMMANDS

- 669 -

[§Ifi' TTY command (Con_t)_l

Command Formats (cont)

The terminal line has local copy and the computer

SET TTY NO ECHO

should not echo characters typed in.

al. The
The filler class n is assigned to this termin377
octal).

SET TTY FILL n

filler character is always DEL RUBOUT,

No fillers are supplied for image mode output.

Equivalent to TTY FILL 0. Fillers for output and

SET TTY NO FILL

echoing are determined from the following:

Octal

Character

Name
BS
- HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
XON
TAPE
XOFF
NTAP

e
010
011
012
013
014
015
021
022
023
024

Number of Fillers for Filler Class

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1or?2

1
2
12
lor2
T
1
1
1

3
2
6
6
lTor2 | lor2f
6
6
6
6
21
21
20ord | 2or 4T
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1

+1 if 0-3 spaces fo tab stop; 2 if4-7 spaces to tab stop.the line is

+11 or 2 if CR is typed; 2 or 4 if CR is supplied because
too long.

SET TTY FORM

VT
This terminal has hardware FORM (PAGE) and
'

:
|
SET TTY NO FORM

(vertical tab) characters.
The monitor sends eight line feeds for a FORM and

SET TTY GAG

The SEND command cannot be received at this ter-

four line feeds for a VT.

minal unless the terminal is at command level
(initial state).

SET TTY NO GAG

The SEND command can be received at this termi-

SET TTY LC

The translation of lower-case characters input to

nal even though it is not at command level.
upper case is suppressed.

(continued on next page)

2-207

COMMANDS

- 670
-

IET TTY command (Contfl

Command Formats (cont)

SET TTY MO LC

The monitor translates lower-case charac

ters to

upper case as they are received.

In either case,

the echo sent back by the monitor matche
s the case
of the characters after translation. By looking
at

the printout, the user can determine what transla
~

tion was performed by the monito

SET TTY PAGE

The user has the ability to temporarily suspen

tem typeout without losing it.

d sys-

The XOFF key (1S)

suspends the typeout, and the XON
key (1Q) re~
The XOFF and XON keys are not echoe
d
and are not sent to the user's program. This
com=
mand is useful for display terminals where
the user
stores it.

may want to read a page of text
before it disappears

from the screen. Note that this preemp
ts the use
of 15 and 1Q for reading paper tape
(see

SET TTY TAPE),

SET TTY NO PAGE

SET TTY SLAVE

The typeout control ability of the XOFF and
XON
keys is disabled. The current interpretation
of these
keys depends on the last SET TTY TAPE comman
d,
The terminal becomes slaved, i.e., no comman
ds

may be typed on the terminal, and the
terminal may
be ASSIGNed by another user. The
user can slave
only his own terminal and must contact the
operator
in order to unslave it,

SETTTY TAB

This terminal has hardware TAB stops every

columns.

SET TTY NO TAB
SET TTY TAPE

eight

The monitor simulates TAB output from
programs by
sending the necessary number of SPACE charact
ers.
The XON key (1Q) causes the terminal

paper tape.

to read

The XOFF key (1S) causes the term-

inal to stop reading paper tape.
SET TTY NO TAPE

The XON key (1Q) and the XOFF key (1S) have

special paper tape function.

PAGE function.

SET TTY WIDTH n

The carriage width (the point at which a free
car-

riage return is inserted) is set to n.

The range of n

is 17 (two TAB stops) to 200 decimal.

5.05 Monitor

They may have a

2-208

=671 -

COMMANDS

l SET TTY command (Cont)J
rd

Characteristics

The SET TTY command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN,

Depends on FTSET which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040. However, the
TTY command format can always be used.

2-209

COMMANDS

- 672 -

ISIET WATCH command
Function

The SET WATCH command sets the system to print incremental job statistics
automatically.
This command provides the user with a tool for measuring the performance of
his programs.
Command Formats
1.

S‘ET WATCH argy, aArg,, ..., Argg

prints the specified WATCH statistics.

SET WATCH ALL
prints all the WATCH statistics,

SET WATCH NONE

eliminates the printing of all WATCH statistics.

SET WATCH NO argy, argy, .. .,afgs
eliminates the printing of the specified WATCH statistics.
The following arguments enakle printing whenever a monitor command
console from monitor to user mode.

switches the

arg = DAY prints the time of day, as [HH:MM.SS]

arg = VERSION prints the version of the program in standard format
(refer to the VERSION command).

The following arguments enable printing whenever the console is returned

to monitor

mode via the 1C, EXIT, HALT, ERROR IN JOB n, or DEVICE
xxx OPR zz ACTION
REQUESTED messages.
arg = READ prints the incremental number of disk

blocks read modulo 4096.

arg = RUN prints the incremental run time.

arg = WAIT prints the wait time (time elapsed since
the user started or contin-

ued the program).

arg = WRITE prints the incremental number of disk
blocks written modulo 4096.

2-210

COMMANDS

- 673 -

rSET WATCH command (Con_t)J

Command Formats (cont)

ied in any order. Statistics are not
Any combination of the arguments may be specifsuch
ASSIGN or PJOB. When a
printed for commands that do not run programs, cs ofaswhich
he has notified the system
user logs in, his job is set to WATCH the statisti
in ACCT.SYS.
kept
is
WATCH
to
cs
manager. The information on what statisti
Therefore, a user.
The order of the error message is the same as the order of output.
can find these out
cs
statisti
the
of
cance
who forgets either the argument or the signifi
each statistic,
n
betwee
typed
always
is
space
ngle
by examining the message. A si
whether the statistic appears or not; therefore, it is possible to tell which statistics
are being typed.

NOTE

Enabling WATCH output- interacts with the incremental

data typed by the TIME and DSK commands.
Characteristics

The SET WATCH command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Depends on FTSET and FTWATCH which are normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.

2-211

COMMANDS

- 674 -

EET WATCH command (Cont)]

Examples
1.

+SET

WATCH

2ARGS

AKE:

P
DAY,»RUNsWAIT,KE

AD,WKITE
ION»AL
s»VE
L s NONE
KS

=SET

WATCH)

2ARGS

ART:

*SET

WATCH

DAY, RUN,WAITKEAD

»WRITE
ION»>A
»VE
LL » NONE
KS

DAY

KUN

457

243)

WAIT

KFAD

WRITE

PIP)

[22:36:19)

*1C
2.

(0«10

2.95

sSET

WATCH

VERSION

DAY)

TFCO)

[9:44:30]3

(S:TECO

22(64)

*tC

2-212

- 675 -

COMMANDS

SKIP command 1 l
Function

The SKIP command spaces a magnetic tape forward a specified number of files or records or to
the logical end of tape. This command, depending on its arguments, is equivalent to the
following PIP command strings:

MTAn: (M #nA) «
MTAn: (M #nD) «
MTAn: (M #nT)
Command Formats

SKIP MTAn: x FILES
advances forward x files.

SKIP MTAn: x RECORDS
advances forvyard X records.

SKIP MTAn: EOT

advances forward to the logical end of tape.

The words FILES, RECORDS, and EOT can be abbreviated to F, R, and E, respectively.
Characteristics

The SKIP command:

Leaves the terminalin monitor mode.

Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX Wthh is normally absentin the DECsystem-104O
Associated Messages

Refer to Chqpfér 4.

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2-213

COMMANDS

- 676 -

LSKIP command (Contq

Examples
<SKIP

VMTAQ:

FILES
)

sSKIP

MTAL:

EOT)

SKIP

MTAZ2:

KFCORDS)

Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2-214

- 677 -

COMMANDS

SSAVE command I
Function

segment, if present,
The SSAVE command is the same as the SAVE command except that the high
sharability, the
this
indicate
To
.
will be sharable when it is loaded with the GET command
GET will cause
nt
subseque
A
.HGH,
of
instead
.SHR
n
high segment is written with extensio
program does
the
if
given
not
is
message
error
an
Because
.
sharable
be
to
the high segment
without having
programs
system
not have a high segment, a user can use this command to save
to know which are sharable.

is output before the
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record
Therefore, a saved
ively.
consecut
occur
cannot
EOFs
two
that
so
EOF for the missing segment

null segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).

the proThe SAVE command rather than the SSAVE command, should be used when debuggiizeng the
reinitial
not
does
command
SSAVE
a
after
command
GET
gram. This is because a
d or the DDT
original high segment from the file after the user modifies it with the D comman
.
program. Refer to Appendix D for more information on the SSAVE command

Command Format

SSAVE devfile.ext [proj,prog] core
Arguments and defaults are the same as in the SAVE command.

Characteristics

The SSAVE command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Requires core.

Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting data,

- Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

LSSAVE DSK:TESTW

JOB SAVED

(continued on next page)

2-215

COMMANDS

- 678 -

|SSAVE command (Cont)]

Example (Cont)

+LOAD FILEL
MACRO:

FILE1

Compile and load program.

LOAD ING

LOADER

CORE

EXIT

+SSAVE )
JOB

Save a sharable copy.

SAVED

+GET,)
JOB

SETUP

The filename is taken from

the routine that contained the starting address.

Get a sharable copy.

2-216

COMMANDS

=679 -

START command l
Function

sly loaded with the GET comThe START command begins execution of a program either ispreviou
from . JBPC to .JBOPC.
copied
counter
mand or interrupted (e.g., 1C). The old program , the address supplie
d in the file (. JBSA)

An explicit start address is optional, and, if omitted
the job was executing a UUO when interrupted
‘s used. If an address argument is specified and wait
or SLEEP mode), the monitor sets a status
(i.e., it was in exec mode but not in TTY input
was interrupted before trapping to
bit (UTRP) and continues the job at the location at which isit comple
ted, the monitor clears the

ing
the specified START address. When the UUO process
and then traps to the START address.
UUO,
the
ng
followi
address
the
to
JBOPC
.
sets
bit,
status
m occurs immediately, and
the
to
trap
the
If the job is in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode, job is in userprogra
mode, the trap also occurs im_ JBOPC ‘contains the address of the UUO. If the

mediately.

Command Format
START adr

than the location specified
odr = the address at which execution is to begin if otheradr
is not specified, the address
If
l,
optiona
is
t
argumen
This
.
within the file (.JBSA)
comes from .JBSA. A starting address of 0 may be specified.

Characteristics

The START conj\ma nd:
Places the terminal in user mode.

Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting data.

Requires core.

Requires LOGIN if an address argument is specified.

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Example

)
«START

2-217

COMMANDS

- 680 -

I SUBMIT command
Function

The SUBMIT command is used to place entries info the input queue
command is equivalent to the following form
of the

for the Batch system. This

QUEUE command:

QUEUE INP: jobname = control file, log
file
Command Format
SUBMIT jobname = control file, log file

jobname = name of the job being entered into
control file = name of the control file.

This file contains all monitor-level and user-

level commands for processing by the Batch

log file = name of the log file.
processing of the job.

the queue.

Controller (BATCON).

This file is used by the Batch Controller to record
‘

its

Only the two files mentioned above can be specifie
d in a request to the Batch input queve.
The name of the control file is required; the log
file name is optional and, if omitted, is taken
from the control file. If the jobname is ommited,
it is the name of the first file in the request,
not the name of the first file given. If an extensi
on is omitted, the following are assumed:
.CTL for the centrol file
.LOG for the log file.

Three categories of switches can be used in
1.

the command string:

Queve-operation - Only one of these switch

string because they define the type of

anywhere in the command string.

es can be placed in the command

queue request.

General ~ Each switch in this category can
appear only once in the command string
because they affect the entire request. The
switch used can appear anywhere in
the commard string.

File control ~ Any number of these switches

cause they are specific to individual files

must be adjacent to the file to which

2-218

can appear in the command string be-

within the request.

if applies.

name, it becomes the default for subseq
uent

Version 3 QUEUE

The switch used can appear

files.

The switch used
If the switch precedes the file-

COMMANDS

- 681 -

laJBMlT command (Cont)

Command Format (cont)

The following switches can be used with the SUBMIT command.
SwitcH.
/AFTER:tt

Explanation

Process the request after the specified time; tf is either
‘n the form of hhmm. (time.of day) or +hhmm (time later

Category

General

than the current time). The resulting AFTER time must

be less than the DEADLINE time. If the switch, or the
value of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constraints
are assumed.

/CARDS:n

/CORE:n

Use n (decimal) as the maximum number of cards that
¢an be punched by the job. If the switch is omitted,
no cards are punched. If the switch is given with no

value, 2000 cards is assumed as the default.
Usen (decimal K) as the maximum amount of core
memory that the job. can use. If the switch is omit=
ted, 25K is the maximum. If the switch is specified,
but the value is omitted, the default maximum is

General

40K.

/CREATE

/DEADLINE:tt

/DEPEND:n

Make a new entry into the Batch input queue. This
switch is the default for the queue-operation switches.
Process the request before the specified time; it is
either in the form hhmm (time of day) or +hhmm
(time later than the current time). The resulting
DEADLINE time must be greater than the AFTER
time. If the switch, or the value of the swifch, is’
omitted, no DEADLINE constraints are assumed.

- Specify the initial value of the dependency count

(in decimal). When used with /MODIFY, this
switch changes the dependency count of another
job. If n is a signed number (+ or -), that number
is added to or subtracted from the dependent job's
count. If nis not a signed number, the dependent
job's count is changed fo n. If this switch is omif-

Queue Operation
General

General

ted, no dependency is assumed.

/DISPOSE:DELETE

Delete the file after processing.

File Control

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-219

COMMANDS

- 682 -

JEUBMIT command (Cont)]

Command Format (cont)
Switch

/DISPOSE:PRESERVE

Explanation

Save the file after processing.

Category

This is the default for

all files except those with extensions .TMP,

.LST,

.CDP, .LPT, .PLT, and .PTP.

/DISPOSE :RENAME

Rename the file from the specified directory imme-

File Control

List the entries in the input queue, but do

Queue Operation

diately, remove it from the logged-out quota,
and
delete it after processing. This is the default
for
files with extensions . TMP, . LST, .CDP,
.LPT,
.FLT, and . PTP,

File Control

the queves.

not update

Therefore, the list may not be an up-to-

date listing, but the listing will be
faster than with

/LIST.
/FEET:n

Use n (decimal) as the maximum number of

paper tape that the job can punch.

feet of

General

If the switch is

omitted, no paper tape is punched.
If the value is
omitted, the default is 10*B+20 feet, where
B s

the rumber of blocks in the request.

/KILL

Remcve the specified entry from the Batch

queue.

input

This switch can be used for deleting

previously-submitted request as long

Queue Operation

as the request

has not been started by the Batch Contro

llet.

/UST

List the entries in the input queue; the defaul

t is all

Queue Operation

Alter the specified parameters in the job.

This switch

Queuve Operation

entries for all jobs of all users.

/MODIFY

requires that the user have access rights

to the job.

It can be used for altering a previously
submitted re~
quest as long as the request has not been
started by the
Batch Controller.

/NEW

Accept the request although the file does

exist.

This is the default for the log file.

placing this switch with the control file,

can submit his job and then create the

not yet
When

File Control

the user

control file.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-220

COMMANDS

- 683 -

l—SEBMIT command (Cofll

Command Format (cont)

Switch

/OUTPUT:n

Explanation

Category

Cause job to terminate with a /Z:mn to KJOB (nis
N=0

Suppress all normal queving performed af

N=1

Queue only the log file.

N=3

Queue the log file, spooled output, and

N=4

Queue the log file, spooled output,
+.LST files, and any requests deferred o
'
LOGOUT time (default). .

N=2

LOGOUT time.

Queue only the log file and spooled output (e.g., *.LPT).

*,LST files.

Use n (decimal) as the maximum number of pages of

/PAGE:n

General

from O to 4).

output that the job can print. If the entire switch .
is omitted, the maximum is 200 pages; if only the

General

value is omitted, the maximum is 2000 pages. -

/PHYSICAL

Suppress logical device name assignments for the

File Control

/PRIORITY n

Assign the specified external priority (n=0 fo 62)

General

device specified.

)

to the request. The larger the number, the greater

priority the job has. The default is 10 if no switch
is given and 20 if the switch is specified without a
value.

/PROTECT :nnn

Assign the protection nnn (octal) to the job. If the
switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, the

General

standard protection is assumed.

/RESTART:0 or 1

A value, of 0 means the job is not requeued or restarted by the Batch Controller after a system crash

General

(default). A message is sent to the job's log file.
A value of 1 means the job is restarted by the Batch
Controller.

/SEQ:n

‘

ying
Specify
b a sequence number to help P in identifY
P

General

a request to be modified or deleted.

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE.

2-221

COMMANDS

- 684 -

lilJBMIT command (Confl
v

Command Format (cont)
Switch

/START:n

Explanation

Begin on the nth line of the control file.

Category

If the

File Control

switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted
, the
Batch Controller starts with the first line.

/START mxxx

Start at the statement labelled xxx (up to 5 characte

rs)

of the control file.

/TIME thhmmss

Specify the central processor time limit for the job.
no switch is specified, the limit is 5 minutes
; if the

File Control

General

switch is given without a value, the limitis 1 hour.

/TPLOT:n

Use n (decimal minutes) as the maximum amount
of
plotting time allowed for the job. If the switch is

General

omitted, no plotter time is allowed; if the value is
omitted, but the switch is given, the maximum is
10 minutes.

UNIQUE:0 or 1

Run any Y number of Batch jobs under this
l

programmer number at the same time,

projectproj

if 0.

General

Run

only one Batch job at any one time, if 1 (default
).,
Characteristics
The SUBMIT command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program.
Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absent

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Version 3 QUEUE

2222

‘

in the DECsystem-1040.

COMMANDS

- 685 -

rSUBMlT command (Coni)J

Examples

LSUBMIT USRJOB=CONTRL,LOGFIL)

OO\IO~§J'I-!=-(A)I\)—I

The defaults are as follows:

control file name is CONTRL.CTL
log file name is LOGFIL.LOG
no cards punched (/CARDS:0)

maximum core of 25K (/CORE:25)
no dependency (/DEPEND:0)

control and log files are saved after spooling (/DISPOSE:PRESERVE)
,

no paper tape punched (/FEET:0)

all line printer output is spooled with the maximym pages being 200
(/OUTPUT:4, /PAGE:200)
priority is 10 (/PRIORITY:10)

10. standard protection is assumed (/PROTECT:nnn (standard))
11. job is not restarted after a crash (/RESTART:0)
12. control file is begun on the first line (/START:1)
13. maximum CPU time is 5 minutes (/TIME:0:05)
14.

15.

no plotter time allowed (/TPLOT:0)

only one job at a time under a given project-programmer number is run
:

(UNIQUE:1)

LSUBMIT USRJOR/MODIFY/FEETE35/CORE)

number of feet of paper
Modify the original request to include 35 feet as the maximum mamount
of core that the
tape that the job can punch and 40K of core as the maximu
job can use. This command is valid only if the job has not been started yet by the
Batch system.

_SURMIT USRJOB=/KILL)
Kill the job only if it has not been started by the Batch system,

Version 3 QUEUE ’

2-223

COMMANDS

- 686 -

SYSTAT command

Function

The SYSTAT command runs a system program which prints
This information allows a user to determine the load on

status information about the system.
the system before logging-in.

To write the output on the disk as a file with name SYSTAT.

TXT, assign device DSK with

logical name SYSTAT.

The SYSTAT command types the status of the system:

system name, time of day, date, uptime,

percent null time (idle plus lost time), number of
jobs in use.

[t types the status of each job logged-in: job number;
project-programmer number (**,
** =
detached, [OPR] = the project-programmer number
of the operator, [SELF] = user's project-

programmer number); terminal line number (CTY
= console terminal, DET = detached, Pn = PTY

number); program name being run; program size; job

Monitor Calls); run tirme since logged-in.

and swapped state (refer to DECsystem-10
.

It types the status of high segme:nfs being used: name (PRIV
= nonsharable, OBS = superseded);

device or file structure riame from which the segment
came; directory name (**, ** if detached);
size (SW = swapped out, SWF = swapped out and fragment
ed, F = in core and fragmented on
disk, SPY = user is executing the SPY UUO); number
of users in core or on the disk.

The command types swapping space used, virtual core
used, swapping ratio, active swapping
ratio, virtual core saved by sharing, average
job size.

It types status of busy devices: device name, job
number, how device is assigned (AS =
ASSIGN command, INIT = INIT or OPEN UUO,
AS+INIT = both ways).
It types system file structures:

free blocks, mount count, single-access job.

It types remote stations:

number of station ; status of station.

It types dataset control:

number of the TTY, status of TTY.

Version 467 SYSTAT

2-224

COMMANDS

- 687 -

EYSTAT cohmand (Contfl

Command Format

SYSTAT arg
arg= one or more single letters (in any order) used to type any subset of the SYSTAT
output. This argument is optional. The following message, produced by fypmg
SYSTAT /H, lists the various arguments to the SYSTAT command.
SYSTAT/H)

V467(5)

SYSTAT

TYPE
X —4NITTOZCOLCIImMmOW

TYPE

INSTRUCTIONS:

"SYS<CKET+>" TG LIST THE ENTIKE STATUS,

'"SYS " FCLLOWED BY ONE OK MORE LETTERS AS FOLLOWS-STATUS

BUSY

DEVICE

FILE

STRUCTURE
MESSAGE

DORNMANT SEGMENT STATUS
NON=-DISK ERROR REPORT

THIS

JOR STATLUS
OUTPUT TO LPT

STATUS

NON-JOB

STATUS
'

(ALL BUT

OTHER SYSTEM STATUS
DISK PERFORMANCE

STATION STATUS

KEMOTE
SHORT

JOB

DATASET

READ

STATUS

DSK:CRASHXPN

NNN PRINTS JUST JOB NNN (. DOES THIS JOB)

[(P»PN] PRINTS JUST JORS WITH THAT PKOJ-PROG (P AND/OK PN MAY BE %)

“#NNN PRINTS

JUST

JOBS FROM TEKMINAL NNN

(ALSOs> C=CTYs» PNN=PTYNNs» TNN=TTYNN».-THIS TTY)

Characteristics

The SYSTAT command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the SYSTAT program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Does not require LOGIN.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Version 467 SYSTAT

2-225

COMMANDS

- 688 -

lSYSTAT command (Cont)]

Examples
25Y5TAL)
STATUS

uPlIbk

7300:59,

534

JUBS

bt e b
o
s
s b
DO IS »= 0= b

LA NOUDLURN=SE
LR
UT LW
-

JuB

B50400-05

JSE

#40. ATl

1U3Z
OuT

wHO

LINE#

16:15:17

NULL

TINME

64.

wWHAT

1¥5%Z

LOGGED

11-APR-72

IDLE

IN»

SIZECK)

LOST

DFETACBHED

STATE

RUN

TINME

{oPr
3]

LET

DAENMON

S+SPY

49 564

131

TECO

243

Lornl

OPSER

1+3

LOrR
]

3:43

UNMOUNT

243

2,111

338

Plp

1 +4

274,1431

609

CUBDDT

14+4

20
7

26
12¢15

LOPr
)

CTvy

1 +4

16,35

SWw

FDS5YS

1:37

347s12456

PIP

1+4

27151131

QAUEUE

2+4

0P
]

BATCON

2+3

RrN

271,701

SEEK

2+8

33721113

114

KJon

1+3

40 564

150

[ECO

2+3

4237

21:45
5:08

122,216

124

KJUB

1+4

165107

SYSTAT

6+5PY

142,1243

TECO

2+3

146,500

1:09

112

TECO

243

2:09

1477

EDITS

2+6

155

TECO

2+3

LPTSPL

2492353

£ornl

1:24
)
13:47

345,1417

EDITS

2+6

topPnr
]

LPTSPL

PTPEPL

243

OPSER

143

1:38

Lorrl

(0PR]

Lornl

reé6

oPnCMO

245

(0P

OPRONMNO

245

137

UMOUNT

2+3

36051436

43
18:39

1:25

1:31
1:021

125,207

EDITS

2+6

119,1412

127

TECC

2+3

492 5570

PIpP

1+4

405,505

1:26

PIp

1+4

40,633

‘SW

1:13

146

TECO

2+3

2117701

SEEK

2+8

13,20

142

13+34

4135521

TECO

2+3

4025570

P17

DCTDE

1
7

5:33

33:14
20
5w

(continued on next page)

Version 467 SYSTAT

2-226

COMMANDS

- 689 -

I SYSTAT command (Cont4)|

Examples (cont)

38
39
49
41
42

43
44

122,1202
60 560
406,104
402,514
271,701

1451145
1451145

4%
46
49
48
49
50
51
52
53

2,5
11,176
10,33
1034
255
110,1367
34051107
2,5

HIGH

SEGMENTS:

122,1007

136
153
35
36
30

EDITS
TECO
PLEASE
SPACE
RAFCO"

2+6
2+3
1
2
6+8

TI SW
TO
SL SW
TI Sw
Tl

135
144
DET
6
13
157
26
7
122

QUEUE
COMPCT
UMOUNTTECO
SYSTAT
TECO
AID
SYSTAT
TECO

343
S
243
4+3
6+SPY
2+3
249
4
2+3

CB Sw
TO
TO SwW
T1
RN
TI Sw
RN SW
CB
TI SW

P10
11

UMOUNT
DIRECT

"PNN COrnESPONDS TO TTY172+NN

OWNER

DSKB
OPSEKR
DIRECT DSKB
GuMANGA DSKB
DSKB
PIP
DSKB
TECO

5YS
5YS
SYS
SYS
SYS

3 SW
3 S
3
Sw
4
3

(PrRIVY
QUEUE
LIBUL
OMOUNT

JOB 35
SYS
SYS
SYS

34
4
8
5 SW

DSKB

PTPSPL
UMOUNT
KJOB
AID

DSKB
DS KB
DSKB
DSKB
DSKB
DSKB
DSKB

5YS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

6 SWw

3 SW
3
3 Sw
SW
9

SWAPP ING SPACE USEDY= 1567635

SL SW
tC SwW

2:11
45

2:16

3:02
.

HIGHCK) USERS

PrOGRAN DEVICE

EDITS

243
1+3

6233

2
1
2
5
12

1
2
4
2
1
4
1
1

25%

VIRT. CORE USED = 254/635 = 40%
D54/144 = 1.8
SWAPPING RATIO
757144 = B+5
ACTIVE SWAPPING RATIO
VIRT. CORE SAVED BY SHARING = 115/0115+254)

AVERAGE JOB SIZE = 163/53 = 3.1 + 206/53 =

3.9

TOTAL

369/53

7.0

(continued on next page)

Version 467 SYSTAT

2-227

COMMANDS

- 690 -

liYSTAT command (Con?)l

E(_gme les (cont)
BUSY

DEVICES:

DEVICE

JOB

LPTY

LPT1

WHY
©

AS+INIT
AS+INIT

DTAl

DrA2

DTA3

DIA4

DTA6

DIAY

AS+INIT

MIAl

AS+INIT

MTA2

MTA3

PTPO

INIT

bDBS

DISK

SYSTENM

FILE

STHUCTURES:

NAME

FHREE

DSKA

705

DSKB

17220

MOUNT

DSKC

35895

DIAG

2835

TOTAL

FrEE

LOGICAL

56655

DATASET

CONTROL

TTY#

STATUS

USE

USE
USE

USE

« KJOB

(continued on next page)

Version 467 SYSTAT

2-228

COMMANDS

- 691 -

IE(STAT command (Confll

Examples (cont)
P)

;SYSTAT

STATUS OF B50400-05 #4090 AT 16:27:49 ON 11-APR-72
DISK PERFORMANCE STATISTICS:3
UNIT

F/5

BW
BR
716 FREE

DSKA

FHAl1 (1xD@PB2)>:

6616

DWw

716 FREE, @ SEEKS

177

8811

59861

30062

27935

41622

16489

]

20563

9505

15503

7687

9711

4236

1214

8199

2602

1 1DATAI
ERROKS: 1DAT:1 RETRIES:l 2CONI:4000,15 1CONI:4000,4015 2DATAT:2
'

2140071

17215

DSKB

FREE

DPABC1B2446)2 4445 FREE, 54617 SEEKS

12648

1155

DPAlC117986): 4345 FREE, 42791

SEEKS

MSB

39483

» 30498

ERRORS: 1DAT:11 RETRIES:1 2CONI:15 1CONI 55,4015 2DATAI :54661,40000

1DATAI 2154661 ,40000

"MSB

41724

37609

17037

2790

ERRORS: 1DEV:s8 1DAT:240 RETRIES:1 2CONI:15 1CONI®5,4015 2DATAI:102

261,240000 1DATAI:102261,240009
DPA2C1QP2376): 4173 FREE, 33215 SEEKS

35413

35205

1236

14911

MSB

ERRORS: 1DEV:6 RETRIES:3 2CONIz15 1CONI 42015 2DATAI 456661 400000

4313 FREE, 32078 SEEKS
DPA4C192490):

32920

384172

2215

12599

1DATAL1:456661 50
35925 FREE
DSKC

337

5934

DPAS5C151669): 35925 FREE, 2863 SEEKS

1725

250

M5B

DIAG

2945

FREE

DPAGCDIAGA1)Y: 2945 FREE, 68088 SEEKS

2133

2532

533

8423

msSB

ACTIVE SWAPPING STATISTICS:
USED(K)
W
R
UNIT

FHAW
FHAL

809992
397720

366056
351376

= 84Z
2817335
181/300 = 60%

« KJOB

Version 467 SYSTAT

22229

COMMANDS

- 692 -

ISYSTAT command (Contfl

Examples (Cont)

25YS

t10,%1.)

SYSTAT
10
14

25YS

va67(5)
[SELF]
10,133

V4R7(5)

STATUS

UPTIME

45:47,

JOBS

SWAPPING

VIRT,

SYSTAT
TECO

5+SPY
2+3

RN
T1

3
47

/0)

SYSTAT

10
@

50416A
60%

OUT

SPACE

USED

CORE USED

SWAPPING

NULL

IN USE

RATIO

SYSTEM
TIME

37.

A5,18

55%

6R/352

85/350

IDLE

LOGGED

& 24%

1316311
5%

24«FEB=72

LOST

DETACHED

19%

4.7

ACTIVE SWAPPING RATIO = 5/18 = 0.3
VIRT, CORE SAVEN BY ‘SHARING = 5/(5+85)
AVERAGE JOB SIZE = 49/15 = 3.3 + 41/15

Version 467 SYSTAT

IN,

PeM,

2-230

=
®

6%
2,7

TOTAL

901/15

6,0

COMMANDS

- 693 -

TECO command 1

Function

The TECO cor;\mand runs TECO and opens an already existing file on disk for editing.
Refer to the TECO manual in the DECsystem=10 Software Notebooks.

Command Format

TECO dev:file.ext [proj,prog]

dev: = the device or file structure name containing the existing file. If omitted, DSK:
is assumed.

file.ext = the filename and filename extension of the existing file. If omitted, the

arguments of the last EDIT-class command are used.

[proj, prog]l = the directory name in which the file appears. If omitted, the user's
:

directory is assumed.
Characteristics

‘The TECO command:

)

Places the terminal in user mode.

Runs the TECO program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040,
Associated Messages

Ref;er to Chapter 4.
Example

<TECO TEST1.MAC )
xtC
+TECO DSKB:F ILNAM.CBL

(100,273 )

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the commands before running TECO.
Version 20 COMPIL -

Version 23 TECO

2-231

COMMANDS

- 694 -

TIME command

Function

The TIME command causes typeout of the total running time since the last

TIME command, fol(logged-in), followed
by the integrated product of running time and core size (KILO-CORE-SEC=).
Time is typed in
the following format:

lowed by the total running time used by the job since it was initialized

hh:mm:ss. hh
where
hh = hours
mm = minutes

ss.hh = seconds to nearest hundredth.
Interrupt level and job scheduling times are charged to the user who

interrupt or rescheduling occurred.

was running when the

NOTE
If automatic runtime is enabled using the SET WATCH
command, the incremental runtime is usually 0.

Command Format
TIME job

job = the job number of the job whose timing is desired. If job is omitted, the
job to
which the terminal is attached is assumed. In this case, monitor types out the
incremental running time (running time since last TIME command) as well as the

ning time since the job was initialized.

Characteristics
The TIME command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4,

2-232

total run-

- 695 -

COMMANDS
lTIME command (Cont)]

Example

The command is given for the first time after LOGIN;

« TIME)

therefore, the incremental time equals the total

2,38

0,98

time since LOGIN.

KILO»CORE=SEC=1

«T1)

2,00
2,98

KILO=CORE=SFC=1

.DIR/F)
NEWSRS

BAK

NEW525
Foo

RNO
SFD

PETALS

SAV

CSHELL

MAC

TRYCIO
METER

MAC
RNO

c’
PETALS
CIo

SURFIT

MAC
F4

DSKkB:

[12,770)

DSKC:

MAC

ALG

2T1)

0,40
0,78

The DIRECT command took .40 seconds of runtime

and 5 kilo-core~seconds.

KILO=CORE=SEC=6

2-233

COMMANDS

- 696 -

TPUNCH command

Function

The TPUNCH command is used to place entries into the paper-tape punch output queue.

command is equivalent to the following form of the QUEUE command:

This

QUEUE PTP: jobname = list of input specifications.
The TPUNCH command can be further abbreviated to
PUNCH jobname = list of input specifications.

However, individual installations may redefine PUNCH to mean output to the card-punch

queue instead of the paper~tape punch queuve.

Command Format
TPUNCH jobname = list of input specifications

jobname = name of the job being entered into the queue. The default is the name of
the first file in the request not the name of the first file given. These differ when the

first file given does not yet exist.

input specifications = a single file specification or a string of file specifications,

separated by commas, for the disk files being processed.
form dev:file.ext [proj,prog].

A file specification is in the

dev: = any file structure to which PTPSPL will have access; the default is DSK:.

file.ext = names of the files.

The filename is optional.

The default for the first file-

name is *, the default for subsequent files is the last filename used.

be omitted; the default is . PTP,

The extension can

[proj, prog] = a directory to which the user has access; the user's directory is assumed if

none is specifed.

The wildcard construction can be used for the input specifications.
If no arguments appear in the command string (i.e., only the command name is given), all
entries in the paper~tape punch queuve for all jobs are listed.
Switches that aid in corstructing the queue entry can also appear as part of the input specifi~-

cations.

These switches are divided into three categories:

Queue-operation - Only one of these switches can be placed in the command
string because they define the type of queue request.
anywhere in the command string.
'

The switch used can appear

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-234

COMMANDS

- 697 -

FI‘PUNCH command (ConE)_l

Command Format (cont)
2.

only once in the command
General - Each switch in this category can appear switch
used can appear any-

string because they affect the entire request. The
where in the command string.

nd string
File control = Any number of these switches can appear in the .comma
The switch used

the request
because they are specific to individual fi les within
the switch precedes the fileIf
.
applies
it
which
to
file
must be adjacent to the
name, it becomes the default for subsequent files.

The following switches can be used with the TPUNCH command.
Switch

/AFTER:#t

Category

Explanation

Process the request after the specified time; ft is either = General

in the form of hhmm (time of day) or +hhmm (time later
than the current time). The resulting AFTER time must

be less than the DEADLINE time. If the switch, or the
value of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constraints are assumed.

General

/BEFORE:t

Queve only the files with a creation date before

/BEGIN:n

Start the output on the nth foot of tape. The default

File Control

/COPIES:n

Repeat the output the specified number of times. N

File Control

time t where t is in the form dd-mmm-yy.
is to begin output on the first foot.

must be less than 64. If more than 63 copies are

’

needed, two separate requests must be made. If this

switch is omitted, one copy is made.
/CREATE

Make a new entry into the paper-tape output queue.
This switch is the default for the queue-operation

switches.

/DEADLINE::tt

Process the request before the specified time; tt is

either in the form hhmm (time of day) or +thhmm
(time later than the current time). The resulting
DEADLINE fime must be greater than the AFTER

Queuve Operation

General

time. If the switch, or the value of the switch; is
omitted, no DEADLINE constraints are assumed.
(continued on next page)

“Version 3 QUEUE

2-235

COMMANDS

- 698 -

’IPUNCH command (Cont)—]

Command Format (cont)
Switch

Explanation

/DISPOSE:DELETE

Delete the file after spooling.

/DISPOSE:PRESERVE

Save the file after spooling.

/DISPOSE :RENAME

Category
File Control

This is the default
of all files except files with exten
sions of . LST,
“TMP, and if the protection is Oxx,
.PTP.

Rename the file from the specified

directory im-

mediately, remove it from the
logged-out quota,
ard delete it after spooling, If
omitted, this

File Control

is the default for files with extensions

. LST,
-TMP, and if the protection is Oxx,
.PTP.

List the entries in the paper-tape
punch queue, but
do not update the queues. There
fore, the list may
not be an up~to~clate listing, but
the listing will be
faster than with /LIST.

/FILE:ASCII
Y

/FILE:ELEVEN

Indicate that the file format {s ASCII

This is

File Control

1] binary for=-

File Control

the default.

Incicate that the file format is MACX1
mat,

/KILL

text.

Remove the specified entry from
the paper-tape
punch queue. This switch can be
used for delet

a previously submitted request as

Queuve Operation

ing

Queue Operation

long as the request

has not been started by the paper~tape

punch spooler.
i

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-236

COMMANDS

- 699 -

[TPUNCH command (Contll

Command Format (cont)

/LIMIT:n

Limit the output fo the specified number of feet. The
default is 10*B+20 feet, where B is the number of
blocks in the request.

JLIST

Category

Explanation

Switch

General

List the entries in the paper~tape punch queue; if the
switch, along with all other switches, is omitted, all

Queuve Operation

Alter the specified parameters in the job. This switch
requires that the user have access rights to the job.
It can be used for altering a previously submitted
request as long as the request has not been started by

Queue Operation

entries for all jobs of all users are listed.

/MODIFY

the spooler.

~ File Control

/NEW

Accept the request even if the file does not yet exist.

/NOTE:a

Punch the specified text (a) in the output.

File Control

/NULL

Accept the request even if there is nothing in the

General

request.

/OKNONE

No error message is given.

Do not output message if no files match the wild-

File Control

_ card construction. This is assumed at KJOB time.
/PHYSICAL

Suppress logical device name assignments for the

File Control

device specified.

/PRIORITY
:n

Assign the specified external priority (n = 0 to 62)
to the request. The larger the number, the greater
priority the job has. The default is 10 if no switch
is given and 20 if the switch is specified without a

General

value.

/PROTECT:nnn

Assign the protection nnn (octal) to the job. If the
switch, or the value of the switch, is omitted, the
standard protection is assumed.

General

/REMOVE

Remove the file from the queue. This switch is valid
chly with the /MODIFY switch and can be used to
remove a previously submitted file as long as the
spooler has not started processing the request.

File Control

(continued on next page)

Version 3 QUEUE

2-237

COMMANDS

- 700 -

[TPUNCH command (Contfl

Command Format (cont)
Switch

/SEQ:m

/SINCE
s

Explanation

Category

Specify a sequence number to help identify a request
to be modified or deleted.

General

Queue only the files with creation dates after the

General

specified time t where t is in the form dd-mmm-yy.

/START:n

Begin on the nth line of the file.

If the switch, or

the value of the switch, is omnt’red the spooler

File Control

staris with the first line.

/STRS

Search for the file on all file structures in the search
list and take each occurrence.

just the first occurrence.

/TAPE:ASCII

File Control

The default is to take
;

Punch the tape in ASCII code.

If the /TAPE switch is

File Control

If the /TAPE switch

File Control

not specified, the file is punched according to the
data mode of the file.

/TAPE :BINARY

Punch the tape in binary mode.

is not specified, the file is punched according to the

data mode of the file.

/TAPE:IBINARY

Punch the tape in image-binary mode.

If the /TAPE

File Control

If the /TAPE switch

File Control

switch is not specified, the file is punched according
to the data mode of the file.

/TAPE:IMAGE

Punch the tape in image mode.
is not specified, the file

is punched according to the

data mode of the file.

/UNPRESERVED

Output the files only if they are not preserved (i.e.,
the first digit is 0). This switch avoids redundant

General

printing.

Chaoracteristics
The TPUNCH command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absentin the DECsystem~1040.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-238

COMMANDS

-701 -

[TPUNCH command (Cont)]

Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples
+TPUNCH

TENDMP +RFL/TAPE tBINAKY/COPIES

S ‘)

Punch 5 copies, in binary mode, of the file DSK:TENDMP.REL.

Version 3 QUEUE

2-239

COMMANDS

-702 -

l TYPE command 1
Function
The TYPE command directs PIP to type the ‘contents of the named source file(s) on the user's

terminal.

To stop the typing, type tC twice.
-

Command Format
TYPE list

list = a single file specification or a string of file specifications separated by commas.
The filename is required. The extension is required if the filename has an extension.
In addition, the full wildcard construction can be used.

Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in the TYPE command

string.

When COMPIL interprets the command string, it passes the switches on to PIP.

Characteristics
The TYPE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core area.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

«TYPE FILEA,DTAC :FILER.MAC,)

TTYPE *.TMP,DTAZ:C
)

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-240

- 703 -

COMMANDS

UNLOAD command |
Function

d is

The UNLOAD command rewinds and unloads a magnetic tape or d DECtape. This comman

equivalent to the following PIP command string:

'dev:'(MU) -

Command Format
UNLOAD dev:

dev: = a magnetic tape (MTAn) or a DECtape (DTAnN).
Characteristics

The UNLOAD command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem=-1040.
Associated Messages

Refer to Chapter 4.
Examples

LUNLCAD DTA7: )
SJUNL MTA3: )

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the
Version 20 COMPIL

Version 32 PIP

2~241

PIP program.

COMMANDS-

- 704 -

VERSION command

Function

’

The VERSION command prints the version number

of the program in the user's core area
(i.e., the last program run implicitly or explici
tly). The version number is obtained from
- JBVER

and . JBHVR in the job data area and js
printed in standard format.
from this command is in one of the follow
ing representations:

low + high

The low and high segments are different.

low

There is dnly a low segment.

low +

The low and high segments are the same.

The output

A GETSEG UUO has been done to a high segment which
matches the low segment.

+ highj

A GETSEG UUO has been done to a high segment which

does not match the low segment.

blank!

The high segment has been released.

With the VERSION command,

the low and high segments are

represented in the format

name version

With the SET WATCH VERSION
command, the low and high segme
nts are represented in one
of three formats:
name version

:name version

The program is not from
SYS:
The output is the resul
t of

SETNAM UUO (e.g.,
at the

end of loading).

S:name version

The program is a system prog

The name is a SIXBIT name and
number, the standard format
is:

ram (not logical device SYS:)

the version is in standard format.

major version minor version

When printing the version

(edit) - group who modified
program

'Output only from the SET WATCH VERSION command.
2-242

last

- 705 -

COMMANDS

[VERSION command (Con_t)J

Function (cont)

edit is octal and enclosed in
The major version is octal; the minor version is alphabetic; the
and preceded by a hyphen
octal
is
program
the
d
modifie
last
who
group
parentheses; and the
customer use). There are no
(0 = DEC development, 1= all other DEC personnel, and 2-7 = appear
in print. The parennot
does
it
spaces separating the items, and if an item is zero,
is zero. The following
item
nding
correspo
the
if
print
in
appear
theses and hyphen also do not
are examples of version numbers output in standard format.

10B(335)-1

maiér version 10, minor version B, edit number 335,

- group that modified program last 1.

7(5)

major version 7, minor version 0, edit number 5, group

54A

major version 54, minor version A, edit number O, group

that modified program last 0.

Command Format
VERSION

Characteristics

The VERSION command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Depends on FTVERS which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Examples
R TECO,)
*C

LVERSION,)

TECO 22(64)

.TYPE SAMPL.TXT)

THIS

IS A TEXT FILE

SVERSION)
PIP

31(35)

2-243

COMMANDS
A

- 706 -

l WHERE command
Function

The WHERE command enables the user

device is located.

the physical location of the terminal
job.

to determine the station at which a

If the station of a particular termin

specific peripheral

al is requested, the number return
ed is

which may or may not be the location

This depends on whether the user chang

command.

Command Format

WHERE devn
dev = any physical device name and

n is the unit number,

Characteristics
The WHERE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode,
Does not require LOGIN,
Depends on FTREM which is normally
absen

t in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

':f'

WHERE

«WH

7
%

WHE

cDR23)

TTY:

‘)

OPR:

0PR3)

] |

2WHERE €TY3)

of the controlling:

ed his job's logical location with
the LOCATE

;station of CDR2,

istation of ' job's terminal.,
T
istati
on of job
issuing command,

;central station.

2-244

COMMANDS

- 707 -

ZERO command 1

Function
The ZERO command clears the directory of the output device.

This command is equivalent to

the following PIP command string:

dey:/i -

Command Format
ZERO dev:

dev:=a DECtape (DTAn) or a disk (DSK). This argument is.required.
A directory name can be specified with ZERO DSK: and if the user has access to the

specified directory, the directory is zeroed,

If no directory is specified, the user's

directory is assumed,

Characteristics

The ZERO command:

Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image. Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
<ZER

DTA4:
)

_-_ZERO: DSK: )
<ZER DSK: [27,40))

]This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Version 20 COMPIL
Version 32 PIP

2-245

COMMANDS

- 708 -

COMMANDS

- 709 -

CHAPTER 3

BATCH SYSTEM COMMANDS

The Batch System, operating under the control of the DECsystem=10 Operating

System, increases sys-

Batch jobs may be entered from

best suited for
tem throughput by processing jobs that do not require human interaction. Types of jobs
ts of data, frea batch environment are: large and long=-running jobs, jobs that require large amoun Up to 14
quently run production jobs, and jobs that require little or no interaction with theofuser.
aring jobs.
Batch jobs can be processed concurrently without adversely affecting the running timesh
1.
2.

Local devices
Remote devices

Interactive terminals.

3.1 BATCH COMPONENTS

The Batch System consists of a group of programs; some are used for Batch operations

only, others are

available for various operations of the total computing system.

GR; the
The individual Batch components are: the Stacker, CDRSTK; the Queue Manager, QMAN punch),

Batch Coniroller, BATCON; and the output spoolers, LPTSPL (line printer), CDPSPL (card
PLTSPL (plo’r’ref), and PTPSPL (paper-tape punch).
3.1.1

The Stacker

, responsible for
The Stacker, CDRSTKis

1. reading a sequential input stream from an input device,

ined in the

2. separating the input by placing it in files according to' the control cards conta
input stream,

creating the job's log file and entering a report of its processing, and

entering the job into the Batch input queve.

3-1

COMMANDS

-710 -

When input is from the card reader, CDRST
K accepts ASCII, binary, 026, and DEC-0
29 Hollerith
code.

(Refer to Appendix B for tables of card

converts it to one of the menti
oned codes.

The input is read in image mode, and
CDRSTK

If input is from any other device
, only ASCII code is

accepted.

CDRSTK creates three types of files

codes.)

during its copying of the input data:

Batch control file, and the job's log
file.

in the input and are placed into the user's disk

area.

Refer to Paragraph 3.3 for the

cause CDRSTK to copy information

A user control file is created for each

into these files.

valid job and is subsequently processed

This file contains all monitor level and

to the control cards

Programs and data are copied into these files and

are passed to the job, while it
is running, by the Batch Contro
ller.

description of the control cards that

the user's data fi les, the

The data files are created according

user level commands encountered in

by the Batch Controller.

the input.

CDRSTK also

enters commands resulting from
the processing of certain contro
l cards and any information that

not follow specific control card format

to Paragraph 3.4 for g description

The control file is placed in the user's

of the Batch Controller commands

disk area.

that can be entered into the con~

trol file.

The job's log file contains a report of
the CDRST

K's processing, along with a record

intervention during its operation.
created files and is deleted after

3.1.2

This file is in the user's disk area

does

Refer

of any operator

along with the other CDRSTK=-

it is printed by the line printer spoole
r.

The Queue Manager

The Queue Manager, QMANGR, is
the program that schedules jobs and

When CDRSTK finishes processing

a job, it makes an entry into the
Batch

Manager computes and dyncmi cally revise
the job is to be run.

input queve.

s priorities for the job and notifies the

Jobs are scheduled for running according

job and to the priorities established

by the system.

entry only when the output is compl

to the parameters pertaining to each

queve until the job terminates.

is logged off the system, an output
queue entry is usually made

The Queue Manager again schedules

The Queue

Batch Controller when

While the |ob is running, its queue
entry is flagged

to show it is in use, but the entry
is not deleted from the

deleted.

maintains system queves.

When the job

and the entry in the input queve is

the job's output and deletes the job's

output queue

etely finished.

3.1.3

The Batch Controller

The Batch Controller, BATCON, contro
ls all jobs entered into the Batch Syste

file created by CDRSTK or the user

and initiates and controls the runni

It reads the control

and system program commands direct

ng of the job by passing data

ly to it.

COMMANDS

-711 -

the monitor for gktion. The
Monitor commands are examined by the Batch Controller and passedtheto chara
cter in column 1 in each
L ]

ng
Controller determines the destination of commands by interd preti
s are ignored. until a nonspace
line of the control file. . If column 1 contains a space or tab,orthenumespace
ric character, the line is either
character is encountered. If column 1 contains an alphabetic 1 contains a special character, the
at monitor command level or at user command fevel. If column
Batch Controller interprets the line as follows:

column 2.
$ (dollar sign) - The:interpretation depends upon the character in
d to the log file as a combetic character, the line is copie
If column 2 contains an alpha
ssed.
ment because it is a Stacker control line and has already been proce
as data.
If column 2 contains a numeric or special character, the line is treated

and the line is
If column 2 contains a dollar sign ($), the initial dollar sign is suppressed
treated as data.
is entered into
If column 2 contains a line feed, vertical tab, or form feed, a blank line
:

the log file.

mn 2.

(period) - The interpretation depends upon the character in colu

alphabetic character, the line is treated as a monitor command
If column 2 contains anessed
.
. and the period is suppr
with the
If column 2 contains a nonalphabetic character, the line is treated as data
period as part of the data.
command or program dataams.and the asterisk is
treated as a user-level od
* (asterisk) = The line isstand
ard input data meth for most system progr
suppressed. This is the
The equal sign is
command or program ,data.
line is treated as a userthelevel
= (equal sign) = The space
d to the propasse
not
(i.e.
essed
suppr
and the end of line arecomm
suppressed and final !lys indic
termiands
comm
these
se
becau
and
a DDT or TECO
gram). This line norma cters ratheatesr than
rly if
prope
ion
funct
the end of the line and would not
nate with special chara
d.
the end of the line were passe

; (semicolon) = The.line is treated as a comment to the log file.

. The percent
and level statement label
treated as part of a comm
% (percent sign) - ThevedlineforisDEC
error, the
had
has
job
the
when
red
use. If % is encounted. In this case, the %FIN no
sign is normally reser
ted.
execu
is
s a 9%FIN is encountere
control file is advancedof, unles
the .IF command in Paragraph 3.4.5.
Refer to the discussion

ol file other than those
The Batch Controller does not examine the contents of any lines in the(1),contr
rts the up-arrow as
destined for the monitor. However, when it encounters an up=arrow it conve
follows:

rrow and the digit are
If the cHarac’rer following the up-arrow is a numeric character, the up~a
passed to the job.
cter, the up-arrow and the
up—arrow is an alphabetictA chara
If the character followingtothe
lated to CTRL-A.
trans
is
character are translated a control character; e.g.,

(continued on next page)

3-3

COMMANDS

-712 -

If the character following the up-ar

row is another up-arrow, the first up--ar
row is ignored and

the second up-arrow is treated as an

up-arrow; e.g., 1A is treated as tA
(up-arrow A) and

t11A is treated as 1 1A (up-arrow
up~arrow A),

If the job is requesting input and is at
mediate levél line is found.

monitor level, the control file is read
until a comma

nd or inter-

If a job is requesting input at data

command, the Batch Controller
inserts a control-C,

level and the next line is a monit
or

A Batch user may not issue the follo

wing monitor commands when his job

ATTACH, DETACH, CCONT, CSTAR
T, and SEND.

is operating in batch mode:

If these commands are used, the line
is suppressed

and flagged at BATERR in the log
file and the job is continued.

All other monitor commands and

system program commands may
be used by a job operating
in batch mode.

The Batch Controller makes entries
to the log file to record
job.

3.1.4

its processing of the control fi le and

The Output Spoolers

The output spoolers receive job output

Manager.

that has been placed into the output

Usually a job's output is placed

LPTSPL spooling program at the same

are in the form QxxSnn. LPT, where

where the job is currently located.,

queues by the Queue

in a line printer queve to be print

ed at a later time by the

station from which the input was recei

ved.

The output filenames

xx is a random number, and nn is the
station number of the

However, the user can also specify other
output

his programs within his job or by means

of the QUEUE monitor command in his

job.

causes output to the card punch
, paper-tape punch » or plotte
r o be automatically

system.

3.2

the

The second specifies nonstandard output

printer

devices either in

The first method
spooled by the

spooling to any of the spooling device

SUBMITTING JOBS

A job is a unit that consists of one

step or a group of steps.

related data, or several programs and
their data,

It can contain (1) a single program

and (2) the monitor and user-level

required to control the progr

and its

commands that are

ams.

The Batch system allows the user to submi

t his job by one of the following three

methods:

The user punches his job on cards,

inserts control cards to CDRSTK, and
leaves his cards
at the designated place for the opera
tor to run (refer to Paragraph 3.2.1
).
The user creates his job as a file
for input to CDRSTK (instead of havin
g his job on cards)
and then runs CDRSTK himself (refer
to Paragraph 3.2.2).

The user bypasses CDRSTK by creati

and then enters his job into the

3.2.3).

Version 6 BATCON

ng his own control file on disk for the

Batch input queue from his termi

Batch Controller

nal (refer to Paragraph

3-4

=713 -

3.2.1

COMMANDS

Submitting a Job with Cards

With this method, a job is submitted via a deck of cards, hounded by the control cards that mark its
beginning and end. Other conirol cards to CDRSTK are interspersed among the card deck to direct
CDRSTK's processing.

Figure 3=1 shows a job containing the appropriate control cards to CDRSTK.,

This job compiles, loads, executes, and lists a FORTRAN program,

| END OF FILE
I

FORTRAN

PROGRAM

$FORTRAN
$PASSWORD MUMB

$J0B TEST2 [20,27]/

10-0729

Figure 3=1

3.2.1.1

Typical Job on Cards

The $JOB Card - This card notifies CDRSTK that a job is to be processed.

CDRSTK creates

a control file into which commands are placed for the Batch Controller and a log file on the disk.

The

first argument (TEST2) shown on this card is the user-assigned name for the job; the second argument
([20,271) is the project-programmer number of the user.

For a description of switches which can be

used on this card, refer to Paragraph 3.3.9.

3.2.1.2

The $PASSWORD Card ~ This card contains the PASSWORD associated with the project-

programmer number specified on the $JOB card.
assigned to the user by the system manager.

$PASSWORD card.

In Figure 3-1, the PASSWORD is MUMB, which was

Refer to Paragraph 3.3.12 for more information on the

- 3.2.1.3 The $FORTRAN Card ~ This card causes CDRSTK fo insert a COMPILE monitor command
(refer to Chapter 2) into the control file in order to cause the program to be compiled.. Immediately

following the $FORTRAN card is the FORTRAN source program to be compiled. The source program

is read into a disk file with the specified filename (or a defaulf name if a filename is not given) and
with an extension of .F4.

Refer to Paragraph 3.3.8 for more information on the $FORTRAN card.

3-5

COMMANDS

3.2.1.4

=714 -~

The $DATA Card - The card after the FORTRAN program is the $DATA card. This card

causes CDRSTK to insert an EXECUTE monitor command (refer to Chapter 2) into the control file in

order to load and then execute the previously compiled program. Refer to Paragraph 3.3.3 for
additional information on this card.

3.2.1.5

The End of File Card - The last card shown in the example is the end-of-file card. This card

signals the end of the job. The card is recognized by CDRSTK as the end of the file because of the
punches in rows 12, 11, 0, 1, 6, 7, 8, 9 in columns 1 and 80 of the card. Refer to Paragraph 3.3 for
more information about this card.

3.2.1.6

Output = Once the program is punched on cards, the card deck is submitted to the operator,

who in turn stacks the job in the card reader. The user receives his output in the form of line printer
listings.

Refer to Paragraph 3.5 for an explanation of the job output.

The CDRSTK control cards shown in Figure 3-1 are just a few of the control cards available to the

user.

For a complete description of all the CDRSTK control cards, refer to Paragraph 3.3.

3.2.2

Submitting a Job with a File

With this method, a job is submitted via a file contained on any input device that supports ASCII
code. This file contains the program and data with card images of the control cards for CDRSTK. The
following example shows the creation of a disk file containing a FORTRAN program and card images
of CDRSTK control commands. Note that it corresponds to the card example in Paragraph 3.2.1.
SLOGIN 2¢1,27)
JOB17

55C4

TTY1]

PASSWOKD
©

1020

_15-MAR-72

+MAKE JOE,)

*I $JOR TESTZ2,

WED

[(20,271)

SFORTRAN,)
C

FORTRAN

PROGRAM

GOES

HERE

$F.0D)

)
$DATA

£%

AEX$
S

3.2.2.1

Image of the $JOB Card - The first line of the file is an image of the $JOB card, Note that

the $ character must be the first character of the line in.order for CDRSTK to recognize it os a control

command. This line causes a control file and a log file to be created on the disk when CDRSTK is run.
The first argument (TEST2) is the user-assigned name for the job; the second ([20,271) is the

3-6

-715 -

COMMANDS

user
project-programmer number of the user. The $PASSWORD card image is not needed because the
card, refer
is already logged-in when creating the input file. For additional information on the $JOB
to Paragraph 3.3.9.

monitor com=~
3.2.2.2 Image of the $FORTRAN Card - This line causes CDRSTK to insert a COMPILE
source program
mand (refer to Chapter 2) into the control file in order to compile the program. The

a filefollows immediately and is read into a disk file with the specified filename (or a default name if
information on
name is not given) and with an extension of .FA. Refer to Paragraph 3.3.8 for more
the $FORTRAN card.

3.2.2.3 Image of the $EOD Card - This'lifie indicates to CDRSTK the end of the FORTRAN progra
Refer to Paragraph 3.3.6 for more information.

monitor com=
3.2.2.4 Image of the $DATA Card - This line causes CDRSTK to insert an EXECUTE
m.
mand (refer to Chapter 2) into the control file in order to load and execute the progra

es the
3.2.2.5 Running CDRSTK - Once the file is created and CDRSTK is run by the user, it process
operator.
user~created file in the same manner as it processes input fi les of jobs entered directly by the
The user runs CDRSTK by typing
:R

CDRSTK )

CDRSTK responds with an asterisk, and then the user types in the following command
*START dev:fi Ie.ext) ‘

where dev: is the name of the device containing the input file for CDRSTK and file.ext is the
|
the file. Using the above file, the command is
FSTART

name of

DSK:JOB)

and CDRSTK responds with

When CDRSTK has completed its processing (i.e., when it has created the control and log files
entered the job info the Batch input queue), it responds with
READY

and has

COMMANDS

-716 -

indicating its readiness to accept another file.

At this point, the user can enter another file or
return

to monitor mode with a tC,

The card images shown in the preceding exampl

e are only a few of the CDRSTK control card

available. Refer to Paragraph 3.3 for a complete description of all of
the control cards.
3.2.3

images

Submitting a Job with
a Control File to the Batch Controlle

With this method, a job is submitted via the steps within
a control file

to the Batch Controller.

The

file must be a disk file and is created with a system editor. Since this file is processe
d directly by

the Batch Controller, control card images are not used.

The control file consists of monitor commands,

user program commands, comments, and sequence
control statements.

description of control file ccmmands.

assumes that a file named DATA.F4 already exists on
MAKE

Refer to Paragraph 3.4 for a

The following is an example of creating a control

file.

disk.

JOBuCTL)

*I EXECUTE

/COMPILE

DATA.F4

/LIST)

FXE%

Once the control file is created, the user can enter the
job into the Batch input queue

one of three

ways:-

SUBMIT jobname = control file, log file
refer to the SUBMIT command in Chapter 2.

QUEUE INP: jobname = control file, log file
refer to the QUEUE command in Chapter 2.

RQUEUE
- refer to the QUEUE specification in Notebook 7 of

3.2.4

the DECsystem-10 Software Notebooks.

Interjob Dependency

Jobs are not necessarily run in the order that they are read into

by the user on the $JOB card (refer to Paragraph 3.3.9)

the Batch System.

Priorities stipulated

and additional parameters set by the Batch

System are dynamically computed by the Queue Manager
to determine in what order the jobs

However, it is often useful to submit several jobs that
must be run

job updates a master file and another job processes it.

upon the running of the other.

are run.

in a specific order, for example, one

Therefore, the running of one job is dependent

Although these jobs could be combined into one large job, it
is some~

times necessary to keep them distinct; i.e., they
might be submitted by different people at different

times,

=717 -

COMMANDS

Because the jobs in the Batch System are run in order of priority, the user specifies an addition-

al priority, an initial dependency count, on the $JOB card of the dependent job.
count becomes part of the queue entry.

than zero cannot be scheduled.

This dependency

Any input queue entry that has a dependency count greater

When the count becomes zero, the job is scheduled, based upon the

time it was submitted and the time that the dependency count became zero.

If the dependency count

becomes negative, an advisory message is sent to the issuing job and to the dependent job.

The

dependency count can be altered by including the QUEUE command as part of any job upon

which the

dependent job is waiting.

(Refer to the QUEUE monitor command.)

The QUEUE command switch that

allows the user to change the dependency count of another job is the /MODIFY/DEPEND
:nn switch.
If the user specifies a plus or minus sign before the count (nn), that number is subtracted from
or added

to the dependent job's count,

If the user does not specify a sign, the dependent job's count is changed

to the count specified in the /MODIFY/DEPEND: switch.

3.3

CDRSTK CONTROL CARDS

Control cards are inférspersed among the input stream to aid CDRSTK in separating the input into the
appropriate files, either the user's data files or the control file processed by the
Batch Controller.

control cards contain a dollar sign ($) in column 1 and an alphabetic character in column 2.

The

These are

the only cards read and interpreted by CDRSTK; the remainder of the input is separated and placed into
the appropriate file.

Note that if the user creates his own control file, he bypasses CDRSTK, and,

therefore, does not use these control cards.
Only the first part of the command name or switch need be specified; as long as the
name is unique,
it is accepted.

The first three characters of a command name are generally sufficient to ensure

uniqueness. The standard comment and. continuation conventions for the system can be used on the
*

control card.

A comment is preceded by a semicolon; characters after the semicolon to the end of

the card are treated as comments.

A card may be continued by placing a hyphen as the last non-TAB

or non=space character before the end of the card.
spaces can follow.

Comments beginning with a s'emicol;m, TABs, and

All defaults for control card parameters are installation parameters.

The end-of-file is used to signal the end of the job. When input is from the card reader, an end-offile card is used.

Column 1 of this card has rows 4 and 5 blank and rows 6, 7, 8, and 9 punched.

The recommended form of this card has columns 1 and 80 containing punches in rows 12, 11,
0, 1, 6,
7, 8, 9, withrows 2, 3, 4, and 5 blank, so that the card can be recognized in any orientation.

When devices other than the card reader are used for input, the standard end-of-file
for each device
is treated by CDRSTK as the end of the job.

3=9

COMMANDS

-718 -

3.3.1

$ALGOL

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy the named ALGOL program onto disk and fo insert a
COMPILE monitor command into the control file.

source program.

The card is placed at the beginning of the

When the job is run, the specified program is compiled and temporary relo~

catable binary and listing files are created.

The binary and listing files can be made perman-

ent if the user renames them to change their protection. The source file can be preserved by
means of the /PROTECT switch., The listing file is printed as part of the job's output.
Processor switches can be passed to the ALGOL compi ler by including them in the command
string.

The position of these switches in the command determines their position in the

COMPILE command generated by CDRSTK.

For example

$ALGOL /NOLIST (E,,N)
results in the following COMPILE command

.COMPILE /COMPILE DECKAA.ALG /NOLIST (E,,N)
Refer to Paragraph 1.5.7 for a description of the ALGOL processor switches.

Card Format
$ALGOL dev:name.ext [proj,prog] (processor switches) /S ]/52 .. ./Sn
dev: = a file structure name.

If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name.ext = the name of the file to be created on disk.

If omitted, TDRSTK assigns a

unique filename of the form DECKaa (where aa = AA through ZZ) with the extension
ALG.

It is recommended, however, that the user select a distinct filename for each

job that is in the Batch system simultaneously.

[proj, prog] = a directory name other than that specified on the $JOB card.
the project-programmer number .on the $JOB card is used.
(processor switches) = the switches to be passed to the ALGOL compiler.

If omitted,

They must be

enclosed in parentheses and the slash cannot appear in connection with these switches.

/S /S /Sq
== the switches that control the mode of input interpretation and the

hshng of the compi led program,

Switch

Meaning

Default

/ASCII

The input is read in ASCII mode.

/D029

The card deck is read in the old DEC-029 format.

off

This format is similar to ASCII and is available
only in those installations that use DEC-029 format.

JLIST

A temporary listing file of the program is created.

(continued on next page)
Version 11 CDRSTK

3-10

COMMANDS

-719

Card Format (cont)
Default

Meaning

Switch

off

No listing file of the program is created.

/NOLIST

The protection to be set for the file (in octal).

/PROTECT :nnn

The file is preserved
‘only until KJOB
for the job.

When ON is specified, trailing blanks are suppressed.

/SUPPRESS:
ON or OFF

They are not suppressed when OFF is specified.

/WIDTH:nn

The maximum number of columns to be read. If the
specified width is less than 80, only that number of
columns is read. The remaining columns are treated
as blank. Normally this switch is only used when

The card deck is read in 026‘card code.

off

the /SUPPRESS switch is on,

/026
Restrictions

The /026 and /D029 switches apply only to card reader input. Input from other devices ismust
be read in ASCII code; otherwise an error message is written in the log file and the job
terminated.

3.3.2

$COBOL

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy the specified COBOL program onto disk. The card ais placed
at the beginning of the source program, and when CDRSTK reads the card, it inserts
COMPILE monitor command into the control file and copies the COBOL program into the file

on the specified disk area. When the job is run, the program is compiled and a temporary recan
files
locatable binary file and a temporary listin g file are created. The binary and listing

be made permanent if the user renames them to change their protection. The source file can
be preserved if the user specifies the /PROTECT switch. The listing file is printed as part of
the job's output.

Processor switches can be éqssed to the COBOL compiler by including them in the command
string. The position of these switches in the command determines their position in the
C OMPILE command generated by CDRSTK.
For example

$COBOL (A,M,C) /PROTECT:057
results in the following COMPILE command

.COMPILE /COMPILE DECKAB.CBL (A, M, C) /LIST

Refer to Paragraph 1.5.7 for a description of the COBOL processor switches.
Version 11 CDRSTK

COMMANDS

..720-

Card Format

$COBOL dev:name.ext [proj, prog] (processor switches) /S ]/52.
. ./Sn
dev: = a file structure name.

If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name.ext = the name of the file to be created on
disk. If omitted, CDRSTK assigns a
unique filename of the form DECKaa (where aa = AA
through ZZ) with the extension

.CBL.

It is recommended, however, that the user select a distinct name
for each job

in the Batch system simultaneously.

[proj, prog] = a directory name other than that specified

on the $JOB card.

the project-programmer number on the $JOB card is used.

(processor switches) = the switches to be passed to the COBOL

enclosed in parentheses and the slash cannot appear in

compiler.

If omitted,

They must be

connection with these switches.

/S]/S .+./S_= the switches that control the mode of input
inferpfiet

aflon and the list-

ing ofthe cor?‘tpi led program.

Switch

Meaning

Default

/ASCII

The input is read in ASCII mode.

/D029

The card deck is read in the old DEC-029 format.

This format is similar to ASCII format and is avai lable

on
off

only in those installations that use DEC-029 format.

/LIST

A temporary listing file of the program is created.

/PROTECT:nnn

Specifies the protection to be set for the job (in octal).

/SEQUENCE

The program is read in conventional COBOL format

The file is preserved
only until KJOB
for the job.

with sequence numbers in columns 1 through 6, and

comments beginning in column 73. When this switch
is specified, the default width is 72.

/SUPPRESS:
ON or OFF

/WIDTH:nn

When ON is specified, trailing blanks are suppressed.

The maximum number of columns to be read.

They are not suppressed when OFF is specifi
ed,

If the

specified width is less than 80, only that number of

columns is read, the remaining columns are treated

as blank.

Normally this switch is used only when

the /SUPPRESS switch is on.

/026

The card deck is read in 026 card code.

off

Restrictions

The /026 and /D029 switches apply only to card reader
input.
be read in ASCII code; otherwise, an error message is written
terminated.

Version 11 CDRSTK

3-12

Input from other devices must

in the log file and the job is

- 721 -

COMMANDS

3.3.3

$DATA

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy data into a file on the user's disk area and to insert an
EXECUTE monitor command into the control file,

CDRSTK maintains a list of filenames of all source or relocatable programs that have been processed since the beginning of the job or the last $DATA card read. Each time a program is

copied by the CDRSTK, its name is placed in the list and given an extension of .REL. When

the $DATA card is read, CDRSTK places an EXECUTE command into the control file and copies
the filenames of the programs into the EXECUTE command string. On the next $language card,
CDRSTK clears the list of filenames so that the next entries into the list reflect only those filenames copied since the last $DATA command was read. When the job is run, the programs are
loaded and executed, No compilation is performed because the programs are either in relocatable binary form or have been previously compiled because of the $language card. If two
$DATA cards appear in a row, the same programs are reloaded and executed again.

Loader switches can be passed to the LOADER by placing them in the command string. When
it converts them to the standard
CDRSTK places these switches in the EXECUTE command,
LOADER switch format (i.e., % switch).
$DATA (S, F)

For instance,

causes the following EXECUTE command to be generated

.EXECUTE ... %S %F
Card Format

$DATA dev:name.ext [proj,progl /S ]/52. . ./Sn
dev: = a file structure name. If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name.ext = the filename of the file to be created. If omitted, CDRSTK creates a
unique filename of the form Qaa (aa = AA through ZZ) with the extension .CDR.
It is recommended, however, that the user select a distinct name for each job that
is in the Batch system simultaneously, so that he can distinguish the various output
'
listings.

[proj, prog] = the directory name if different from the one specified on the $JOB card.

If omitted, the project—programmer number specified on the $JOB card is used.

/S ]/52. . ;/Sn = switches that conirol the mode of reading and interpreting of the input
medid,

Version-11 CDRSTK

3-13

COMMANDS

=722
-

Card Format (cont)

Swiféh

Meaning

Default

/ASCII

The input stream is read in ASCII mode.

/BINARY

The card deck is read in binary card form.

off

This switch
is ordinarily not necessary because the first column of

each card is checked for punches in rows 7 and 9.

these rows are puriched, the card is read in binary.

/D029

The card deck is read in the old DEC-029 format.

This
formet is similar to ASCII format and is available only

off

for compatability with old decks.

/IMAGE :n

The card deck is read in image mode. The switch must
be followed by a decimal number in the range 2

off

through 80.

This causes ensuing cards to be read in
image mode until either end-of-file is reached or a

card is read that contains punches in all rows of col-

umn | and all rows in column n.

The CDRSTK control

commands are not recognized when cards are read in

imcage mode,

/PROTECT:nnn

A protection of nnn (octal) is set for the file; if not

- specified, the file
is preserved only until a KJOB
command for the job.

/SUPPRESS:
ON or OFF

/WIDTH:nn

When ON is specified, trailing spaces are suppressed.
They are not suppressed when OFF is specified.
The maximum number of columns to be read. If the
specified width is less than 80, only that number of

columns is read.

The remaining columns are treated
Nommaily, this switch is only used when
the /SUPPRESS switch is on. For example, /WIDTH:72

as blanks.

causes the CDRSTK to disregard columns 73 through 80
and to suppress any trailing spaces up to column 72,

/026

The card deck is read in 026 card code.

off

The modes ASCII, 026, IMAGE, and D029 are mutually exclusive modes for interpreting

Hollerith punches.

When one of those modes is set, it remains in effect until changed (refer
to the $SMODE cardl) or the end of file is reached.
The defaults for all modes are reset by the next $MODE card or by individual switches in other
control cards such as in the $DECK card.

Requirements

If the data is contained within the programs instead of being a separate file, a $DATA card or

an EXECUTE command must be placed after the programs.

otherwise.

The program will not be executed

- 723 -

COMMANDS

Restrictions

This card can be used only when the programs in the job have been entered with a $language
card or $RELOCATABLE card, since CDRSTK maintains a list of the filenames of programs that
are input with these commands. If the user wishes only to have the programs compiled, no.
$DATA card or EXECUTE command should appear in the job.

3.3.4

$DECK

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy all statements up to the next control card into a data file.
Card Format

$DECK dev:name.ext [proj, prog] /S]/SZ' . ./Sn
dev: = a file structure name.

The default is normally DSK.

name.ext = the user-assigned name and extension of the file to be created.

If omitted,

a unique filename in the form DECKaa (aa = AA through ZZ) is created by CDRSTK
with the extension .CDR, It is recommended, however, that the user select a distinct
name for each job that is in the Batch system simultaneously.

[proj, progl = a disk area other than the one supplied on the $JOB card.
the project-programmer number specified on the $JOB card is used.
/S /S .../S

If omitted,

=switches that control the mode of readmg and interpreting of the input

medld The Switches are identical to the switches described for the $DATA card.

Restrictions

The /BINARY, /026, /IMAGE, and /D029 switches apply only to card reader input. Input
from other devices must be read.in ASCII code; otherwise an error message is written in the
log file and the job is terminated.

3.3.5

$DUMP

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to insert a DUMP monitor command into the control file which invokes
a dump, according to the arguments specified, when an error is detected by the Batch Controller.

COMMANDS

- 74 -

Card Format

$DUMP /command arg/command arg. ..
The commands and their arguments are the same as described for the DUMP program.
Chapter 2).

Two of the commands useful to a Batch job are duplicated below.

Command

Argument

ALL
DUMP

(Refer to

Meaning
Dumps the entire file.

curp descriptor,

Dumps the specified bytes in the current modes.

curp descriptor, ...

3.3.6

$EOD

Function

This card terminates the input that is being copied into a data file by CDRSTK because of
~a preceding $DECK card. All control cards with the exception of $MODE perform this action,
i.e., terminate the copying of input.

CDRSTK ignores it.

If input is not being copied and this card is read,
$EOD is only necessary when the user wishes to place a line of input

which is not a CDRSTK control card after input that is being copied into a data file.
g_qrd Format

$EOD

3.3.7

$ERROR

$NOERROR

Furiction

These cards are used to aid the Batch Controller in processing errors.

They cause CDRSTK to

insert an . IF statement into the control file; e.g., .IF (ERROR) or .IF (NOERROR). Refer to
Paragraph 3.4.5 for an explanation of the .IF statement. These cards must appear at the point

at which the error occurs.

COMMANDS

’

=725 Card Formats
$ ERROR statement

$ NOERROR

statement

If
statement = an executable monitor or batch command preceded by a period.
t
statemen
the
label,
t
statemen
a
to
go
to
er
Controll
Batch
the
directs
t
statemen
the
s
command
of
e
sequenc
the
in
label line and any related lines must be included
at the place the user wants it executed. For example,

$FORTRAN TEST1

$ERROR .GOTO A
$DATA TEST1DA

$ERROR .GOTO A
A: CONT

$FORTRAN TEST2

3.3.8

$FORTRAN or $F40

;

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy the named FORTRAN program onto disk and to insertg aof the

beginnin
COMPILE monitor command into the control file. ‘The card is placed at the
temporary relo=
and
d
compile
is
program
d
specifie
the
run,
is
job
the
When
program.
source
be made permancan
files
listing
and
binary
The
catable binary and listing files are created.
be preserved by
can
file
source
The
n.
protectio
their
change
to
them
ent if the user renames
output.
job's
the
means of the /PROTECT switch. The listing file is printed as part of
in the command
Processor switches can be passed to the FORTRAN compiler by includining them
E com~COMPIL
the
position
their
es
determin
string
command
the
in
position
string. Their
mand generated by CDRSTK. For example,
$FORTRAN (A, S; D) /NOLIST

results in the following COMPILE command

.COMPILE /COMPILE DECKII.F4 (A,S,D) /NOLIST

Refer to Paragraph 1.5.7 for a description of the FORTRAN procéssor switches.

Version 11 CDRSTK

3-17

COMMANDS

- 726
-

Card Format

$FORTRAN dev:namext
. [proj, prog] (processor switches) /S]/SZ'
. ./Sn

$F40 dev:name.ext [proj, prog] (processor switche
s) /S]/S2 .. '/Sn
dev: = a file structure name.

If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name.ext = the name of the file to be
created on disk. If omitted, CDRSTK
assigns a
unique filename of the form DECKa
a (where aa = AA through ZZ) with
the extension

-F4. It is recommended, however, that
the user select a distinct name for each
job
in the Batch system simultaneously.

[proj, prog; = a directory name other than
that specified on the $JOB card.
the project-programmer number on the $JOB
card is used.

If omitted,

(processor switches) = the switches to be
passed to the FORTRAN compiler. They
must
be enclosed in parentheses and the slash
cannot appear in connection with these

switches,

/S]/S .++/S

= the switches that control the mode of input

ing ofzrhe «:oi?'lpiled program.

Switch

interpretation and the list-

Meaning

Default

/ASCII

The input is read in ASCII mode.

/CREF

A cross-referenced listing file is create
d to be pro-

on
off

cessed by the CREF program.

/D029

The card deck is read in the old DEC-0
29 format. This
format is similar to ASCII and is availa
ble only in those

off

_installations that use DEC-029 format

/LIST

A temporary listing file of the program

is created.

The MACRO coding is included in the

output listing.

/NOLIST

off

No listing file of the program is create

/PROTECT:nnn

The protection to be set for the file (in
octal).

off
The file is preserved
only until KJOB for

/SUPPRESS:
ON or OFF

/WIDTH:nn

the job.

When ON is speciffied, trailing blanks are
They are not suppressed when OFF is

suppressed.

specified.

The maximum number of columns to be read.

If the

spec:fied width is less than 80, only
that number of

columns is read.

as blank.

The remaining columns are treated
Normally this switch is only used when

the /SUPPRESS switch is on.

/026

The card deck is read in 026 card code.

off

Restrictions

The /026 and /D029 switches apply only
to card reader input. Input from other
devices must
be read in ASCII codcle; otherwise, an error
message is written in the log file and the
job is
terminated.

Version 11 CDRSTK

~727 -

COMMANDS

3.3.9

$JOB

Function

This card, in conjunction with the $PASSWORD card (if required), causes CDRSTK to create a

control file and a log file on disk into which commands are placed for the Batch Controller.
The filename of the control file is the name of the job specified in the command string, and
the extension is .CTL., CDRSTK also uses this name as the filename of the log file with an

extension of .LOG. If the jobname is omitted from the command string, CDRSTK creates a

unique name for the control file and log file. It is recommended, however, that the user select
a distinct name for each job that is in the Batch system simultaneously, so that he can distin-

guish the various output listings. In general, the jobname used on input appears in the output

queves. CDRSTK adds the control and log files to the directory of the specified project—
programmer number.

The user may specify a wildcard designation (*) for the programmer number in the $JOB card,
for example,

] or $JOB FLEX [4]
$JOB FLEX[4,

This.specificati.on causes CDRSTK to look at ACCT.SYS (an administrative file) in order to

determine if the wildcard option is allowed for this project. If it is, CDRSTK provides a unique
programmer number within the project. If it is not allowed, CDRSTK returns an error message
and continues with the next job.
Card Format

$JOB name [proj, prog] /S]/SZ' . ./Sn

name = the user-assiQned name for the job; if omitted, CDRSTK creates a unique name

of the form JOBaaa (aaa = AAA through ZZZ) for the control and log files.

[proj, prog] = the project-programmer number of the user who submitted the job. This
argument is required. A space or comma can separate this argument from the jobname.
/51/52' . ./Sn = switches taken from the following group. These switches are optional.

Switch

/AFTER:dd~mmm=yy hhmm

Default

Meaning

The job cannot be run until after the speci-

None

The job cannot be run until after the input

None

fied date and time. The resulting AFTER
time must be less than the DEADLINE time.

/AFTER:+tt

time plus the number of minutes indicated
by tt.

/CARDS:nnk

The maximum number of cards (up to 10K)

that can be punched by the job (in decimal).

K is optional.

(continued on next page)

COMMANDS

-728 -

Card Format (cont)
Switch

/CHARGE:aa

Meanir:g

None

Maximum amount of core (in decimal) that can

25K

(aa = name of the account).

/ CORE:nnk

be used by the job up to the maximum allowed
by the installation. K is optional.

/DEADLINE:dd-mmm=yy hhmm

Default

The job is charged to a user-specified account

The job must be completed by the specified
date and time.

None

The resulting DEADLINE
time must be greater than the AFTER time.

/DEADLINE
:+#t

The job must be started by the indicated
number of minutes after it is input.

/DEPEND:nn

Initicl interjob dependency count (in decimal).

/FEET:nn

The number of feet of paper tape that will be
punched by the job.

/LOCATE:Snn

Specifies the remote station of the job and
where the output is to be sent.

None

The station where
the cards were
input,

/NAME:aa

The user's name in up to 12 characters.

None

/PAGES:nn

The maximum number of pages in decimal to
be printed by the job, including the log file

100

and compilation listing.

/PRIORITY:nn

The external priority of the job; the highest

priority that can be specified is 62 (decimal).

/PROTECT:nnn

The protection (in octal) for the job, the control

file, and the log file.

Preserved only

until KJOB is
given for the job.

/RESTART:0 or 1

If 0, the job cannot be restarted by the operator.

The job can be restarted if 1 is specified. The
job should not be restartable if there are changes
to the permanent file directory.

/TIME:hh:mm:ss

The limit placed on the amount of CPU time

used by the job.

/TPLOT:mm

The number of minutes of plotter time that the
job will use.

/UNIQUE:0 or 1

If 1, only one Batch job at a time is run using
the specified directory. If 0, any number of

5.0 (5 minutes)

Batch jobs can be run at the same time using the

specified directory.

Requirements

The $JOB card must immediately follow the $SEQUENCE card, or be
the first card if the
$SEQUENCE card is not required.

3-20

COMMANDS

-729 -

3.3.10

$MACRO

Function

disk and is placed
designafed MACRO program ontoinserts
This card causes the CDRSTK to copyam.the When
a COMPL LE
it
card,
the
reads
TK
at the beginning of the source progrfile and copiesCDRS
on the
file
the
into
m
progra
O
MACR
the
monitor command into the control is run, the program is assembled and a temporary relocatspecified disk area. When the jobare created. The binary and listing files can be made perable binary file and listing files
preserved by
e their protection. The source file isoutput
manent if the user renames them to chang
.
listing fileis printed as part of the job's
means of the /PROTECT switch. The

in the command
the MACRO assembler by includinginthem
Processor switches can be passed to nd
ILE comCOMP
the
on
positi
their
ines
determ
string
in the comma
string. Their position
le
mand generated by CDRSTK. For examp
Q)
S, ,
$MACRO /PROTECT:055 (W
results in

Q) /UIST
S,,
_COMPILE /COMPILE DECKCB.MAC /PROTECT:055 (W

Card Format

$MACRO dev:name .ext [proj, progl (processor switches) /51/52' . ./Sn
dev: = a file structure name. If omitted, DSK is assumed.

K assigns a
created on disk. If omitted, CDRSTsion
name. ext = the name of the file to be(aa
.MAC,
exten
the
with
ZZ)
gh
= AA throu

unique filename in the form DECKaa
the
However, it is recommended that the user select a distinct name for each job in
Batch system simultaneously.

that specified on the $JOB card. If omitted,
[proj, prog] = a directory name other than
$JOB card is used.

“the project-programmer number on the

to the MACRO assembler. They must
(processor switches) = the switches to be passed
appear in connection with these
cannot
be enclosed in parentheses and the slash
'

switches.

/S'I/S .. ./Sn ~ the switches that conirol the mode of input interpretafion and the
ing of 2H’xe assembled program.

Switch
/ASCIl |
/ CREF

Meaning
The input is read in ASCII mode.
A cross—referenced listing file is created to be pro-

list-

Default
on
off

cessed by the CREF program.

(continued on next page)

Version 11 CDRSTK

3=21

COMMANDS

- 730
-

Card Format (cont)
Switch

Meaning

/D029

E)efou It

The card deck is read in the old DEC=029 format.

This format is similar to ASCII and available

those installations that use DEC=029 format.

off

only in

JLIST

A temporary listing file of the program
is created.

/NOUST

No listing file of the program is created.

/PROTECT :nnn

The protection to be set for the file (in octal).

/SUPPRESS::

When ON is specified, trailing blanks are
suppressed.
When OFF is specified, they are not suppre
ssed.

off

The file is preserved
only until KJOB for
the job.

ON or OFF

/WIDTH:nn

The maximum number of columns to be typed.
If the
specified width is less than 80, only that number
of
columns is read. The remaining columns are
treated
as blank. Normally, this switch is used
only when

the /SUPPRESS switch is on.

/026

The card deck is read in 026 card code.

off

Restrictions

The /026 and /D029 switches a pply only
to card reader input. Input from other device
s must
be read in ASCII code; otherwise, an error messag
e is written in the log file and the job is

terminated.

3.3.11

$MODE

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to chan ge the
mode in which it is interpreting the input
stream. The
$MODE card can be placed anywhere after
the $PASSWORD card in the command seque
nce
and is termin
ated by arother $MODE card or the

command does not terminate the

end-of-file (which terminates the job).

copying of input preced ed by a

$DECK card.

This

Card Format

SMODE /5./5,.../5

/S]/S .. ./Sr = switches that control the
mode

media.

of readin g and interpreting of the input

These: switches are identical to the switches des

3-22

cribed for the $DATA card.

- 731 -

COMMANDS

Restrictions

The mode switches /026, /IMAGE, /D029, and /BINARY can be used only for card input.

Input from other devices is always read as ASCII code. Thus, the only switches that can be

used with the $MODE card for devices other than the card reader are /SUPPRESS and /WIDTH.

3.3.12

$PASSWORD

Function

This card contains the password associated with the project-programmer number specified in
the $JOB card. If the password does not match the password stored in the system for the speci-

fied project=programmer number, CDRSTK does not create any files and aborts the job.

Use of

this command is an installation opfion.

Card Format

$PASSWORD password

password = 1 to é character passwo‘rd.
Requirements

If the $PASSWORD card is required, it must immediately follow the $JOB card.

3.3.13

$RELOCATABLE
rd

Function

This card causes CDRSTK to copy a relocatable binary program from cards to a file on the user's
disk area.

The cards are read in binary mode.

Card Format

$RELOCATABLE dev :name. ext [proi,prog]‘ /S]
dev: = a file structure name.

If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name
. ext = the name of the file into which the program is copied. If the filename is

omitted, CDRSTK creates a unique name in the form DECKaa (aa = AA through ZZ). It
is recommended that the user select a distinct name for each job in the Batch system

simultaneously.

If the extension is omitted, .REL is assumed.
:
'
(continued on next page)
3-23

-732 -

COMMANDS

Card Format (cont)
[proj, prog] = the disk directory if different from the one specified on the $JOB card.
If omitted, the project-programmer number on the $JOB card is assumed.

/S] = /PROTECT:nnn (octal)
The protection for the file to be created. If not specified, the file is preserved
only until a KJOB command for the job is executed.

Restrictions

Relocatable binary programs can only be read when the input is from cards.
The program following this command must be read in binary; the mode cannot be changed until
a nonbinary file is copied. If an attempt is made to change the mode, an error message will be

issued and the job will be aborted.

3.3.14

$SEQUENCE

Function

This card specifies the job's unique sequence number.
quirements of the particular installation.

The use of this card depends on the re~

_C_c_u;d Format

$SEQUENCE n
n = a decimal number

Requirements

If the installation requires this command, it must be the first card in the input stream.

3.4

BATCON CONTROL FILE COMMANDS

Ordinarily the Batch Controller reads the control file in a sequential manner.

The commands described

in this section can appear in the control file to interrupt the sequential processing of the control file in

order to specify error recovery.

If an error occurs in the job, the Batch Controller is notified of the

error; the user has the option of including several methods of error recovery.
The user may include an .IF command in the control file.

When the error occurs, the Batch Controller

examines the next monitor level line in the control file for an .IF command to determine what action

3-24

- 733 -

COMMANDS

to take on the error. It does not search past the next executable monitor line in the control file for
the .IF command; therefore, if this command is used, it must be the next monitor command in the control file.

If the user does not wish to include an .IF command, he may include two types of error recovery rou=

fines in the control fi le, one type labeled %ERR (error processing for non-system programs) and the
other labeled %CERR (error processing for cémpilers and system programs). A system program is one
found on a device specified in the SYS search list in [1,4].

If SYS is assigned as a logical device

name, the programs are considered user programs, not system programs.

After an error occurs in the

job and the next executable monitor line in the control file is not an. .IF statement, the Batch Controller searches for the labeled error recovery control lines and processes the statements following these
labels.

These routines may be placed anywhere in the control file.

Once the Batch Controller has

processed the routine, it continues from that point in the control file; it does not read backwards over
sections of the control file skipped in searching for the error routines.

The following example shows

the use of a %ERR error recovery routine.

.COMPILE SAMPLE /LISTJ

«MOUNT MTA:3 /VID:42936,)
'
EXECUTE,)
D ISMOUNT

R SORT))

OR@ 4 UAT/kau/Kl.lm)
*MUMP« SRT«F

+QUEUE MUMP «SKT
)
%ERR: «CLOSE)
DUMP)

DISMOUNT 3.

#F IN: «DELETE FOR®4.DATJ
Depending on the type of error found,: the following operations are performed; If a compilation error

the program is compiled,

the tape is mounted,
the program begins execution,
the output is closed,

NOO

occurs, only the compilation and the listing result.

a quick dump of core is taken,

No tape is mounted.

If an execution error results,

the tape is dismounted, and
the file FOR04.DAT is deleted.

If a SORT error occurs, the program compiles, the tape is mounted, the program is executed, and the

NO
O A WN -

file FORO4.DAT is deleted.

Finally, if no errors result,

the program is compiled,
the tape is mounted,
the program is executed,
the tape is dismounted,
the sort is performed,
MUMP. SRT is printed, and
the file FORO4.DAT is deleted.

3-25

COMMANDS

-734 -

When the user is bypassing CDRSTK and creating his own control file, he may place a %FIN af the end

of the control file. (CDRSTK, in creating the control file, automatically places a %FIN at the end.)
This label is used for cleanup purposes, e.g., deleting the input files.

In creating the control file,

the user may place other %FIN's at various points in the file for periodic cleanup of his job. For |
example, this label is used in a special kind of error recovery.

If the time allocated to the job runs

to the maximum limit specified in the $JOB command (refer to Paragraph 3.3.9) or by the Batch system, the user is given an additional 10% of his allocated time to cleanup his job before it is aborted.

Because the user includes a %FIN, cleanup is performed and the resulis of the job's processing are not
dost when the job is aborted.

The user should be careful in using the %FIN in the control file because

if the Batch Controller is searching for an error recovery routine and %FIN is placed before a %ERR or
%CERR, the %FIN is executed and the Batch Controller assumes the error recovery routine has been

satisfied and does not search any longer for %ERR or %CERR.
bypass a %FIN label.

Furthermore, a . GOTO label cannot

Therefore, the best place to put a %FIN is as the last line in the control file.

If an error occurs in the job and the user either was not running a system program or has not included
an .IF command or error recovery control lines, the Batch Coniroller initiates a standard quick dump

of the user's core area and terminates the job (refer to the DUMP command in Chapter 2).

The Batch

Controller also initiates a dump if it is searching for a %ERR and reads a %FIN instead.

3.4.1

.BACKTO

Function

The .BACKTO command is used by Batch users to interrupt the sequential reading of the control
file by the Batch Controller. Conirol is transferred in a backward direction. This command
can be used with a .IF command to specify transfer of control to an error routine.
Command Format
.BACKTO label

label = label of a statement in the control file.

This label is from one to six alpha-

numeric characters terminated with a colon and must not begin with a % character.

When the .BACKTO command is encountered, the Batch Controller searches for the labeled
statement and transfers control to it. If the statement is not found, the job is terminated.

3-26

- 735 -

)

COMMANDS
3.4.2
.CHKPNT

Function

ry when a Batch job is terminated abnorThe . CHKPNT.command is used to aid in error recove
ds as desired can be placed in the
comman
NT
_CHKP
many
As
mally. by a system failure.
, the program begins at the location
control file. When the job is restarted after the failureing
of the program.
of the last . CHKPNT command instead of at the beginn

Command Format

.CHKPNT label

to five alphalabel = label of a statement in the control file._ This label is fromin one
control file, it
the
t
statemen
the
with
appears
label
the
When
numeric characters.
(e.g.,

must be followed by a double colon instead of the usual single colon
label :: statement).

3.4.3
.ERROR

Function

The .ERROR command causes the Batch Controller fo recognize a message beginning with the

specified character.as an error in the job.
Command Format
.ERROR character

character = the beginning character of the line that is fo be recognized as aniserror
(e.g., %). If this argument is not specified, a ? af the beginning of a line con=

sidered as an error.

3.4.4
.GOTO

Function

of the control
The .GOTO command is used by Batch users to interrupt the sequential reading
command may
This
n.
directio
forward
a
in
ed
transferr
is
Control
file by the Batch Controller.
routfine.
an error
be used with a .IF command to specify transfer of control to

Version 6 BATCON

3-27

COMMANDS

- 736 -

Command Format
.GOTO label

label = label of a statement in the control file.

is from one to six alpahnumeric characters

with a % character.

The label appearing in the control file

terminated with o colon and must not begin

When the . GOTO command is encountered,
the Batch Controller searches for the labeled

statement and transfers control to
it.

If the statement is not found before

trol file is reached, the job is terminated.

the end of the con-

Examples
X

TEST.MAC
/L

«IF

(ERROR)

«GOTO

A QUEUE
GOTO

.GOTO

LFT:=TFST .MAC

HBeas

3.4.5

F
R

——

Function

The .IF command is used by Batch users to
Batch Controller recognizes the existence

aid the Batch Controller in processing errors.

The

of an error when it encounters a line beginn
ing with

a question mark that is cutput from the
job to the log file or a line that begins
with the character specified in the . ERROR comman
d. When the error occurs, this comma
nd must be the
next monitor level command in the control
file.

Command Format

IF (condition) statement
(condition) = ERROR or NOERROR.

The parentheses must be included.

statement = an executable monito

r or batch command preceded by
a period.

If the specified conditior is true, the statem
ent is executed. If the specified condition
is not
true, the Batch Controller processes the next
line in the control file.

3-28

-737 -

COMMANDS

3.4.6

. NOERROR

Function

" The . NOERROR command instructs the Batch Controller to ignore all errors (including messages '
beginning with a question mark) in the job.

ever, the message

This is especially useful in TECO searches.
'

How-

?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED

always indicates that an error exists.
&

Command Format
.NOERROR

3.4.7

.NOOPERATOR

Function

The

.NOOPERATOR command designates that no messages from the job are to be output to

the controlling terminal.
Command Format
.NOOPERATOR

3.4.8

. OPERATOR

Function

The . OPERATOR command makes it possible for the job, or a program within the job, to communicate with the operator. Any message from the job, starting with the specified character
(refer to Chapter 4), is typed on the conirolling terminal. The job then waits for operator
intervention and the operator's answer restarts the job.
(continued on next page)

3-29

COMMANDS

-738 -

Function (cont)
When the . OPERATOR command is in effect, the Batch Controller ignores an .IF statement un-

less the . NOOPERATOR command is given first, and proceeds to search for an error recovery

routine labeled with either %ERR: or %CERR: (refer to Paragraph 3.4).

This action is taken in

order to minimize output to the operator in case of an unexpected transfer of control.

However,

when an error occurs, the Batch Controller preserves the error status across the . NOOPERATOR
command and looks for the .IF statement as the next monitor-level command.
an .IF statement following a . NOOPERATOR command will be executed.

In other words,

Refer to the follow-

ing examples.
In the example below, the .IF statement will be ignored.
JOFERATOR

+IF

TFSPRG

(EKKOK)

«GOTO

TAG

However, in the following example, the .IF statement will be executed.

CPERATOR

KIUIN

TESFKG

NOOPFRATOR
«IF

(FREOK)

+30TC

TAG

Command Format

. OPERATOR character
character = the beginning character of the line that is to be sent to the operator

(e.g., %).

If this argument is not specified, $ at the beginning of the line is assumed.

3.4.9

.REQUEUE
»

Function

The .REQUEUE commard indicates to the Batch Controller that the job is to be requeued,
instead of terminated, after an error. It is normally used with the .IF (ERROR) command (e.g.,
IF (ERROR) .REQUEUE). The {ob is restarted after a default requeue time at the specified

label in the control file.

Command Format

.REQUEUE label

Version 6 BATCON

3-30

COMMANDS

-739 -

3.4.10
.REVIVE

Function

The .REVIVE command causes all output from the job to be placed in the log file.
Command Format
.REVIVE

3.4.11

.SILENCE

Function

error messages fo the log file.
The .SILENCE command suppresses all output from the job except
that begin with a question
those
be
will
file
log
the
in
g
appearin
lines
only
This means that the
mark.

Command Format
.SILENCE

3.5

JOB OUTPUT

The output from a usef's job is normally in the form of printed listings containing the user's job output,

compi lation listings, any memory dumps requested by the user or initiated by the Batch Contro”er, and

from
the log file indicating the processing performed by the programs in the Batch system. The results
the job and the log filé are automatically placed in the queue for the line printer spooler, LPTSPL,
unless the job was submitted with the /OUTPUT:O switch. However, the user can output to any device
in the system. When a user program specifies a slow=speed spooling device, the Batch system places
the output into a queue for the appropriate spooler. If the user wishes specific files o be output

particular spooled devices outside of his programs, he can include the QUEUE monitor commands in his
control file to specify the output device and any additional parameters that he wishes.

Compilation listings are produced from the $language control cards unless the user specifies otherwise.
These listings are automatically spooled to the line printer. } The user can also include the COMPILE
C

monitor command in his job with switches to produce listings.
3-31

COMMANDS

- 740 -

The user can include any of the monitor DUMP commands or the
ory dumps during program testing.

CDRSTK card $DUMP to request mem~

Under normal error conditions, the Batch Controller performs
an

automatic two-page dump for the user (refer to Paragraph
3.4).

3.5.1

The Log File

As part of its processing, CDRSTK creates a log file for each job so
that the user can examine the
processing performed by the CDRSTK and BATCON
programs.

output.

The log file is the first part of the job's.

CDRSTK enters a record of its own processing, any errors detected,
and any operator inter-

ventions.

When the job is run, the Batch Controller places additional
messages into the log file, in-

cluding each line of the control file as it is passed to the job,
any error conditions, and any operator

actions. The LOGOUT program abpends an accounting summary message to the log file when
the
terminates.

tem (refer to the KJOB command in Chapter 2).

Note that the log file is appended to for jobs of the

same name; thus it may be necessary to delete this file
before running another

3.5.1.1

job

This message is similar fo the message received when
an interactive user logs off the sys-

CDRSTK Messages - CDRSTK places six kinds of messages

each message is identified by the time that CDRSTK placed
tifying word in columns 1 through 16.

job with the same name.

into the log file.

The first line of

the message into the file and by an iden~

The identifier for each kind-of message is taken from the

following group:
DATE -~ gives the date, system name, CDRSTK versi on,
and the input device.
STACK -~ identifies any CDRSTK nonerror message.

STERR -- identifies any CDRSTK error message.

CARD == describes any card image not in an error message
STSUM -- identifies the summary message at the end of
STOPR -~ describes any operator actions that occurred

the CDRSTK's processing.

during the CDRSTK's processing.

The first entry in the log file always contains the identifie
r DATE and a

message giving the date, the

system name, the current version of CDRSTK, and
the input device; for example,

10:20:06 DATE 13-MAY-71 5S03C System 40 CDRSTK version
7 device CDR1

The $SEQUENCE and the $JOB commands are the next two
is never printed for reasons of security.

lines printed.

The $PASSWORD command

When the end-of-file is read, CDRSTK prints a summary
mes-

sage giving the number of cards read, the number
of files and blocks written, and the number of each

type of error that occurred.

The summary is also placed in the system accounting

of the job summary is given below.

3-32

file.

An example

- 741 -

COMMANDS

1125:38 STSUM End-of=File after 423 cards, 3 files (40 blocks) written

4 Hollerith errors (nonfatal)

2 Binary Sequence errors (fatal)
Job Aborted by CDRSTK

Between the beginning and ending messages, CDRSTK prints any operator actions as they occur, some
of nonerror mesnonerror messages, and reports of errors it has detected. The following are examples:
sages from CDRSTK.

CARD

$JOB TESTA, [10,225]

STOPR

JOB STOPPED BY OPERATOR

STOPR

CONTINUED BY OPERATOR

3.5.1.2 CDRSTK Error Reporting = CDRSTK places messages in the log file that describe errors that
have occurred during its processing. The following errors are detected, and their degree of severity
is as specified:

- Fatal Errors

Error on the $JOB card.
Error on the $PASSWORD card.

Unrecognizable command on a CDRSTK confrol card.
Error in & parameter on a CDRSTK control card.

Binary sequence error ~ issued a maximum of five times per deck.
~ Improper code (binary rather than Hollerith, or vice versa).

Nonfatal » Errors

Hollerith error (invalid punch).

Missing end-of=file card:

Error messages are issued by CDRSTK to the log file either up to the first fatal error, or, for nonfatal

errors, up to a maximum of 200 errors or errors on 10% of the total card count, whichever is greater.
However, CDRSTK continues processing the job up to the end-of-file. The following are examples of
error messages placed in the log file by CDRSTK.
JOB ABORTED BY OPERATOR

JOB ABORTED -~ HOLLERITH ERRORS

CARD #ann

FATAL CARD |

CARD #nnn

COL #nnn

CARD #nnn

CARD SEQUENCE ERROR

CARD #nnn

SWITCH ERROR

CARD #nnn

MODE ERROR

NON=-BINARY CARD IN BINARY DECK
3-33

COMMANDS

- 742 -

Each card-reading error results in a message which includes the first card

column in error, the deck

number and columns 1 through 30 of the $DECK card, and the card number
within the deck and within
the job.

The faulty card image appears on the next line with a backward slash
(\) indicating the col-

umn in error.

11:15:05 STERR Hollerith error at col. 7 of card 241, card 73 in deck 2 (SFORTRAN
MAIN)

3 \ORMAT (‘FOO")
€

3.5.1.3

Batch Controller Messages = The Batch Controller messages are similar to those

of the Stacker.

The times followed by an identifying notation are placed in columns 1 through 16
of the first line of

each message.

The identifiers for the Batch Controller messages are described in the

list below:

BVERS -~ denotes the version of BATCON.

BDATE -- identifies the date BATCON processed the job.

BATCH -- identifies any Batch Controller nonerror message.
BAOPR -- describes any operator action.
BAERR -~ denotes any Batch Controller error message:

MONTR -- identifies a line input or output at monitor level.

USER -~ describes any line input or output at user level.

BASUM =~ gives the Batch Controller summary message.
The first line in the log file printed by the Batch Controller is the

version number.

As each line in

the control file is read, it is printed in the log file as well as being
passed to the user program
the monitor.

Any time that the operator performs some action that affects the

records it in the log file.
a monitor command.

or to

job, the Batch Controller

The BATCON program enters amessage in the log file every
time it generates

For example, if a fatal error occurs in the job and the user
has not included

.IF statement, a %ERR routine or a %CERR routine in the control
file, the Batch Controller generates
a DUMP command.

It also generates a LOGIN and a KJOB monitor command for each
job.

Any errors in the input that are detected by the Batch Controlle

r are printed in the log file.

3.5.1.4

Batch Controller Error Reporting = The Batch Controller places
the identifier BAERR

line that it detects as being an error.

on any

The errors that are detected are listed below; the first three

are fatal errors.
a.

Missing condition (ERROR or NOERROR) or missing statement in
Missing statement label in the . GOTO or

an .IF statement.

BACKTO command.

The labeled statement in a . GOTO command cannot be
found after the . GOTO or before

the .BACKTO command in the control file.
d.

Use of the ATTACH, DETACH, SEND, CCONT, and CSTART
monitor commands.

3-34

COMMANDS

- 743 -

Most user error conditions are not flagged by the Batch Controller, they are passed to the monitor
where they are flagged as errors.

3.6

SAMPLE JOBS

The following sample job setups illustrate the versatility of the Batch System.

The first example, Figure 3=2, shows a setup to list a card deck with the QUEUE monitor command.

$PASSW SAMPLE

E
J. JONES
§J40B TEST1[15,27]/NAM

10-0730

Figure 3-2

Sample Job #1

The second example, Figure 3-3, produces a CREF listing of a MACRO deck whether or not errors
occur in the program.

The third example, Figure 3-4, illustrates the use of error processing commands.

3=35

COMMANDS

- 744 -

$PASSWORD HENRY

$J0B OUT [30,40]/NAME:
H. MURES!

10-0728

Figure 3=-3

Sample Job #2

Y n' OR ANYTHING

+GOTO A
®

—]

= TESTX

B: .R CREF

—,

10-0727

Figure 34

Sample Job #3

3-36

COMMANDS

- 745 -

Figfire 3-5 illustrates ¢ MACRO assembly, two FORTRAN compilations, and execution of all three
programs, and shows how monitor commands are entered along with the programs and the Stacker
control cards.

]

/- DIRECTORY

FORTRAN SOURCE PROGRAM

$DECK ABL2, F4
+COMPILE /C ABL 1.F4/LIST

$EOD

MACRO SOURCE PROGRAM

$DECK TEMPR. MAC
$PASSWORD ABCDE

$J0B ABLE [17,127] /CORE: 2K
$SEQUENCE 9999

10-0726

Figure 3=5 Sample Job #4

3=-37

COMMANDS

=746 -

Figure 3-6 shows a simple SOUP vpdat

files are on DECtape and the correction

Three base fi les are copied from cards

from DEC is on paper tape.

I
|
'

]

*DISMOUNT DTA,PTR

*DSK:[ll,128],LPT=-DSKI,DSN[H,1 27]|

/'R FED

/DSK:[HJZ?].LPTZ-—DSKZ,FOOZ,F'TRil

/R cam

$DECK BASE 3.MAC

*MOUNT PTR: ; PAPERTAPE

-MOUNT DTA: FOO/VIDZS152‘I
$PASSWORD MIKEL

$J0B SuPD[22,567] /AFTERZEI
$ SEQUENCE 840

Figure 3-6

Sample Job #5

3-38

to disk.

The user

- 747 -

COMMANDS

CHAPTER 4

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

The following conventions are used in describing the system diagnostic messages:
dev

represents a legal device name.~

file structure name

represents a legal file structure name.

file.ext

represents a legal filename and extension.

adr

represenfs a user address.

represents a number.

abc

represents a disk unit or drive.

switch

represents an alphabetic character

represents a switch.

Most messages returned to the user fall in one of five categories. These categories are determined by
the beginning character of the message.

2 of the start of the message indicates a fatal error message.
% at the start of the message represents an advisory or warning message.
[ ot the beginning of the message indicates a comment line.

$ at the beginning of the message represents an operator/job communication
line. A response is expected.

' (quote) ot the beginning of the message represents a comment fo the operator.
No response is expected.

‘

Programs and/or commands causing the error message are given in parentheses. (Note that the ONCE-

only messages have been removed and placed in ONCE.RNO in the DECsystem-10 Software Notebooks.)
The descriptive text given with the message indicates what action the user should take when he
receives the message. He can, if necessary, notify the operator of any problems that he is having by
issuing the SEND, PLEASE, or R GRIPE command.

COMMANDS
4.1

- 748 -

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

The typein is typed back preceded and follow

ed by ?

The monitor encountered an incorrect charac

ter (e.g., a letter in a numeric argument).

incorrect character appears immediately

before the second ?.

The

For example:
.CORE ABC

PCORE A?
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM FAILURE. . .

A program could not append an entry to

(LOGIN, LOGOUT).

the accounting file.

Notify the operator.

YADDRESS CHECK FOR DEVICE dev

(1) The monitor checked a user address 6n a UUO

and found it to be oo large (>C(. JBREL))

or
too small (<C(.JBPF1)); in other words,
the address lies outside the bounds of the
user program
(2) The SAVed file is too large for the core

(GET).

assigned, or the file is not a core image file.

$ALL AREAS ON BACKUF
The BACKUP program has processed all
now closing the associated files.

of the project-programmer numbers specif

ied and is

(BACKUP).

?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB n

The device is already assigned to another

user's job (job n)."

?AMBIGUOUS ABBREVIATION

A command or switch has been abbreviated
?ARGS ARE:

to the point that it is not unique. (COMP
I L).

DAY, RUN, WAIT, READ, WRITE, VERSI
ON, ALL, NONE

The user either did nct type an argument or

command string.

typed an illegal argument in the SET WATC

dev: ASSIGNED

The device has been successfully assigned

to the user's job.

?ASSIGNED TO JOB LIV PV

If there is more thar one device of the fype

specified, the numbers of the other jobs that
have

the same type of device are output, unless
the user assigning the device has

the specified type.

In this case, ?DEVICE ASSIGNED TO JOB
is output.

?ATTACH TO USER JOB FAILED
DAEMON could not attach to the user's

job.

4-2

(DAEMON).

all the devices of

- 749 -

COMMANDS

$BACKUP COMPLETED AT time

The BACKUP program has successfully completed. (BACKUP).

2BAD DENSITY

The value given with the DENSITY command was not valid: (RESTORE).

?BAD DIRECTORY FOR DEVICE DTAn

kind of error. This
The system cannot read or write the DECtape directory without gettingorsome
a
use DECtape that

error often occurs when the user tries to write on a write~locked tape
has never been written on.

?BATCH ONLY

The command issued can only be given by a batch job.
BLOCK NOT FREE

M specifies a unit or file structure logical block that is not free. (ALCFIL).

n BLOCKS ALREADY ALLOCATED

The file already exists. The new specification replaces, rather than updates, the old

specification. (ALCFIL).

?n1K BLOCKS OF CORE NEEDED

The user's current core allocation is less than the contents of . JBFF,

?BOMB OUT

The location within INITIA that detected the error will be in AC 15 and the console lights.
,
(INITIA).

2BOOTSTRAP LOADER IS NOT IN COPY; TRY /L

An attempt was made to write the bootstrap loader onto a DECtape via the /T switch before the
loader was loaded into a core buffer and preserved with the COPY' core image. (COPY
program).

2BOOTSTRAP LOADER WILL NOT FIT IN 3 BLOCKS
The user's bootstrap loader is too big to fit into blocks 0, 1, and 2 of the output DECtape.
(COPY program).

2BUFFER CAPACITY EXCEEDED AND NO CORE AVAILABLE

The buffer is not large enough to handle the number of lines required for looking ahead for
matches, and additional core is not available. (FILCOM).

2BUSY

command
The terminal addressed is not communicating with the monitor (i.e., it is accepting a JCONT).
or returning output from a command). The operator's terminal is never busy. (SEND,
4-3

COMMANDS

- 750 -

?CANNOT DO 1/O AS REQUESTED
L

Input (or output) connot be performed on one of the devices specified

for input (output).

For
example, input may have been requested for a device that can only do
output. (FUDGE2).
?CANNOT DO OUTPUT TO DEVICE dev

Output was attempted to a device that can only do input, or to a device
assigned a logical

nome. (QUEUE).

?CANNOT PROCESS EXTERNAL SYMBOLS
External symbols were encountered while loading the bootstrap
loader with the /L switch.

(COPY program).

?CANNOT PROCESS HIGH SEG'S

While loading the boctstrap loader with the /L switch, high segment
code was encountered.

(COPY program).

?CANNOT REATTACH FROM A BATCH SUBJOB
Batch jobs are not allowed to reattach their jobs.

(REATTA).

$9%CANT ACCESS COMMAND FILE - CONTINUING
The command recovery file is not being created. This file contains
information as to how much
of the user's command has been processed and how much is remaining.
Without this file, the
user must start at the beginning if the system crashes.

(BACKUP, RESTORE).

?CANT ACCESS DEVICE dev

The device specified cannot be INITed. The device is either in use
or has an error, such as,
being off-line. The user should request another device, or check
this device for errors.
(BACKUP, RESTORE).

$%CANT ACCESS -INDEX DEVICE - CONTINUING dev
The device specified for the index file cannot be INITed and an index
file is not being

created.

The user can start over if he wants to create an index file.

(BACKUP, RESTORE).

?CANT ACCESS SYSTEM FILES

ACCT.SYS could not be read.

Only the operator may LOGIN until ACCT. SYS is ready.
Consult the operator. (LOGIN).
'

?CANT ADD TO YOUR FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST n
n is the error code from STRUUO when trying to add a file

structure to search list. (LOGIN).

?CANT ATT TO JOB

The project-programmer number specified is not that of the owner

project-programmer number was not given when it was

incorrect. (ATTACH).

4-4

of the desired job, the

required, or the PASSWORD given was

-751-

COMMANDS

?dev CANT BE REASSIGNED

(1) The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned, or (2) the logical name would be dup=~
licated, or (3) the logical name is a physical device name in the system and the job reassigning the device is either logged-in under a different project-programmer number or does not
have operator privileges. (REASSIGN).

?CANT CONTINUE

The job was terminated due to (1) all ERROR IN JOB messages (except for HALT), (2) the
EXIT UUO, (3) the CLOSE command, or (4) the REA command when the device was INITed,
and the user attempted to continue his program at the point at which I/O was terminated.

job cannot be continued.

CANT CREATE NEW FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST
The monitor cannot create a new file structure search list.
?CANT DECIPHER COMMAND
The command typed isnot recognized by the BACKUP program. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

?CANT DECIPHER THAT

‘

There is a syntax error in the command string. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT, FILE).

?CANT DET DEV
The user is not logged-in under [1,2].

? CANT ENTER OUTPUT FILE n file descriptor
The ENTER fo write the output file failed; n is the disk error code. (DUMP).

?CANT EXPAND TABLE xxxx
The DUMP program ran out of core in attempting to expand the indicated table. (DUMP).

?CANT FIND INPUT FILE n file descriptor
DUMP cannot locate the file specified as the input file; n is the disk error code. (DUMP).

?CANT FIND FILE file.ext
The specified file could not be found.

?CANT GET SWAPPING PARAMETERS
DAEMON tried to obtain the job's swapping parameters and failed. (DAEMON).

?CANT GET SWAPPING POINTER FOR JOB
DAEMON tried to obtain the pointer to the user's job on the swapping space and could not

because the GETTAB UUO failed. (DAEMON).

The

COMMANDS

- 752 -

?CANT GET USERS PPN

DAEMON tried to obtain the user's project~programmer number and could not because a
GETTAB UUO failed. (DAEMON).
?CANT OPEN file structure name

The file structure is mounted but cannot be opened.
already exist. (LOGIN).

No UFD is created, though one may

?CANT OPEN CHANNEL FOR DEVICE dev

The OPEN on the channel for the named device failed. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

2 CANT OPEN DEVICE dev
The specified device does not exist or it is assigned to another user . (DAEMON),
?CANT OPEN INDEX FILE

The OPEN failed for the index file. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

?CANT OPEN SWAP UNIT abc
DAEMON attempted tc use the indicated swapping unit and failed. (DAEMON).

?CANT RELEASE UFD INTERLOCK FOR dev [p,p]

The UFD interlock cannot be released for the named device. (BACKUP).
?CANT RENAME -FILE PRESERVED

An attempt was made via the /DISPOSE:RENAME switch to delete a preserved file (i.e., a
file whose owner's field is greater than 0). (QUEUE).
?CANT SET OUR SEARCH LIST

DAEMON tried to set its search list and failed in its attempt. (DAEMON).
P?CANT SET SEARCH UST = USER'S

DAEMON attempted to set its file structure search list to be the same as the user's search list.
(DAEMON).
?COMMAND ERROR

General catch-all error response for most commands.

The syntax of the command is in error,

and the command carnot be deciphered.

BWN
—

In FILCOM, one of the following errors occurred in the last command string typed.
There is no separator (« or =) between the output and input specifications.
The input specification is completely null.
The two input files are not separated by a comma.

A file descriptor consists of characters other than alphanumeric characters.

(continued on next page)

4-6

COMMANDS

o N OO

- 753 -

FILCOM does not recognize the specified switch.
is not in standard format, i.e., [proj,prog].
The project-programmer number
The value of the specified switch is not octal.
The first input file is followed by a comma but the second input file is null.

?COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR
TYPE /H FOR HELP

An illegdl command string was entered. (GLOB).
?COMMA REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY

' A project=programmer number has been specified without the separating. comma.

(DUMP, QUEUE, BACKUP, RESTORE).

CONT BY OPR

by the operator. This message appears on the console of the job
The job has been continued-

being continued. (JCONT).

?CONTROL AND LOG FILES MU.ST BE DISTINCT

The control file cannot be the same file as the log file. (QUEUE).
?2K CORE NEEDED AND NOT AVAILABLE

FILCOM needs 2K of core to initialize 1/O devices and this core is not available from the
:

monitor. (FILCOM).

9%CPUn OPR1 ACTION REQUESTED
The Job's CPU specification includes a CPU which is not running or is not scheduling jobs.
The monitor remembers the specification and uses the CPU as soon as it is started. If at least
one CPU is running, the message is printed only once, since the job can run on another CPU.
?DAEMON FILE MUST BE WRITTEN ON A DISK

The device specified was a nondisk device. (DAEMON).
?DAEMON NOT RUNNING

The DAEMON program has not been initialized. It must be started by the operator to allow

the DUMP and DCORE commands to operate. (DUMP, DCORE).

?DETACH UUO FAILED
|

DAEMON could not detach itself from the TTY. Note that DAEMON does not detach itself

if it is loaded with DDT. (DAEMON),

?DATA ERROR ON DEVICE PTR

A read error has occurred
on the paper-tape reader. (COPY program).

4-7

COMMANDS

- 754 -

?DESTINATION DEVICE ERROR
An 1/O error occurred on the output device. (GLOB).

?DEVICE CANT BE REASSIGNED

(1) The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned, (2) the logical name would be duplicated, or (3) the logical name is a physical device name and the job reassigning the device is

either logged in under a different project-programmer number or is not the operator.
?DEVICE ERROR ON OUTPUT DEVICE

A write error has occurred on the output file. (FUDGE2).
?DEVICE INIT FAILURE

The specified device has been assigned to another job or does not exist. (COPY program).
?DEVICE MTAn NEEDS A WRITE RING, INSERT ONE AND TYPE <CR>

This message is returned by the BACKUP and RESTORE programs.
?DEVICE MUST BE A DECTAPE

The only device that can be specified in the COPY command string is the DECtape. (COPY
program).
?DEVICE dev NOT A DIRECTORY DEVICE

This message is returned by the BACKUP program.
?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE

A non-privileged user cannot assign the requested device because it belongs to the restricted
pool of devices.
(ASSIGN).

The user should try to assign the device with the MOUNT command.

?DEVICE NOT AVAILABLE
Specified device cannot be initialized because another user is using it or because it does not

exist.

?DEVICE WILDCARD ILLEGAL

The wildcard construction cannot be used in the device specification.
BACKUP, RESTORE).

(DUMP, QUEUE,

?DIALOG MODE NOT SUPPORTED

The capability of interactive dialogue with the user has not been implemented. (QUEUE).

?DIRECTORY FULL ON OUTPUT DEVICE

There is no room in the file directory on the output device to add the updated file (nondisk
devices only). (FUDGE2).

4-8

- 755 device name DISMOUNTED

COMMANDS

]

The DISMOUNT command has completed. .
?device name DISMOUNT INCOMPLETE

The DISMOUNT command was unsuccessful. In most cases, the reasons for failure have already
been listed by nonerror messages.

DONT KNOW CTY LINE NUMBER

The DCORE command cannot be typed on CTY. (DAEMON).
?DOUBLE DEVICE ILLEGAL

Two device names appeared-in a row without an intervening filename, or two colons appeared
in o row, e.g., LPT:PTP: or DSKA ::FILEX. (DUMP, QUEUE).

2DOUBLE DIRECTORY 1LLEGAL

Two directory names cannot appear without an intervening filename. (DUMP, QUEUE).

?DOUBLE EXTENSION ILLEGAL

Two extensions cannot appear without an intervening fi lename or comma. (DUMP, QUEUE).
?DOUBLE FILENAME ILLEGAL

Two filenames appeared in a row, or two periods appeared in a row; e.g., Q TESTI TESTZ or
TEXTX..MAC. (DUMP, QUEUE).

DPAn NO DRIVE AVAILABLE ON THIS CONTROLLER

The drives on the specified controller are all in use: (MOUNT).
?DSK CANT BE REASSIGNED

An attempt was made to reassign the prototype disk device.data block (DDB).
?DSKCHR FAILURE n ON UNIT abc

The DSKCHR UUO gave an unexpec’red error refurn; n is the disk error code. Notify the

operator. (DAEMON, KJOB).
%END OF TAPE id ON dev .

PLEASE MOUNT TAPE id+1 AND TYPE <CR> TO CONTINUE:

This message is sent to the operator. (RESTORE).
%END OF TAPE id ON dev

- PLEASE MOUNT NEXT TAPE AND TYPE <CR> TO CONTINUE
This message is sent to the operator.

(BACKUP).

4=9

COMMANDS

=756 -

%END OF TAPE n ON MTAnR AT fime

The end of the tape has been reached. (RESTORE).

DPA’

$END OF TAPE n ON MTA> x AT time
DSK

This message appears in the log file. (BACKUP).
?ENTER ERROR n
?DIRECTORY FULL

No additional files can be added to the directory of the output

(GLOB).

device; n is the disk error code.

?ENTER FAILURE

The DECtape directory is full (i.e., there is no room for the file

to be written on the DECtape).

?ENTER FAILURE n

The output filename is null; n is the error code for an illegal
filename (nondisk devices only).
"(FUDGE2).
?ENTER FAILURE FOR INDEX FILE

The ENTER failed for the index file. (BACKUP).
?ENTER FAILURE IN QUEUE MANAGER

QUEUE was unable to enter the files into the output queve.

PENTER FAILURE n ON {CLL

DAEMON

(QUEUE).

} FILE

The ENTER to write the file failed; n is the disk error code.
PENTRY BLOCK TOO LARGE PROGRAM name

The entry block of the named program is too large for the FUDGE2
entry table, which allows
for 100 entry names. FUDGE2 can be reassembled with o larger
table. (FUDGE2).
?ERROR CLOSING OUTPUT, STATUS = n

An 1/0 error occurred while closing the file on disk; n is the disk error

code. (DUMP).

?ERROR IN JOB n
A fatal error occurred in the job or in the monitor while servicing
the job.
usually precedes a one-line description of the error.

4-10

This typeout

COMMANDS

- 757 ?EXCEED LOG-OUT m QUOTA BY n BLOCKS

The total number of blocks for all the user's files exceeds the maximum permitted value (m) by
the indicated amount n. The user may use PIP or the DELETE command to remove files. Until
the user is under the limit, he cannot dismount the file structure. (DISMOUNT).

?EXECUTION DELETED

A program is prevented from being executed because of errors detected during assembly, compilation, or loading. Loading is performed, but the loader exits to the monitor without starting execution. (LOADER).

?EXPECTED FORMAT 1S "NNNK" = 16K to 256K

The core~bank specified while processing the /T switch is not within the acceptable range or

does not terminate with the letter K; e.g., 32 is not acceptable; 32K is. (COPY program).

%FAILURE ON { ENTER L FOR ERROR FILE--CONTINUING
The error file could not be generated. The BACKUP program is continuing without one.
(BACKUP).

?FAILURE ON

INIT

OPEN

FOR LOG FILE

The log file could not be generated. (BACKUP, RESTORE).
%FAILURE OUTPUTTING ERROR FILE-~CONTINUING

The error file could not be output. The BACKUP program is.continuing ifs processing.
(BACKUP, RESTORE).

[pro, prog]
| \eny £OR devpret,p
%EAILURE { READING
CREATING

The UED for the named device could not be read (BACKUP) or created (RESTORE).

%FAILURE TO INTERLOCK UFD FOR dev [proj,prog]

The UED interlock for the named device failed. (BACKUP).

file structure name FILE ERRORS EXIST
One of the files in a file structure has an error status, as flagged in the UFD of that file
»

structure. (LOGIN).

?FILENAME ALREADY IN USE

The specified file already exists. (COMPIL).

?FILENAME REQUIRED FOR INPUT QUEUE

A file cannot be entered into the Batch input queve without a filename. (QUEUE).

4-11

COMMANDS

- 758 -

?FILE n NOT IN SAV FORMAT

The user indicated via the /X switch that the file is to be expanded but the specified
not in compressed file format.

(FILCOM).

file is

N is either 1 or 2 indicating the first file or the second file.

?FILE n READ ERROR

An error has occurred on either the first or second input device. (FILCOM).
PFILE SWITCHES ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT FILE

File switches cannot cppear on the left of the equal sign, i.e., in the output specification.

(QUEUE).

?(3) FILE WAS BEING MODIFIED-file. ext
Another user is modifying the file. (COMPIL).

?(0) FILE WAS NOT FOUND-file.ext
The named file could not be located. (COMPIL).
?FORMAT OR READ ERROR IN AUXACC.SYS

Notify the operator.

(LOGIN).

file.ext FOUND BAD BY FAILSAFE READING MTA
The file in the file structure has an error status as flagged in the UFD

(LOGIN).

of the file structure.

FROM JOB n
An informative message telling the user the job number to which the console
from which the console is detaching.

(ATTACH, DETACH).

was attached or

?FUDGE2 SYNTAX ERROR

An illegal command string was entered; for example, the left arrow was
omitted or a program
name was specified for the output file.

(FUDGE2).

?GIVING BACK TOO MUCH CORE
An infernal problem in the DUMP program.

specialist. (DUMP).

Notify your system programmer or software

?HALT AT USER adr

The user's program executed a HALT instruction at adr.

at the effective address of the HALT instruction.

4-12

Typing CONTINUE resumes execution

COMMANDS

- 759 file.ext HARDWARE DATA READ ERROR DETECTED

ture. (LOGIN).

file.ext HARDWARE DATA WRITE ERROR DETECTED

(LOGIN).

The file has a hardware data read error flagged in the UFD of the file struc

The file has a hardware data write error flagged in the UFD of the fi le structure.

d after it is referenced, the system decides
nd within a certaintsperio
If a device doesisnotnotrespo
functioning and outpu this message.

?HUNG DEVICE dev

" that the device

ape. (BACKUP).

?1LLEGAL BACKUP DEVICE

The BACKUP operations can be done only on disk, magnetic tape, and DECt

?1LLEGAL BLOCK TYPE

trap loader with the /L‘ switch, an unrecogni
While loading the boots(CO
PY program).
countered by COPY.

21LLEGAL COMMAND SYNTAX CHARACTER x

The character x is used incorrectly in the command string. (QUEUE,

zable block type was en-

BACKUP).

21LLEGAL DATA MODE FOR DEVICE dev AT USER adr

The data mode specified‘ for a device in the user's program is illegal, such

as dump mode for

the terminal.

2drive ILLEGAL DRIVE NAME

d by the user is in).conflict with the unit or controller type
The drive specifiestruc
ture. (MOUNT
units of the file

required by the

cannot be used by a

21LLEGAL IN BATCH JOB

The ATTACH, DETACH,' SEND, CCONT, and CSTART monitor commands
batch job.

?ALLEGAL JOB NUMBER

iguration.

The job number is too large or is not defined in this conf

21LLEGAL QUEUE DEVICE

UE).

The queue name specified cannot be used with the given switch. (QUE

. (QUEUE).

2ILLEGAL QUEUE NAME xxx

The queve is not one of the system queuves, or the queue is a logical name

4-13

COMMANDS

- 760 -

?ILLEGAL TO CREATE REQ

UEST FOR SOMEONE ELSE

Only the operator logged in unde

r 1,2 can create queveing reque

TILLEGAL UUO AT USER

st for other users. (QUEUE).

adr

An illegal UUO was executed

at user location adr.

2ILL INST. AT USER adr
An illegal operation code was

encountered in the user's prog

ram.

?ILL MEM REF AT USER adr

An illegal memory reference

was made by the user's program.

If this

message occurred on a
memory write, the error
is at adr-1 since the prog
ram counter has been
advanced.
If it occyrred on a memory read

, then the illegal instructio
n is probably in location adr.
The user should
use the E command to first
examine location adr-1 and
then location adr in order
to determine
the illegal instr

uction. The index registers may
also

?INDEX FILE CANNOT GO

have to be examined.

TO A LISTING DEVICE

This message is returned by the

BACKUP and RESTORE programs.

?INPUT AND OUTPUT DECT

APES MAY NOT BE THE SAM

E DEVICE

The COPY program performs

its operations on an input DECt
ape and an output DECtape.
. (COPY program).
'

DECtapes cannot be the same

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) BLOCK

These

TOO LARGE

A DECtape block number great

er than 1101 g Was encountered.

(COPY: program).

2INPUT (or QUTPUT ) CHECKS

UM OR PARITY ERROR

A read (or write) error has been
?INPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT

detected. ,(COPY program).

DO OUTPUT AT USER adr

Output was attempted on a devi

ce that can only do input (e.g.

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) DEVICE

, the card reader).

ERROR

The DECtape control unit has

detected the loss of data or

a missed block. (COPY prog
ram).

?INPUT DEVICE NOT A DISK
The input specifications in

a QUEUE command must be

disk files. (QUEUE).

?INPUT ERROR
An 1/0 error occurred while

rewritten. (COMPIL).

reading a temporary command

4-14

file from the disk.

File should be

COMMANDS

=761 2INPUT ERROR = file.ext FILE NOT FOUND

The specified file could not be found on the input device. (FILCOM).
file.UFD

‘

%INPUT ERROR DSKn ( file.MFD ) [proj, prog]
file.SFD

not
The BACKUP program cannot access the entries in the named directory. These entries will
next
the
to
g
advancin
by
continues
program
be saved on the BACKUP medium. The BACKUP
.

directory. (BACKUP).
?INPUT ERROR, STATUS =n

An 1/0 error occurred while reading the file from disk; n is the disk error code. A new INPUT
command causes a new LOOKUP to be done. (DUMP, DAEMON).

2INPUT FAILED FOR FILE DSKn file.ext [proj, prog]
)

The INPUT failed for the specified file. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

2INPUT (or OUTPUT) PREMATURE END OF FILE

it. This may
When copying a DECtape, COPY encountered the end of file before it expected
program).
happen when copying a PDP~9 DECtape to a PDP-10 DECtape. (COPY

?INSUFFICIENT CORE FOR QUEUE

There is not enough core in system at the time of the KJOB command to make an output . queve

entry.

(QUEUE).

?INVALID ARGUMENT

The argument specified on a BACKSPACE or PARITY command is unknown. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

;GPINVALID ENTRY - TRY AGAIN

ation
An illegal project-programmer number or password was entered and did not match identific
.
(LOGIN)
password.
and
number
er
programm
projecthis
retype
to
is
user
The
in system.
?1/0 TO UNASSIGNED CHANNEL AT USER adr

An attempt was made to do an OUTPUT, IN PUT, OUT, or IN to a device that the user's pro-

gram has not initialized.

CHARACTER
H }
2x ,1S AN ILLEGAL {SWITC

An illegal character or switch was encountered in the command string. (FUDGE2).

2symbol IS A MULTIPLY DEFINED LOCAL -

The named symbol is in more than one symbol table with different values. (DUMP).

4-15

COMMANDS

-762 -

?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL

The named symbol is not in DUMPF's symbol table. (DUMP).
?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL TABLE NAME

The named symbol table has not been loaded with an XTRACT command. (DUMP).
?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED
This message is received by a user who attempts to login after the maximum
number of jobs that
the system has been set to handle has been initiated. The user should login in at a later
time.

(LOGIN).

?2JOB NOT WAITING

)

The job specified is not waiting to be continued. (JCONT).

JOB SAVED

The output is completed.
JOBn USER [p,p] LOGGED OFF TTY n AT hhmm dd-mm=~yy
DELETED <ALL> n FILES
SAVED <ALL> n FILES m TOTAL BLOCKS USED
ANOTHER JOB STILL LOGGED IN UNDER {p,pl
RUNTIME n MIN m SEC

This information is typed as user logs off successfully.
opposed to blocks written.

MNote that m is total blocks allocated as
Therefore, it is always greater than or equal
to the number of

blocks written. Files are allocated in units of blocks called clusters.
The system administra~tor selects the cluster size for each file structure, usually one block per
cluster for FH file

structures, and 5 or 10 blocks per cluster for DP file structures.
(KJOB).

?LANGUAGE PROCESSOR CONFLICT

The use of the + corstruction has resulted in a mixture of source languages.

(COMPIL).

?LEVEL D ONLY

The command issued is available only in 5-series monitors.
?UNKAGE ERROR - RUN UUO

An 1/O error occurred while reading a program from the device SYS:.

(COMPIL).

%LISTING DEVICE OUTPUT ERROR, STATUS =

The device specified for the output has an error. A new OUT
command selecti ng a new file
can be given or an OUT and APPEND command sequence
to try again. (DUMP).
?LISTING ENTER FAILURE n

The ENTER to write the output file fai led; n is the disk error code.

4-16

(QUEUE).

- 763 -

COMMANDS

2LISTING OPEN FAILURE ON DEVICE dev

The OPEN failed on device dev. (QUEUE).

? LOCKED-OUT BY OPERATOR

The operator is preventing any new daccesses to the file' structure in order that it may be

re-

moved. (MOUNT).

file structure name LOGGED OUT QUOTA n EXCEEDED BY m BLOCKS

is greater than his logged out quota. The duser
The user's allocation on the file structure named
allowe to
must go through the CONFIRM dialogue and delete files until he is under the quota
log off. (KJOB, LOGOUT).

%LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, DEVICE dev ASSIGNED

name to another device. The logical name is cleare
The user previously assigned this logical second
.
from the first device and assigned to the

?LOGIN PLEASE

in has been typed to the monitor; it cannof
A command that requires the user to be logged
.
accepted until the user performs a LOGIN

2LOGIN PLEASE TO USE SWITCH CREATE

The user must be logged in to make a new entry into a system queve. (QUEUE).

2LOOKUP ERROR n
?file.ext FILE NOT FOUND

The named file cannot be found in the directory on the specified device. (GLO

9%LOOKUP ERROR DSKn file [proj, progl

The BACKUP or RESTORE program cannot access the indica: ted file and continues
to the next file. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

' 2LOOKUP FAILED, "BSLDR.REL"

by skipping

. REL.

While processing the /L switch, COPY could not find the bootstrap loader named BSLDR
(COPY program).

2 LOOKUP FAILURE

The LOOKUP to read the disk file failed. This message is followed by a line: explaining
reason for failure. (FUDGE2).

2file structure name LOOKUP FAI LURE n

The LOOKUP to read the file failed; n is the disk error code.

4-17

the

COMMANDS

- 764 -

?LOOKUP FAILURE FOR INPUT FILE n file
DUMP cannot read the input file. (DUMP).

?LOOKUP FAILURE n ON DAEMON FILE
The LOOKUP to read the DAEMON file fai led;

n is the disk error code. (DAEMON).

?MAX = n

A value was specified for an argument that is greater
than the maximum value (n) allowed.
(DUMP).
?MAY NOT LOGIN AS MFD PPN

No one can login as [1, 1] because this number is the
project=programmer number of the MFD
.
(LOGIN).

LOCAL
'

)

TMAY NOT LOGIN { DATA SET
BATCH JOB SUBJOB

REMOTE

REMOTE CTY OR OPR )

ACCT. SYS entry does not permit the projec

t-programmer number to login at the termina

being used. (LOGIN).

l that is

?MAY NOT LOGOUT WITH FILE STRUCT

URES FOR LOGICAL NAMES

A file structure in the job's search list is assign
names are recognized.

ed
a logical name, and only physical device

The user should deassign the logicak
names.

(KJOB,

LOGOUT).

?MEM PAR ERROR AT USER PC adr

The processor detected a memory parity error

cuting.

in the low or high segment while the job was

The adr is the address of the PC stored

the parity error.

exe-

by the hardware rather than the user address

The operator also receives an error message giving

the range of absolute ad-

dresses in case memory reconfiguration is necessa
ry. DAEMON is awakened in order to record
the pertinent information about the error for
field service personnel.
The user must start a new copy of his program
by typing the appropriate monitor command R,
RUN, or GET. He should not start the progra
m over by typing START, since the error is
likely

to reoccur or the~program operate with

incorrect data.

2MFD {E%KUP} FAILURE
The MFD cannot be accessed. (BACKUP).

?MORE THAN ONE { OUTPUT}DEVICE ILLEGAL
INPUT

Files for the BACKUP operations can be

(BACKUP, RESTORE).

taken from or written to only one device

4-18

at a time.

COMMANDS

=765 -

?MORE THAN ONE OUTPUT FILE ILLEGAL

Only one output queue~name may be specified in the QUEUE command string. (QUEUE).

device MOUNTED

The device is mounted and ready for use. The MOUNT command has completed. If a file

structure was mounted, a list of the unit ID's and the drives on which they are mounted is
output. (MOUNT).
?device MOUNT INCOMPLETE

The MOUNT command has not completed successfully. In most cases, the reasons for failure
have already been listed by nonerror messages. In a Batch job, MOUNT INCOMPLETE not
preceded by a message may indicate that the user is attempting to mount a spooled device
without executing a SET SPOOL command to unspool the device. The user must have
unspool privileges in his accounting file entry in order to unspool and mount spooled devices.

?MUST BE IN OWNER'S PROJECT FOR'SING‘LE ACCESS

The user may not request single-access (/SINGLE switch) unless he has the same project num-

ber as the owner of the file structure. This requirement is enforced since a user with si ngle

access may execute super-USETI/USETO UUOs. (MOUNT).
name MUST NOT BE A LOGICAL NAME

The structure named contains the operator request queue (3,3.UFD) and must not be the logical
'

name for some other structure. (MOUNT).

?file structure name MUST NOT BE WRITE-PROTECTED

The named structure is being used to queue requests to the operator and therefore may not be
write~-protected, SETSRC may be used to change the protection. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT,
FILE).

NAME:

The ACCT.SYS entry for this project-programmer number requires the user to type a name which
matches the one in ACCT.SYS in order to login. (LOGIN).

?NEED 5.03 OR LATER FOR REATTACH COMMAND
The REATTA program depends on UUOs available in the 5.03 release of the monitor. The user
attempted to run the program using an older monitor. (REATTA).
?NESTING TOO DEEP

The @ construction exceeds a depth of nine and may be due to a loop of @ command files.
'

(COMPIL).

?NO CORE ASSIGNED

No core was allocated when the GET command was given and no core argument was specified

in the GET.

NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED

No differences were found between the two input files. (FILCOM).
4-19

COMMANDS

- 766 -

?(1) NO DIRECTORY FOR PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBER ~ file.ext
A UFD does not exist for the requested project-programmer number.

(COMPIL).

?NO END BLOCK ENCOUNTERED

The last block of the bootstrap loader program must be an end block (refer to the MACRO

manual). (COPY program).

?NO ENTRY IN AUXACC.5YS
NC SEARCH LIST OR UFDS CREATED

If the user has no entry in AUXACC.SYS, LOGIN does not creaie UFDS or a search
list. User
is logged-in and has UFDs if they existed previously. He may write only on file structures that
have UFDs or read all file structures. He may also create a file structure search list
with
SETSRC.

The user can create UFDs on those file structures for which he has an enfry in

QUOTA.SYS by using the MOUNT command.

(LOGIN).

NO ENTRY IN QUOTA.SYS

The user may utilize the file structure, but no UFD is created if he
does already have one.
(MOUNT).
%NO INFO ON "name"

The user specified a feature that has no available documentation.

(HELP).

?NO INPUT DEVICE SPECIFIED
SPECIFY INPUT DEVICE NOW:

An input device name was not specified prior to the START command.

(RESTORE).

?NO MODIFIER ALLOWED IN SWITCH switch
The switch specified cannot have an argument. (QUEUE).
NONE PENDING

None of the user's requests to the operator are pending.
?NON-EXISTENT DRIVE DPAn

The user has specified a drive that does not exist in the system.

(MOUNT).

%NON-EXISTENT FILE input specification

The file specified for input could not be found.
is specified for the file. (QUEUE).

?NON-EX MEM AT USER adr

Usually due to an error in the monitor.

4-20

This message is not output if the /NEW switch

- 767 -

COMMANDS

2NO OPR.JOB FOR THIS REQUEST

An operator request has been issued, but there is no OMOUNT running and enabled to service
the request. The request is still queued unless the /PAUSE switch was given.

?NO OUTPUT DEVICE SPECIFIED
SPECIFY OUTPUT DEVICE NOW:

An output device name was not specified prior to the START command. (BACKUP).

?NO PRIVILEGES TO SET CPU

The user does not have the privilege bits set by LOGIN from ACCT.SYS to change the CPU

specification. The user should request that these privilege bits be set by the system manager.
?NO PRIVS TO UNSPOOL

The user does not have privileges to unspool devices, and the operator has not set bit 28 in the
STATES word.

?NO REMOTE USERS. TRY AGAIN LATER

The operator has used the SET SCHEDULE command to prevent LOGINs from remote terminals.
The message of the day is still typed. (LOGIN).

NO ROOM IN QUEUE, TRY AGAIN LATER

There is no room in the queue for the user's request to be sent to the operator. (MOUNT).

2(14) NO ROOM OR QUOTA EXCEEDED - file. ext

There is no room on the file structure or the user's quota on the file structure has been exceeded.

%NO RUNNING CPUS IN SPECIFICATION

If none of the CPUs in the job's CPU specification are running, the user receives this message '

every minufe until the CPU is started or he fypes a new SET CPU command.

?NO START ADR

Starting address or reenter address is zero, because the user failed to specify the starting address in the END statement of the source program or in the START command. However, an im=
plicit starting address of 0 may be specified.

?NO SUCH DEVICE

The device name does not exist or was not assigned to this job.

?NO SUCH JOB

An attempt was made to attach to a job that has not been initialized.

?NO SUCH STR

A nonexistent file structure was specified_. (KJOB).
4-21

COMMANDS

- 768 -

?NO SUCH TTY

The terminal number is not part of the system configuration.
?NO SUCH UNIT

The unit does not exist or all units of this type are in use.
?NOT A JOB

The job number is not assigned to any currently running job.

(ATTACH, DSK, JCONT).

There is no job logged in at this terminal. (CONTINUE).

?2NOT A SAVE FILE

The file is not a core image file.
?NOT A SPOOLING DEVICE

The device specified is not one of the spooling devices (LPT,

CDP, CDR, PTP, PLT).

?NOT A STR = TRY AGAIN

The file structure specified is not recognized by the monitor.
?NOT ATTY

The device name given is not a teminal. (REATTA).
?drive NOT AVAILABLE
The drive indicated by the user is not currently available. (MOUNT)
.

?command NOT CODED
A command that is not in this version of DUMP was specified

in the command string. (DUMP).

?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
An insufficient number of files of one type has been specified

. (FUDGE2).

?NOT ENOUGH CORE

The system cannot sup;ply enough core to use as buffers or to read in a system
(COMPIL).

program.

NOT ENOUGH DRIVES AVAILABLE

There are currently nct enough drives of the right type

to mount the file structure. (MOUNT).

NOT ENOUGH TABLE SPACE FOR SWAPPING UNITS

There are more swapping units than DAEMON allowed

(DAEMON).

4-22

for.

DAEMON should be reassembled.

- 769 -

COMMANDS

?dev file.ext program NOT FOUND

or in the file specified. 1f a program name
The file or the program was not found on the device
m names in the command string appear in
progra
the
that
is printed, this message may indicate
the file. Therefore, the program may actually

ce within
a sequence different from their sequen
ect sequence in the command string. (FUDGE2).
incorr
the
of
e
becaus
missed
exist but was

?file. SAV NOT FOUND

The program file requested cannot be found on the s.‘ysfem device or the specified device

drive NOT READY

write-locked when write~enabled was reThe indicated drive is either off-line or physically
T).

quested. The operator will be notified. (MOUN
2NOT YET SUPPORTED COMMAND CODE switch

A switch has been specified that is not implemented. (QUEUE).

NO UFD CREATED

The user may access the file structure, but he cannot write in his disk area since he

has no

UFD. (MOUNT).

?NULL DEVICE ILLEGAL

A colon has been found without a preceding device name. (QUEUE, BACKUP, RESTORE).

of an expression, & non-existent location was specified when
While computing the value (DUMP)
.

PNXM adr

referencing the input file.

“?nk OF CORE NEEDED or ?nP OF CORE NEEDED

n is the size being requested for the segment
There is insufficient free core to load the files; sum
of the high and low segments). This mesthat failed (either high or low segment, not the has been
exceeded or the core for this job has

for the system
sage occurs when the virtual coretype
and
CORE.) to determine what core has been exceedofed,core
should
user
been exceeded. The
unit
the
is
which
words
1024
whether the high or low segment was too big. K denotes
unif of
“allocation on a KA10-based system, and P denotes 512 words (one page) which is the
allocation on a KI10-based system.

2 OFFSET = 1000 TO 777600 (OCTAL)

‘The offset specified by the user is not within the acceptable range. (COPY program).

2 ONLY BATCH USERS MAY LOGIN. TRY AGAIN LATER

command to prevent LOGINSs, except for BATCH
The operator-has used the SET SCHEDULE
typed. (LOGIN).
jobs. The message of the day is still

4-23

COMMANDS

=770 -

? OPEN FAILED FOR DEVICE dev

The OPEN for the named device failed

. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

?OPEN FAILURE ON DATA DEVI

CE dev

The OPEN on the specified device fajled

. (DUMP),

OPERATOR BUSY, HANG ON PLEASE.
The user must wait for the operator

to become available.

OPERATOR NOTIFIED

(1) The operator is available and the user
may continue typing his message. (PLEAS
E).
(2) A request is queued to the operator to
perform a specified action. (MOUNT, DISMO
UNT).
OPERATOR REQUESTED TO MOUN

T UNITS

A request is queued to the operator to
mount and ready the packs on the proper
drives.
(MOUNT).

OPERATOR REQUESTED TO READY DRIVE

One or more drives (as specified by previo

us messages) are not ready.

the operator. (MOUNT),

OPERATOR REQUESTED TO REMOVE

PACKS

A request to physically remove the packs
OTHER USERS - CANNOT SINGLE

A request is queued to

has been queued to the operator. (DISM
OUNT),

ACCESS

Other users are currently using the
file structure that has been specified
with the single~access
switch (/SINGLE). The switch is ignore
d. (MOUNT).

OTHER USERS - CANT REMOVE
A DISMOUNT command requesting
issued and there are other users of

physical removal (/REMOV switc
h) of a pack has been

the pack.

The switch s ignored. (DISMOUNT)
.

OTHER USERS SAME PPN

A program has determined that other
programmer number.

(LOGIN,

jobs are currently logged=in under the

KJOB).

same project-

?0OUT OF BOUNDS
The specified adr is not in the user's

user does not have privileges to

? OUTPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT

core area, or the high segment is write
-protected

the file that initialized the high

segment. (D, E).

DO INPUT AT USER adr

An attempt was made to input from

an output device (e.g., the line printe
r).

4-24

and the

COMMANDS

-771 ? OUTPUT DEVICE ERROR

An error has occurred on the output device. (FI LCOM).

? OUTPUT ERROR

An 1/0 error occurred while writing a femporary command file on disk. (COMPIL).

? OUTPUT ERROR, STATUS =n

An 1/0 error occurred while writing the file on disk; n is the disk error code. (DAEMON).

2 OUTPUT INITIALIZATION ERROR

The output device cannot be initialized for one of the following reasons
1. The device doe not exist or is assigned to another job.
. 2.

The device is not an output device.

- 3. The file cannot be placed on the output device. (FILCOM).

PASSWORD:

s that in the ACCT.SYS entry for this project- a
The user must i'ypé o PASSWORD which matche
e PASSWORD security. If the user is at
programmer number. Echoing is suppressed to preserv
ed by a sequence of random over=typed
half-duplex (local copy) terminal, this message is replac(LOGI
N).
characters, over which the user types his PASSWORD.

PAUSE. .. (1C TO QUIT, CR TO CONT)

operator action is about to be requested.feed1C
The /PAUSE switch has been specified,t isand-an
operator. Carriage return-line
d
queue
aborts the command before the reques the requestfois the
queued to the operator. (DISMOUNT).

allows the command to continue, and

2PC OUT OF BOUNDS AT USER adr

An illegal transfer has been made by the user program to user location adr.

?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH

Attempt was made to LOGIN a job when the user already has a job initialized af that terminal.
(LOGIN).

?PLEASE LOGIN AS [OPR]

ON.

The operator is the only person that can initialize DAEMON by typing R DAEM

? PLEASE TYPE 1C FIRST

A command which would start a job has been issued after a CSTART or CCONT.

? PPN HAS EXPIRED

mer number. The
expiration date of the project-program
The current date is greater than the date
(LOGIN).
er.
manag
system
the
by
ed
is chang
user may not login until expiration
4~25

COMMANDS

=772 -

?PROGRAM ERROR WHILE RESETTING MASTE

R DEVICE

FUDGE2 cannot find the master device or cannot

(FUDGE2).

find the program on the master device.

?PROJECT 1 MAY NOT BE PTY
Project 1 is never allowed to login over a pseudo

~TTY.

PPROTECTION FAILURE DSK file.ext

(LOGIN).

[prof, prog]

The user does not have access to the specifi

ed disk areas for either a read or
a write.

(BACKUP, RESTORE).

?(2) PROTECTION FAILURE - file.ext
There was a protection failure or the directo

ry on DECtape had no room for the file. (COMPI
L).

?PTR INIT FAILURE

The logical device PTR is not available or

could not otherwise be initialized.

(COPY program).

QUOTA. SYS LOOKUP FAILURE

The LOOKUP to read QUOTA.SYS failed

. (MOUNT).

QUOTA. SYS NOT ON STRUCTURE
QUOTA. SYS is not part of this structure.
UFD will be created. (MOUNT).

The user may still use the file structure,

but no

QUOTA. SYS READ ERROR

An I/0 error occurred while reading QUOT

A.SYS. (MOUNT),

QUOTA. SYS WRONG FORMAT VERSI

Wrong version of QUOTA.SYS is on

(MOUNT).

%READ ERROR DSKn file [prej,

the file structure being mounted.

Consult the operator.

prog]

The BACKUP or RESTQRE program cannot

input the designated file. (BACKUP,
RESTCRE).

?file structure name RENAME FAILURE n
The RENAME to change the protection

of the file failed; n is the disk error

LOGOUT).

?(4) RENAME FILENAME ALREADY

EXISTS - file.ext

The new filename on a RENAME comma

nd already exists. (COMPIL).

4-26

code. (KJOB,

- 773 -

COMMANDS

REQUEST STORED

n COMMANDS IN QUEUE

to be performed when possible. nis
has been placed in a queue MOUN
The request typed by the user queue
T, DISMOUNT).
for all users. (FILE,
the number of requests in the

?REQUIRES DEVICE NAME

The device name or file structure name is required with the MOUNT and DISMOUNT

commands.

$RESTOR COMPLETED AT time

The RESTORE program has successfully completed. (RESTORE).

?RIGHT BRACKET REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY

The project-programmer number must be enclosed in square brackets. (QUEUE).

%SEARCH LIST DOES NOT ALLOW CREATES

to the user on which he can write. Run MOUNT or
There are no file structures availablenecess
ary. (LOGIN).
SETSRC to modify the search list as

%SEARCH LIST ERROR [proj, prog]

tto obtain the search list for the named projec
The BACKUP or RESTORE program is unable
UP,
(BACK
r.
numbe
mer
ogram
ct-pr
proje
ces to the next

programmer number. The program advan

‘

RESTORE).

DSK: search list that are available to the user. He can run
There are no file structures in the
his search list. (LOGIN).

%SEARCH LIST IS EMPTY

the SETSRC program to modify
ASINGLE-ACCESS BY JOBn

The file structure is already single access by the indicated user. (MOUNT).

file.ext SOFTWARE CHECKSUM OR REDUNDANCY ERROR

The file has no error as flagged in the UFD of the file structure. (LOGIN).

?SOME OTHER TIME

ed to

The user is not scheduled to LOGIN at this time. He should try again when he is allow
login. (LOGIN).

2SORRY, CANT OPEN DSK, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

2SORRY, CANT WRITE IN COMPLAINT AREA, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

4-27

COMMANDS

=774 -

?SORRY, COMPLAINT BASKET
IS FULL,

PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR

This message is returned from the GRIPE

program.

?50RRY, NO UFD FOR COMPLAIN
T BASK

ET, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
.

This message is returred from the GRIPE

program.

START OF { BACKUP } VERSION n AT time YEAR nn DAY dd
RESTORE

The BACKUP or RESTORE program

is beginning its processing.

(BACKUP, RESTORE).

?STATION NOT IN CONTACT
The requested staticn is not in conta

ct with the central station. (LOC
ATE),

?STATION NUMBER INVALID
The requested station number is

not recognized by the system. (LOC
ATE).

STRUCTURE ALREADY MOUNTED

The requested file structure alrea
dy exists and does not need to be
physically mounted.
(MOUNT).
?STRUCTURE NOT IN STRLST.SYS

The file structure name does not exist
in the system administrator's file SYS:S
TRLST.SYS and,
therefore, is not defined for the syste
m. The operator or administrator
may be requested to
défine the file structure
by adding it to STRLST.SYS with

the REACT program. (MOUNT).

?STRUUO FAILURE
The STRUUO UUO gave an error

return.

Notify the operator. (KJOB, LOGO
UT).

%SUPERSEDING EXISTING FILE

A warning message indicating that

being superseded.

a file already exists with the speci

fied name.

(TECO).

7%SWAP READ ERROR UNIT cbe

This file is

STATUS = n

An 1/0 error occurred while readi

DAEMON file as read. (DCO
RE).

ng the swapping space.

The data is written into the

?SWITCH ERROR

An illegal switch specification was

given. (COPY program).

?switch SWITCH ILLEGAL
The switch specified cannot be

used with the given queue name

. (QUEUE, BACKUP, RESTORE)
.

?SWITCH VALUE TOO LARGE x

The value given to the switch excee

ds the maximum value. (QUEUE).
4-28

COMMANDS

=775 ?SYNTAX ERROR

There is a syntax error in the command string. Check for incorrect parentheses or two operators
'

inarow.

?SYSSTR FAILURE

The SYSSTR UUO gave an error return. Notify the operator. (KJOB, LOGOUT).
?SYSTEM ERROR = xxxxxx

System errors designate operator or system errors and are not a direct fault of the user. They

are typed for possible diagnostic used.

?SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE

The operator has used the SET SCHED command to prevent LOGINs from timesharing terminals.
The message of the day is still typed. (LOGIN).

?TABLE OVERFLOW - CORE UUO FAILED TRYING TO EXPAND TO xxx

The GLOB program requested additional core from the monitor, but none was available.
(GLOB).

?THIS MONITOR WAS ByJILT FOR A xxx AND WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON A yyy
The monitor is not running on the machine for which it was built. xxx and yyy are PDP=6,
KA10, or KI10.

?TIME LUMIT EXCEEDED

The time limit allocated for the job has been reached. The job is stopped and the terminal is

refurned to monitor mode.

TIMESHARING WILL CEASE IN m HOURS n MINUTES

The KSYS command (OPSER) or SET KSYS UUO has been issued in order to stop timesharing on
the system at the indicated time.

?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS

A command has been typed, but necessary arguments are missing.

?TOO MANY FILENAMES OR PROGRAM NAMES

More than 40 program names or filenames were specufled in the command string. The user
should separate the job into several segments. (FUDGE2).
?2TOO MANY FILE STRUCTURES

The number of file structures exceeds the capacity of the monitor data base. The current limif
is ]410.

(ONCE ONLY).

4-29

- COMMANDS

= 776 -

?TOO MANY NAMES or ?TOO MANY SWITCHES
Command string complexity exceeds table space in the COMPIL program. (COMPIL).

?TRANSMISSION ERROR
During a SAVE, GET, or RUN command, the system received parity errors from the device, or

was unable to read the user's file in some other way.

This can be as simple as trying to write

on a write~locked tape.

?TRANSMISSION ERROR ON INPUT DEVICE dev

A transmission error has occurred while reading data from the specified device. (FUDGE2).
?TRIED TO OVERWRITE DATA WORD
After writing the core image file, DAEMON backs up to overwrite a word not known pre-

viously (e.g., the length of the category). In overwriting the word, DAEMON encountered
a deviation from the standard pattern used in originally writing the word. (DAEMON).

?TRY LARGER ARG

The specified argument is too small for the program.
output. (CORE).

This message is followed by the standard

?TTYn ALREADY ATTACHED

Job number is erroneous and is attached to another console, or another user is attached to the
iob.
?TTY IN USE

The terminal requestec! is already controlling a job or is otherwise in use. (REATTA).
TYPE CORE BANK OR OFFSET FOR DTBOOT

On a /T switch, COPY asks for a core bank or offset for the bootstrap loader.

is 16K to 256K and the offset is 1000 to 777600 octal. (COPY program).

The core bank
'

TYPE H FOR HELP
An unintelligible response or command has been typed.

Either the filename or the CONFIRM:

message is repeated} depending upon what was typed. (KJOB).

?UFD ENTER FAILURE n

Failure in trying to create UFD; n is the disk error code.

Notify the operator. (LOGIN).

%UFD ERROR DSKn [proj, prog]

The BACKUP or RESTORE program cannot access the UFD (LOOKUP failure).
the next UFD. (BACKUP, RESTORE).

4-30

It advances to

‘

~777 -

COMMANDS

?file structure name UFD INTERLOCK BUSY

Could not get UFD interlock when trying to set up a UFD. The UFD is not currently set up.

Notify the operator. (LOGIN).
?UFD LOOKUP FAILURE n

A failure occurred in setting up a UFD; n is the disk error code. Notify the operator. (LOGIN).
?UFD OUTPUT FAILURE n

The output failed when trying to create the UFD (4-series); n is the software channel status.
(LOGIN).

?file structure name UFD READ ERROR, STATUS = n

A read error occurred while reading the user's UFD on the file structure. Status n tells which
error occurred. Notify the operator. (KJOB, LOGOUT).
?UFD RENAME FAILURE n

A failure occurred in setting up a UFD; n is the disk error code. Notify the operator. (LOGIN).

?UNDEFINED SWITCH switch

The specified switch is either undefined or not unique. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT). .

2UNEQUAL NUMBER OF MASTER AND TRANSACTION PROGRAMS
On a replace request, the number of master programs (or files) does not equal the number of
transaction programs (or files). (FUDGE2).

UNIT abc ALREADY MOUNTED ON DRIVE DPAn

The file structure is already mounted but is on different drives than the user specified.
'

(MOUNT).

‘

2UNKNOWN COMMAND

The monitor passed a command to COMPIL which COMPIL does not recognize. (COMPIL).

2UNKNOWN DEFAULT FOR SWITCH switch

The default condition is not known for the specified switch. (DUMP, QUEUE).

?UNKNOWN OR INVALID COMMAND - TYPE GO TO CONTINUE
This message is typed by the BACKUP and RESTORE programs.

2UNKNOWN SWITCH switch

. The switch named has been mistyped. (DUMP, QUEUE).

4-31

COMMANDS

- 778 -

2UNKNOWN SWITCH VALUE n

The argument specified with the switch has been mistyped. (DUMP, QUEUE).
?UNRECOGNIZABLE SWITCH

An ambiguous or undefined word followed a slash. (COMPIL).
?UUJO AT USER adr

This message accompanies many error messages and indicates the location of the UUQ that was
the last instruction the user program executed before the error occurred.
n VERIFICATION ERRORS
On a word by word comparison requested via the /V switch, n discrepancies have been detected between the input DECtape and output DECtape. (COPY program).

WAITING...

A request has been queued to the operator and the command is waiting for the operator to com-

plete the request. IF the user does not want to wait for completion of the operator's action,
he can type control-C without aborting the command. The operator action will still be com-

pleted. Later a DISMOUNT/CHECK or MOUNT/CHECK can be given to check for completion. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT).
WAIT PLS

The system’s primary accounting file FACT.SYS was busy. It is retried for ten seconds before
FACT.XO01 is tried. This message can appear if many users are logging in simultaneously.
(LOGIN, KJOB, LOGOUT).
%WARNING -}NPUT REQUEST USES ONLY TWO ENTRIES

Only two files can be specified in the input queue request, the control file and the log file.
(QUEUE).

IWARNING NO INDEX ON OUTPUT FILE-CONTINUING
The user has changed the structure of the index library file when deleting, appending, or inserting, thereby invalidating the index. The index has been removed from the new file. Reindexing is required. (FUDGE2).

?dev WASNT ASSIGNED

The device is not currently assigned to the user's job and cannot be deassigned or reassigned by
the job.
2WASNT DET
The specified device is not detached.

4-32

COMMANDS

-779 NAME

2WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN INPUT QUEUE FILE DIRECTORY

EXTENSION

E).

The wildcard construction cannot be used when specifying the Batch input queve. (QUEU
NAME

2WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT { DIRECTORY

EXTENSION

E).

The wildcard construction cannot be used in the output queue specification. (QUEU
2WRITE LOCK ERROR

An attempt was made to write on a write-locked DECtape. (COPY progrdm).

2WRONG FORMAT FOR SYMBOL

m :symbol and a symbol name did not follow the
A symbol was given in the format progra
followed by a symbol. (DUMP).
in other words, the colon must be

colon;

2WRONG FORMAT VERSION NUMBER IN SYSTEM FILES

YSis on the system. Consult the operator so that he
SYS or AUXAtingCC.S
Wrong version oftoACCT.
files. (LOGIN).
change the accoun
can run REACT

YOU ARE LOGGED IN AS n,m

ammer number (project, #), this message informs him of
When a user logs in with a uniquethatprogr
LOGIN assigned. (LOGIN).
the project-programmer number

2Y OU DONT HAVE PRIVILEGES TO WRITE {géiMON} FILE

The user attempted to write in a file to which he did not have access. (DAEMON).

?1+1nK CORE.

VIR. CORE LEFT =0

in use (i.e., there isno avail~If allocated to timesharing isandallthen
The swapping space or the coreshould
attempt to login again.
s,
wait a few minute
able virtual core). The user

this message still appears, it should be reported fo the operator.

m+n/p CORE
VIR. CORE LEFT =v

Key: m = number of blocks in low segment.
n = number of blocks in high segment.
'

‘

al user core unless limited by operator, or
p = maximum core per job. (Maximum physicstem10 Monitor Calls)).
there are jobs locked in core (refer to DECsy
e.

v = number of K blocks unassigned in core and on the swapping devic

which is the unit of core allocation on ona KA10Note that nK represents 1024-word blocks
a KI10based system, and nP respresents 512-w' ord blocks which is the' unit of allocation
based system.

4-33

COMMANDS

4.2

- 780 -

ERROR CODES

The following error codes are returned in ACon

RUN and GETSEG UUOs, in location E +

argument blocks of LOOKIJP, ENTER
, and RENAME UUOs, and in
extended LOOKUP, ENTER, and RENA
ME UUOs.

the right half of location E + 3 on

The codes are defined in the S.

MAC monitor file.

Table 4-1

Error Codes

Symbol

1 on 4-word

Code

Explanation

ERFNF%

File not found, illegal filename (0,*),
or filenames do
not match (UPDATE).

ERIPP%

UFD does not exist on specified file
rect project-programmer number.)

structures.

ERPRT%

Protection failure or directory full on

ERFBM%

File being modified (ENTER).

ERAEF%

Already existing filename (RENAME) or differ

DTA.

ent i lename

(ENTER ofter LOOKUP).

ERISU%

ERTRN%

(Incor-

lllegal sequence of UUOs (RENAME
with neither
LOOKUP nor ENTER, LOOKUP after
ENTER).
a.

Transmission, device, or data error

(RUN, GETSEG only).
b.

Hardware-detected device or datq error

tected while reading the UFD RIB or

data block.
c.

de-

UED

Software-detected data inconsistenc
y error
detected while reading the UFD or
file RIB.

ERNSF%

Not a saved file (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERNEC%

ERDNA%

Not enough core (RUN, GETSEG only).

Device not available (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERNSD%

No such device (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERILU%

Illegal UUO (GETSEG only).
capability.

ERNRM%

No roem on this file structure or quota
exceeded overdrawn quota not considered).

ERWLK%

Write-lock error.

ERNET%

Not enough table space in free core

ERPOA%

Partial allocation only.

ERBNF%

Block not free on allocated position.

No two~register relocation

Cannot write on file structure.
of monitor.

(continued on next page)
4-34

- 781 -

COMMANDS

Takle 4-1 (Cont)
Error Codes

Symbol

Code

ERNSD%

ERDNE%

ERSNF%

ERLVL%

‘Cannot supersede
an existing directory (ENTER),
Cannot delete a non-empty directory (RENAME).

ERSLE%

Explanation

Sub=-directory not found (some SFD in the specified path
was not found).
Search list empty (LOOKUP or ENTER was performed on
generic device DSK and the search list is empty).
Cannot create a SFD nested deeper than the maximum
allowed level of nesting.

ERNCE%

No file structure in the job's search list has both the no-

" create bit and the write=lock bit equal to zero and has the
UFD or SFD specified by the default or explicit path
(ENTER on generic device DSK only).

ERSNS%

A GETSEG from a locked low segment is not for a high
segment that is a dormant, active, or idle segment.

4-35

COMMANDS

-782 -

- 783

COMMANDS

APPENDIX A

STANDARD FILENAME EXTENSIONS

Table A-1

Filename Extensions

Meaning

Filename Extension
AID

Source file in AID language

Source

Source file in BLISS-11
Output from the BASIC Compiler
Backup file from TECO or LINED
Source file in BASIC language

Source
Object
Source
Source

|
Blurb file
Source file in BLISS language
- Saved to show a program error
CAL data and program files
"Source file in COBOL language
Alternate convention for command file (@ com-

ASCII
Source
Object
Object
Source

ALG
ALP
ATO
B10

Source file in ALGOL |anguagé
Printer forhs alignment
OPSER automatic command file
- Source file in BLISS-10

BCM
BIN
BKP

Listing file created by FILCOM (binary compare)
Binary file for PDP-8 (DC68A)
Index file created by the BACKUP program

B11
BAC
BAK
BAS

BLB
BLI
BUG
CAL
CBL
CCL

CCO
CcDpP
CKP

Type of File

mand file construction for programs other than

COMPIL)

Source
ASCII
ASCII
Source

ASCIl1
Object
ASCIl

ASCII

Listing of modifications to non resident software
Spooled output for card punch

ASCIl
ASCII, Binary

operating system

Binary

Checkpoint core image file created by COBOL

(continued on next page)

COMMANDS

..784_

Table A-1 (Cont)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Meaning

Type of File

CHN

CHAIN file

CMD

Command file for indirect commands (@

Object

tion for COMPIL)

construc~
ASCII

CMP

Complaint file by GRIPE

ASCII

COR

Correction file for SOUP

ASClI

CRF

CREF (cross-reference) input file

ASClI

CTL

MP batch control file

DAE

Default output for DAEMON-taken

DAT

Data (FORTRAN) file

DDT

Input file to FILDDT

DIR

Directory from FILE command or DIREC

ASCII

DMP

COBOL compiler dump file

ASCII

DOC

Listing of modifications to the most recent
version
of the software

DSE

Directory sorted by extension

ASCII

DSF

Directory sorted by filename

ASCII

ERR

Error message file

Source file in FORTRAN language

FAL

Source

Source file in FAIL language

"FLO

Source

English language flowchart

ASCII

FRM

Blank form for handwritten records

ASCII

FUD

FUDGE2 listing output

HGH

Nonsharable high segment of a two-s

ASCII

core dumps

Binary

ASCII, Binary
ASClI
T program

ASCII

- ASCII

gram (created by SAVE command)

ASCII
egment proObject

HLP

Help files containing switch explanations

IDA

COBOL ISAM data file

IDX

Index file of a COBOL ISAM file

INI

Initialization file

LAP

Cutput from the LISP compiler

LIB

ASCII

COBOL source library

ASCII

LOG

MP batch log file

, etc.

ASCII
ASCII, Binary

ASCII, SIXBIT
ASCI1, Binary

ASCII

(continued on next page)
A-2

COMMANDS

- 785 -

’

- Table A=1 (Cont)

Filename Extensions

LOW

Type of File

Meaning

Filename Extension

Low segment of a two-segment program (created

by SAVE command)

Object

LPT

Spooled output for line printer

ASCIl

LSD

Default output for DUMP program

ASCII

LSP

Source file in LISP ianguage

Source

LSQ

Queve listing created by QUEUE program

ASCII

LST

Listing data created by assemblers and compilers

ASCII

MAC

Source file in MACRO language

MAN

Manual (documen_i‘afion) file

ASCII

MAP

Loader map file

ASCI

MEM

Memorandum file

ASCII

‘

Source

MIM

~ Snapshot of MIMIC simulator

Binary

MSB

Music compiler binary output

Object

- MUS

Music compiler input

Source

OLD

Backup source program

Source

OPR

Installation and assembly instructions

ASCII

OWVR

COBOL overlay file

Object

PAL

Source file in PAL 10 (PDP-8 assembler) .

Source

P11

Source program in MACXI| language

Source

PLT

Spooled output for plotter

ASCII

PTP

Spooled output for paper=tape punch
BAK files (all xx)

ASCII, Binary

ASCII

Queve request file
Master queue and request file

Binary

PL1

Qxx

QUD
QUE
QUF

“REL
RIM

RMT

RNC
RND

Source file in PL1 language .

Queved data file

Relocatable binary file
RIM loader file
Read-in mode (RIM) format file (PIP)

RUNOFF input for producing a . CCO file

RUNOFF input for producing a .DOC file

Source

ASCII, Binary/
Binary

Object
Object

Object

ASCII
ASCII

COMMANDS

- 786 -

Table A-1 (Cont)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Meaning

Type of File

RNO

Programming specifications in RUNOFF input

ASCII

RNP

RUNOFF input for producing a . OPR file

ASCII

RSP

Scripf.response time log file

ASCII

RST

Index file created by the RESTORE program

ASCII

RTB

Read-in mode (RIM10B) format file (PIP)

Object

SAV

Low segment from a one-segment program

(created by SAVE command)

Object

SCM

Listing file created by FILCOM (source compare)

ASCII

SCP

SCRIPT control file

ASCII

SEQ

Sequential COBOL data file, input to ISAM
program

ASCII,

SFD

Subfile directory (restricted usage)

Binary

SHR

Sharable high segment file of a two~segment pro-

SIXBIT

gram (created by SAVE command)

Object

SNO

Source file in SNOBOL language

Source

SNP

Snapshot of disk by DSKLST

SRC

Source files

ASCII

SVE

.SAVed file from a single user monitor

Object

SYS

Special system files

Binary

TEC

TECO macro

ASCII

TEM

Temporary files

ASCII, Binary

TMP

Temporary files

ASCII, Binary

TXT

Text file

ASCII

UFD

User file directory (restricted usage)

Binary

UPD

Updates flagged in margin (FILCOM)

ASCII

WCH

SCRIPT monitor (WATCH) file

ASCII

XPN

Expanded save file (FILEX)

Object

A-4

ASCII

COMMANDS

. =787

APPENDIX B

CARD CODES

Table B-1

ASCII Card Codes

Code

Punches

ASCII

Character

Octal

Code

Punches

12-0-9-8-1

100

8-4

Octal

NULL

Character

Card

ASCII

101
A
12-9-1
01
CTRL-A
102
B
12-9-2
02
CTRL-B
103
C
12-9-3
03
CTRL-C
104
D
9-7
04
CTRL-D
105
E
0-9-8-5
05
CTRL-E
106
F
0-9-8-6
06
F
CTRL107
G
-7
0-9-8
07
CTRL-G
110
H
11-9-6
10
CTRL-H
111
I
12-9-5
At
TAB
112
.oJ
0-9-5
12
LF
113
K
-3
12-9-8
13
VT
114
L
12-9-8-4
14
FF
115
M
-5
12-9-8
15
CR
116
N
-6
12-9-8
16
CTRL-N 117
O
12-9-8-7
17
CTRL-O
120
P
12-11-9-8-1
20
CTRL-P
121
Q
11-9-1
21
CTRL-Q
122
R
11-9-2
22
CTRL-R
123
S
11-9-3
23
CTRL-S
124
T
9-8-4
24
CTRL-T
125
U
9-8-5
25
CTRL-U
126
\%
9-2
26
CTRL-V
127
W
0-2-6
27
CTRL-W
130
X
11-9-8
30
CTRL-X
131
Y
11-9-8-1
31
CTRL-Y
132
Z
9-8~7
32
CTRL-Z
133
[
0-9-7
33
ESCAPE
134
\
11-9-8-4
34
CTRL-\"
135
]
11-9-8-5
35
CTRL-]
136
A
t
-6
11-9-8
36
CTRL-1
137
_
-7
11-9-8
37
CTRL=+
140
\
40
SPACE
al.
termin
a
on
NOTE: The ASCII character ESCAPE (octal 33) is also CTRL-[
B-1

12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2.
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
12-8-2
0-8-2
11-8-2
11-8-7
0-8-5
8-1

COMMANDS

- 788 -

Table B-1 (Cont)
ASCII Card Codes

ASCII

Character

Octal

'
(
)
*

Punches

Card

Code

Octal

Code

Card

Punches

12-8-7
8-7

142

12-0-2

11-8-3

144

12-0-4

8-3

0-8-4

47
50
51
52

ASCII

Character

141

143

12-0-1

12-0-3

145

12-0-5

146

12-0-6

8-5
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-4

g
h
i
i

147
150
151
152

12-0-7
12-0-8
12-0-9
12-11-1

12-8-6

0-8-3

153

12-11-2

154

12-11-3

155

12-8-3

12-11-4

156

12-11-5

/
0

0-1

7
8

o
p

157
160

12-11-6
12-11-7

161

12-11-8

162

12-11-9

163

11-0-2

164

11-0-3

165

166

11-0-4

167

11-0-5
11-0-6

170

11-0-7

8-2

171

11-0-8

;

172

11-8-6

11-0-9

{

173

12-0

12-8-4

8-6

174

12-11

}

175

11-0

0-8-6

0-8-7

176

DEL

11-0-1

177

12-9-7

NOTE: The ASCII characters } and ~ (octal
175 and 176) are treated by the monitor as
ALTmode
which is often considered to be the same
as ESCAPE,

COMMANDS

- 789 Table B-2
DEC-029 Card Codes

Character
SPACE
|
"
#

!
(
)
*
+

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:

;

<
=
>
?

Octal

Code
40
41
42
43

44
45

Card

11-8-2
8-7
8-3

100
101
102
103

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3

0-8-4

105

12-5

11-8-3
12

60
61
62
63.
64
65
66
67
70
71
72

74
75
76
77

104
106

G
H
I
J
K

107
110
111
112
113

115

0-1

Punches

@
A
B .
C

8-5
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-4
12-8-6

Card

Code

Punches

47
50
51
52
53

Octal

Character

0-8-3

12-8-3

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2

11-8-6

12-8-4
8-6
0-8-6
0-8-7

114

116

117

12-4
12-6

12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2

11-3

11-4
11-5

11-6

P
Q
R
S
T
U
\Y%
W
X
Y
Z

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132

11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3°
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9

\
]
t N
-

134
135
136
137

11-8-7
0-8-2
12-8-7
0-8-5

[

NOTE: Octal codes 0-37 and 140-177 are the same as in ASCII,

133

12-8-2

COMMANDS

- 790 -

Table B-3
DEC-026 Card Codes

Character

Octal

Card

Code

SPACE

!
"

12-8-7

0-8--5

‘

Punches

Character

0-8-6

Card

Code

Punches

100

8-4

101

12-1

102

12-2

104

12-4

11-8-3

Octal

103

12-3

0-8-7

11-8=7

105

12-5

106

12-6

'
(

8-6

0-8-4

107

110

12-7
12-8

)

12-8-4

11-8-4

111

12-9

112

11-1

‘

113

0-8-3

11-2

114

11-3

115

12-8-3

11-4

116

11-5

/
0

0-1

]

O
P
-

117

11-6

120

11-7

121

11-8

122

11-9

123

0-2

124

0-3
0-4

125

126

0-5

127

0-6
0-7

130

131

11-8-2/11-0

0-8

;

132

0-9

0-8-2

[

12-8-6

133

11-8-5

134

8-7

8-3

135

12-8-5

11-8-6

)

12-8-2/12-0

136

8-5

137

8-2

NOTE:

Octal codes 0-37 and 140-177 are the same as in
ASCII.

COMMANDS

=791 -

APPENDIX C

TEMPORARY FILES

ing system.

The temporary files in Table €-1 are used by various programs in the DECsystem-10 comput
These files are in the following form:
nnn xxx.TMP

where nnn is the user's job number in decimal, with leading zeroes to make three digits, and XXX
specifies the use of the file.

Table C-1
Temporary Files

Meaning

Name

nnn ALG.TMP

Read by ALGOL and contains one line for each program to be compiled. It may also contain the command NAME! which causes
ALGOL to transfer control to the named program.

nnn AS1.TMP
nnn AS2.TMP
nnn AS3.TMP
nnn BLI.TMP
nnn COB.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains input to the
COBOL assembler.

Read by BLISS and contains one line for each program to be compiled.
Read by COBOL and contains one line for each program to be compiled. It may also contain the command NAME! which causes
COBOL to transfer control to the named program.

nnn CPY.TMP
nnn CRE.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains copies of source
files with library routines inserted.

Read by CREF and contains commands for each file which has produced a CREF listing on the disk. COMPIL also reads this file each
time a new CREF listing is generated to prevent multiple requests
for the same file and to prevent discarding other requests that may
not yet have been listed.

nnn DAE.TMP
nnn DMP.TMP

Written by DAEMON to be read by DUMP.
Read by DUMP as an input command file.

COMMANDS

-792 -

Table C-1 (Cont)
Temporary Files

Name

Meaning

nnn EDS. TMP

Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the
most recent EDIT,
CREATE, TECO, or MAKE command.

nnn EDT. TMP

Written by COMPIL and read by LINED or TECO.

It contains a

command for each EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or
MAKE command.

For the MAKE or CREATE commands, it contains
the command
S file.ext [p,
p]

For TECO or EDIT commands, it contains the comman
d
S file.ext [p,p] »
nnn ERA. TMP

nnn FOR.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and
is the error file.

Read by FORTRAN and contains one line for

compiled.

each program to be

It may also contain the command NAME! which

FORTRAN fto transfer control to the named program

causes -

nnn

GEN, TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and
contains the output

synfax processing.

nnn KJO.TMP

Read by KJOB as an input command file.

nnn LGO.TMP

Read by LOGOUT as an input command file.

nnn LIN, TMP

)

Created by LINED and contains output file until

the rename

process.

nnn LIT. TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
copy of the
literal pool.

nnn LOA.TMP

Read by LOADER and contains commands necessa

nnn MAC.TMP

Read by MACRO and contains one line for each
program to be
It may also contain the command NAME! which
causes
MACRO to transfer control to the named program
.

ry for loading.

assembled.

nnn P11.TMP

Read by MACX11 (the PDP-11 assembler for the
PD‘P-]O) and con=-

tains one line for each program to be assembl
ed.

nnn PLS.TMP
nnn PIP, TMP

Read by PLEASE as an input command file.
Read by PIP and contains commands to implement

commands that run PIP,

the COMPI L~class

nnn QUE.TMP

Read by QUEUE as an input command file.

nnn

Read by RUNOFF and contains commands for
each file which has
produced a RUNOFF listing on the disk.

RNO. TMP

nnn SO01.TMP

Written, read; and deleted by COBOL and contains
the intermediate sorted results of the data.

nnn SVC.TMP

nnn SNO. TMP

Used by COMPLL to store the arguments of the most
recent COMPILE,
LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command.
Read by SNOBOL and contains one line for each program
to be

compiled.

(continued
on next page)
C-2

COMMANDS

-793 Table C-1 (Cont)
Temporary Files

Name

nnn TEC.TMP

nnn TMP,TMP
nnn XFO.TMP
nnn XFR.TMP

Meaning

process.
Created by TECO and contains output file until the rename
Created by LINED during the rename process.

Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on the output side.
Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on the input side.

COMMANDS

- 794 -

COMMANDS

-795 -

APPENDIX D
SAVE AND SSAVE COMMANDS
l

ual
Before writing SAVed or LOW files in response to SAVE and SSAVE commands (refer to the individ
ting concommand descriptions in Chapter 2), the monitor compresses the user's core image by elimina
and is used to save space on
secutive blocks of zeroes. This technique is known as zero~-compression
high segfile media. Low segment files are zero~compressed on devices DTA, MTA, and DSK, but
ment files are not because the high segment.can be shared at the time of the command.

SAVed files are ordinary binary files and can be copied using the /B switch in PIP. Files with the
The
LOW or SAV extension may be read in dump mode, but must be reexpanded before being run.
be used
monitor expands the file after input on a RUN, R, or GET command. The FILEX program may
to expand the file for other purposes.

pairs and
The data format of a zero-compressed SAVed file consists of a series of IOWDs and data block
.JBSA.
is ferminated by a JRST A where A is the program starting address as specified by the contents of
The format is as follows:

XWD -nt, adr 1-1

XWD -n2, adr 2-1

XWD -nN, adr N-1

. } nl WORDS
} n2 WORDS
} nN WORDS

JRST A
10-0544

' D-1

COMMANDS

=796 -

Each IOWD describes the length of the followi

ng data block and the original location of the
data in

core.

The LH of the IOWD can be positive in which

case the number of words is taken as the number

of words greater than 128K,

SAVed files are read into the user's core area starting

at location .JBSAV and then are expanded to

occupy the original relative locations. If the Ffirst word
read is not an IOWD and is positive,

format, noncompressed saved file is assume
d and no expansi

an old-

on is performed.

A SAVE command issued to

magnetic tape writes

ahigh segment (possibly null)

anEOF

a low segment (possibly null)

an EOF.

(=] [+

[=] =] (]

HiIGH SEGMENT

[

(]

——

NULL HiGH SEGMENT

5] (o)

LOW SEGMENT

] [
-

2] [Eo7)

—y

LOW SEGMENT

The monitor does not determine the file size of

10-0540

a low segment on a GET from magnetic tape; therefo

re,

a user must always specify a core argumen
t or have enough core assigned to his job
for the file.

To save file space, only the high segment up through
the highest nonzero

location (relative to high

segment origin) loaded, as specified in the
LH of JBHRL, will be written by the SAVE
command.

LH is zero (high segment created by CORE or
REMAP

UUO) or DDT is present, the entire high segment

will be written.

The LOADER indicates to the SAVE command how
low segment by setting the LH of .JBCOR to the

much data was loaded above the job data area in the

highest location in the low segment that was not

plicitly loaded with data (either zero or nonzero).

ex—

Most programs are written so that only the high

segment .confai ns nonzero data. In this case, SAVE and SSAVE write only the high
segments. This

also saves file space and 1/O time with the GET
A number of locations in the job data area need
data in the low segment.

command.
to be initialized on a GET, although there is

no other

The SAVE command copies these locations
into the first 10g locations of the
~

D=2

- 797 -

COMMANDS

high segment, provided it is not sharable. The locations are referred to as the vestigial job data area

(refer to DECsystem-10 Monitor Ca||s, Chapter 1). Therefore, the LOADER will load high segment
programs starting at location 4000]0

To prevent user confusion, SAVE and SSAVE delete a previous file with the extension .SHR or .HGH;

therefore, SAVE deletes a file with the extension .SHR and SSAVE deletes a file with the extension
.HGH. SAVE and SSAVE commands also delete files with the extension .LOW, if the high segment
was the only segment written.

The regular access rights of the seved file indicate whether a user can perform a GET, R, or RUN

command. These commands assume that the user wants to execute (bu’; not modify) the high segment,
independent of the access rights of the file used to initialize the segment. The monitor always enables
the hardware user-mode write protect to prevent the user program from sforing into the segment in-

advertently.

To debug a reentrant system program, the user should make a private, nonsharable copy, rather than
modify the shared version and possibly cause harm to other users. To make a private, nonsharable
copy, the following commands are used:
GET prog

SAVE
GET

Writes a file in the uselr directory as nonsharable. The high
segment in the user's addressing space remains sharable.

Overlays the sharable program with the nonsharable one from
the user's directory. Now the user can make patches while
other users share the version in the library.

If the user is debugging a sharable program in his UFD with the D command or the DDT program., it is
recommended that the progrdm be nonsharable instead of sharable. The reason for this is that the user
may wish to modify the high segment during the debugging phase and later reinitialize the original

unmodified high segment from the file with a GET command. However, si.nce the high segment is
sharable, the monitor will not do 1/O into it, will not reinitialize
it from the disk file,‘and the user
will receive the modified high segment instead.
NOTE

DDT modifies the high segment when it inserts breakpoints.

The following examples are the incorrect and correct methods of debugging a sharable program. After

the debugging phase is completed, the SSAVE command should be used to save the program,

COMMANDS

- 798 -

Example 1: Incorrect Method
)

<NFRUG prog
FXECUTICN

2SSAVE )

<GET )

;SAVE should be used in debugging
|

JOB, SETUF
F

400010

0810 /777777

717777

00O

490107

GET)
JOR_SETUP

)
F annn1a
4ARN10/7 00

Example 2:

;not the original 777777 777777

Correct Method

sPEBUG prog
)
FXECUT ION

«SAVE
)
SGET

JOR

_SETUP

400m1a
)

0016/777777

777777

3 )

W10/ 0 0
SGFT

JOB

_SETUP

oanan1a )

QAR

/777777

111777

;the original file

Note that there are applications for a sharable data segment when the modified version of the sharable
segment is wanted rather thar the original segment as initialized from the file.

The SSAVE command

is then used.
A SAVE of a one-segment prcegram and a SSAVE of a two-segment program of the same name can coexist
in the same directory, and the monitor keeps the two versions separate.

This allows for a common i-

brary, of reentrant and non-reentrant versions of the same system programs to service both the PDP-6

and the DECsystem-10.
mand.

A sharable program may be superseded into the directory by the SSAVE com-

The monitor clears the high segment in its table of sharable segments in use but does not remove

the segment from the addressing space of users currently using it.

Only the users doing a GET, R, or

RUN command or a RUN or GETSEG UUO have the new sharable version.

When the SAVE or SSAVE command is used to save a sharable program with only a high file, the moni-

tor does not modify the vestigial job data area. This prohibits unauthorized users from modifying the
first 10 locations of a shared segment by executing a SAVE or SSAVE command.

This restriction does

COMMANDS

- 799 -

file after the high file,
not exist if a low file is also written, because the GET commar;d reads the low
version number of a
so that the real job data area locations are set from the low file. To change the
are used.
sharable two-segment program with only a high file, the following commands
GET prog:
SAVE
GET

D nnn mmm 137
SSAVE

The SAVE command makes the program non-sharable so that the vestigial job data area
by the SSAVE.

D=5

can be modified

COMMANDS

- 800 -